Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisComputer Vision and Imaging in Intelligent Transportation Systems Robert P.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xvii Acknowledgments xxi About the Companion Website xxiii 1 Introduction 1 Raja Bala and Robert P. Loce 1.1 Law Enforcement and Security 1 1.2 Efficiency 4 1.3 Driver Safety and Comfort 5 1.4 A Computer Vision Framework for Transportation Applications 7 1.4.1 Image and Video Capture 8 1.4.2 Data Preprocessing 8 1.4.3 Feature Extraction 9 1.4.4 Inference Engine 10 1.4.5 Data Presentation and Feedback 11 Part I Imaging from the Roadway Infrastructure 15 2 Automated License Plate Recognition 17 Aaron Burry and Vladimir Kozitsky 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Core ALPR Technologies 18 2.2.1 License Plate Localization 19 2.2.2 Character Segmentation 24 2.2.3 Character Recognition 28 2.2.4 State Identification 38 3 Vehicle Classification 47 Shashank Deshpande, Wiktor Muron and Yang Cai 3.1 Introduction 47 3.2 Overview of the Algorithms 48 3.3 Existing AVC Methods 48 3.4 LiDAR Imaging-Based 49 3.4.1 LiDAR Sensors 49 3.4.2 Fusion of LiDAR and Vision Sensors 50 3.5 Thermal Imaging-Based 53 3.5.1 Thermal Signatures 53 3.5.2 Intensity Shape-Based 56 3.6 Shape- and Profile-Based 58 3.6.1 Silhouette Measurements 60 3.6.2 Edge-Based Classification 65 3.6.3 Histogram of Oriented Gradients 67 3.6.4 Haar Features 68 3.6.5 Principal Component Analysis 69 3.7 Intrinsic Proportion Model 72 3.8 3D Model-Based Classification 74 3.9 SIFT-Based Classification 74 3.10 Summary 75 4 Detection of Passenger Compartment Violations 81 Orhan Bulan, Beilei Xu, Robert P. Loce and Peter Paul 4.1 Introduction 81 4.2 Sensing within the Passenger Compartment 82 4.2.1 Seat Belt Usage Detection 82 4.2.2 Cell Phone Usage Detection 83 4.2.3 Occupancy Detection 83 4.3 Roadside Imaging 84 4.3.1 Image Acquisition Setup 84 4.3.2 Image Classification Methods 85 4.3.3 Detection-Based Methods 94 5 Detection of Moving Violations 101 Wencheng Wu, Orhan Bulan, Edgar A. Bernal and Robert P. Loce 5.1 Introduction 101 5.2 Detection of Speed Violations 101 5.2.1 Speed Estimation from Monocular Cameras 102 5.2.2 Speed Estimation from Stereo Cameras 108 5.2.3 Discussion 115 5.3 Stop Violations 115 5.3.1 Red Light Cameras 115 5.4 Other Violations 125 5.4.1 Wrong-Way Driver Detection 125 5.4.2 Crossing Solid Lines 126 6 Traffic Flow Analysis 131 Rodrigo Fernandez, Muhammad Haroon Yousaf, Timothy J. Ellis, Zezhi Chen and Sergio A. Velastin 6.1 What is Traffic Flow Analysis? 131 6.1.1 Traffic Conflicts and Traffic Analysis 131 6.1.2 Time Observation 132 6.1.3 Space Observation 133 6.1.4 The Fundamental Equation 133 6.1.5 The Fundamental Diagram 133 6.1.6 Measuring Traffic Variables 134 6.1.7 Road Counts 135 6.1.8 Junction Counts 135 6.1.9 Passenger Counts 136 6.1.10 Pedestrian Counts 136 6.1.11 Speed Measurement 136 6.2 The Use of Video Analysis in Intelligent Transportation Systems 137 6.2.1 Introduction 137 6.2.2 General Framework for Traffic Flow Analysis 137 6.2.3 Application Domains 143 6.3 Measuring Traffic Flow from Roadside CCTV Video 144 6.3.1 Video Analysis Framework 144 6.3.2 Vehicle Detection 146 6.3.3 Background Model 146 6.3.4 Counting Vehicles 149 6.3.5 Tracking 150 6.3.6 Camera Calibration 150 6.3.7 Feature Extraction and Vehicle Classification 152 6.3.8 Lane Detection 153 6.3.9 Results 155 6.4 Some Challenges 156 7 Intersection Monitoring Using Computer Vision Techniques for Capacity, Delay, and Safety Analysis 163 Brendan Tran Morris and Mohammad Shokrolah Shirazi 7.1 Vision-Based Intersection Analysis: Capacity, Delay, and Safety 163 7.1.1 Intersection Monitoring 163 7.1.2 Computer Vision Application 164 7.2 System Overview 165 7.2.1 Tracking Road Users 166 7.2.2 Camera Calibration 169 7.3 Count Analysis 171 7.3.1 Vehicular Counts 171 7.3.2 Nonvehicular Counts 173 7.4 Queue Length Estimation 173 7.4.1 Detection-Based Methods 174 7.4.2 Tracking-Based Methods 175 7.5 Safety Analysis 177 7.5.1 Behaviors 178 7.5.2 Accidents 182 7.5.3 Conflicts 185 7.6 Challenging Problems and Perspectives 187 7.6.1 Robust Detection and Tracking 187 7.6.2 Validity of Prediction Models for Conflict and Collisions 188 7.6.3 Cooperating Sensing Modalities 189 7.6.4 Networked Traffic Monitoring Systems 189 7.7 Conclusion 189 8 Video-Based Parking Management 195 Oliver Sidla and Yuriy Lipetski 8.1 Introduction 195 8.2 Overview of Parking Sensors 197 8.3 Introduction to Vehicle Occupancy Detection Methods 200 8.4 Monocular Vehicle Detection 200 8.4.1 Advantages of Simple 2D Vehicle Detection 200 8.4.2 Background Model–Based Approaches 200 8.4.3 Vehicle Detection Using Local Feature Descriptors 202 8.4.4 Appearance-Based Vehicle Detection 203 8.4.5 Histograms of Oriented Gradients 204 8.4.6 LBP Features and LBP Histograms 207 8.4.7 Combining Detectors into Cascades and Complex Descriptors 208 8.4.8 Case Study: Parking Space Monitoring Using a Combined Feature Detector 208 8.4.9 Detection Using Artificial Neural Networks 211 8.5 Introduction to Vehicle Detection with 3D Methods 213 8.6 Stereo Vision Methods 215 8.6.1 Introduction to Stereo Methods 215 8.6.2 Limits on the Accuracy of Stereo Reconstruction 216 8.6.3 Computing the Stereo Correspondence 217 8.6.4 Simple Stereo for Volume Occupation Measurement 218 8.6.5 A Practical System for Parking Space Monitoring Using a Stereo System 218 8.6.6 Detection Methods Using Sparse 3D Reconstruction 220 9 Video Anomaly Detection 227 Raja Bala and Vishal Monga 9.1 Introduction 227 9.2 Event Encoding 228 9.2.1 Trajectory Descriptors 229 9.2.2 Spatiotemporal Descriptors 231 9.3 Anomaly Detection Models 233 9.3.1 Classification Methods 233 9.3.2 Hidden Markov Models 234 9.3.3 Contextual Methods 234 9.4 Sparse Representation Methods for Robust Video Anomaly Detection 236 9.4.1 Structured Anomaly Detection 237 9.4.2 Unstructured Video Anomaly Detection 243 9.4.3 Experimental Setup and Results 245 9.5 Conclusion and Future Research 253 Part II Imaging from and within the Vehicle 257 10 Pedestrian Detection 259 Shashank Deshpande and Yang Cai 10.1 Introduction 259 10.2 Overview of the Algorithms 259 10.3 Thermal Imaging 260 10.4 Background Subtraction Methods 261 10.4.1 Frame Subtraction 261 10.4.2 Approximate Median 262 10.4.3 Gaussian Mixture Model 263 10.5 Polar Coordinate Profile 263 10.6 Image-Based Features 265 10.6.1 Histogram of Oriented Gradients 265 10.6.2 Deformable Parts Model 266 10.6.3 LiDAR and Camera Fusion–Based Detection 266 10.7 LiDAR Features 268 10.7.1 Preprocessing Module 268 10.7.2 Feature Extraction Module 268 10.7.3 Fusion Module 268 10.7.4 LIPD Dataset 270 10.7.5 Overview of the Algorithm 270 10.7.6 LiDAR Module 272 10.7.7 Vision Module 275 10.7.8 Results and Discussion 276 10.7.8.1 LiDAR Module 276 10.7.8.2 Vision Module 276 10.8 Summary 280 11 Lane Detection and Tracking Problems in Lane Departure Warning Systems 283 Gianni Cario, Alessandro Casavola and Marco Lupia 11.1 Introduction 283 11.2 LD: Algorithms for a Single Frame 285 11.2.1 Image Preprocessing 285 11.2.2 Edge Extraction 287 11.2.3 Stripe Identification 291 11.2.4 Line Fitting 294 11.3 LT Algorithms 297 11.3.1 Recursive Filters on Subsequent N frames 298 11.3.2 Kalman Filter 298 11.4 Implementation of an LD and LT Algorithm 299 11.4.1 Simulations 300 11.4.2 Test Driving Scenario 300 11.4.3 Driving Scenario: Lane Departures at Increasing Longitudinal Speed 300 11.4.4 The Proposed Algorithm 302 11.4.5 Conclusions 303 12 Vision-Based Integrated Techniques for Collision Avoidance Systems 305 Ravi Satzoda and Mohan Trivedi 12.1 Introduction 305 12.2 Related Work 307 12.3 Context Definition for Integrated Approach 307 12.4 ELVIS: Proposed Integrated Approach 308 12.4.1 Vehicle Detection Using Lane Information 309 12.4.2 Improving Lane Detection using On-Road Vehicle Information 312 12.5 Performance Evaluation 313 12.5.1 Vehicle Detection in ELVIS 313 12.5.2 Lane Detection in ELVIS 316 12.6 Concluding Remarks 319 13 Driver Monitoring 321 Raja Bala and Edgar A. Bernal 13.1 Introduction 321 13.2 Video Acquisition 322 13.3 Face Detection and Alignment 323 13.4 Eye Detection and Analysis 325 13.5 Head Pose and Gaze Estimation 326 13.5.1 Head Pose Estimation 326 13.5.2 Gaze Estimation 328 13.6 Facial Expression Analysis 332 13.7 Multimodal Sensing and Fusion 334 13.8 Conclusions and Future Directions 336 14 Traffic Sign Detection and Recognition 343 Hasan Fleyeh 14.1 Introduction 343 14.2 Traffic Signs 344 14.2.1 The European Road and Traffic Signs 344 14.2.2 The American Road and Traffic Signs 347 14.3 Traffic Sign Recognition 347 14.4 Traffic Sign Recognition Applications 348 14.5 Potential Challenges 349 14.6 Traffic Sign Recognition System Design 349 14.6.1 Traffic Signs Datasets 352 14.6.2 Colour Segmentation 354 14.6.3 Traffic Sign's Rim Analysis 359 14.6.4 Pictogram Extraction 364 14.6.5 Pictogram Classification Using Features 365 14.7 Working Systems 369 15 Road Condition Monitoring 375 Matti Kutila, Pasi Pyykonen, Johan Casselgren and Patrik Jonsson 15.1 Introduction 375 15.2 Measurement Principles 376 15.3 Sensor Solutions 377 15.3.1 Camera-Based Friction Estimation Systems 377 15.3.2 Pavement Sensors 379 15.3.3 Spectroscopy 380 15.3.4 Roadside Fog Sensing 382 15.3.5 In-Vehicle Sensors 383 15.4 Classification and Sensor Fusion 386 15.5 Field Studies 390 15.6 Cooperative Road Weather Services 394 15.7 Discussion and Future Work 395 Index 399

Read more less

Book SynopsisUniquely reflects an engineering view to social systems in a wide variety of contexts of application Social Systems Engineering: The Design of Complexity brings together a wide variety of application approaches to social systems from an engineering viewpoint. The book defines a social system as any complex system formed by human beings. Focus is given to the importance of systems intervention design for specific and singular settings, the possibilities of engineering thinking and methods, the use of computational models in particular contexts, and the development of portfolios of solutions. Furthermore, this book considers both technical, human and social perspectives, which are crucial to solving complex problems. Social Systems Engineering: The Design of Complexity provides modelling examples to explore the design aspect of social systems. Various applications are explored in a variety of areas, such as urban systems, health care systems, socio-eTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xiii Introduction: The Why, What and How of Social Systems Engineering 1César García-Díaz and Camilo Olaya Part I SOCIAL SYSTEMS ENGINEERING: THE VERY IDEA 11 1 Compromised Exactness and the Rationality of Engineering 13Steven L. Goldman 1.1 Introduction 13 1.2 The Historical Context 14 1.3 Science and Engineering: Distinctive Rationalities 20 1.4 ‘Compromised Exactness’: Design in Engineering 23 1.5 Engineering Social Systems? 26 References 29 2 Uncertainty in the Design and Maintenance of Social Systems 31William M. Bulleit 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Uncertainties in Simple and Complicated Engineered Systems 33 2.3 Control Volume and Uncertainty 35 2.4 Engineering Analysis and Uncertainty in Complex Systems 37 2.5 Uncertainty in Social Systems Engineering 39 2.6 Conclusions 42 References 42 3 System Farming 45Bruce Edmonds 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Uncertainty, Complexity and Emergence 46 3.2.1 The Double Complexity of CSS 48 3.3 Science and Engineering Approaches 49 3.3.1 The Impossibility of a Purely Design-Based Engineering Approach to CSS 51 3.3.2 Design vs. Adaptation 52 3.3.3 The Necessity of Strongly Validated Foundations for Design-Based Approaches 53 3.4 Responses to CSS Complexity 54 3.4.1 Formal Methods 54 3.4.2 Statistical Approaches 55 3.4.3 Self-adaptive and Adaptive Systems 57 3.4.4 Participatory Approaches and Rapid Prototyping 57 3.5 Towards Farming Systems 58 3.5.1 Reliability from Experience Rather Than Control of Construction 58 3.5.2 Post-Construction Care Rather Than Prior Effort 58 3.5.3 Continual Tinkering Rather Than One-Off Effort 59 3.5.4 Multiple Fallible Mechanisms Rather Than One Reliable Mechanism 59 3.5.5 Monitoring Rather Than Prediction 59 3.5.6 Disaster Aversion Rather Than Optimizing Performance 59 3.5.7 Partial Rather Than Full Understanding 59 3.5.8 Specific Rather Than Abstract Modelling 60 3.5.9 Many Models Rather Than One 60 3.5.10 A Community Rather Than Individual Effort 60 3.6 Conclusion 60 References 61 4 Policy between Evolution and Engineering 65Martin F.G. Schaffernicht 4.1 Introduction: Individual and Social System 65 4.2 Policy – Concept and Process 67 4.3 Human Actors: Perception, Policy and Action 70 4.4 Artefacts 73 4.5 Engineering and Evolution: From External to Internal Selection 76 4.6 Policy between Cultural Evolution and Engineering 79 4.7 Conclusions and Outlook 82 Appendix: Brief Overview of the Policy Literature 83 References 86 5 ‘Friend’ versus ‘Electronic Friend’ 91Joseph C. Pitt References 99 Part II METHODOLOGIES AND TOOLS 101 6 Interactive Visualizations for Supporting Decision-Making in Complex Socio-technical Systems 103Zhongyuan Yu, Mehrnoosh Oghbaie, Chen Liu, William B. Rouse and Michael J. Pennock 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 Policy Flight Simulators 104 6.2.1 Background 104 6.2.2 Multi-level Modelling 105 6.2.3 People’s Use of Simulators 106 6.3 Application 1 – Hospital Consolidation 108 6.3.1 Model Overview 110 6.3.2 Results and Conclusions 117 6.4 Application 2 – Enterprise Diagnostics 118 6.4.1 Automobile Industry Application 119 6.4.2 Interactive Visualization 122 6.4.3 Experimental Evaluation 125 6.4.4 Results and Discussion 125 6.4.5 Implications 128 6.5 Conclusions 128 References 129 7 Developing Agent-Based Simulation Models for Social Systems Engineering Studies: A Novel Framework and its Application to Modelling Peacebuilding Activities 133Peer-Olaf Siebers, Grazziela P. Figueredo, Miwa Hirono and Anya Skatova 7.1 Introduction 133 7.2 Background 134 7.2.1 Simulation 134 7.2.2 Peacebuilding 135 7.3 Framework 137 7.3.1 Toolkit Design 138 7.3.2 Application Design 142 7.4 Illustrative Example of Applying the Framework 143 7.4.1 Peacebuilding Toolkit Design 143 7.4.2 Peacebuilding Application Design 149 7.4.3 Engineering Actions and Interventions in a Peacebuilding Context 153 7.5 Conclusions 155 References 155 8 Using Actor-Network Theory in Agent-Based Modelling 157Sandra Méndez-Fajardo, Rafael A. Gonzalez and Ricardo A. Barros-Castro 8.1 Introduction 157 8.2 Agent-Based Modelling 158 8.2.1 ABM Approaches 159 8.2.2 Agent Interactions 160 8.3 Actor-Network Theory 160 8.4 Towards an ANT-Based Approach to ABM 162 8.4.1 ANT Concepts Related to ABM 162 8.5 Design Guidelines 163 8.6 The Case of WEEE Management 166 8.6.1 Contextualizing the Case Study 167 8.6.2 ANT Applied to WEEE Management in Colombia 168 8.6.3 ANT–ABM Translation Based on the Case Study 172 8.6.4 Open Issues and Reflections 173 8.7 Conclusions 174 References 175 9 Engineering the Process of Institutional Innovation in Contested Territory 179Russell C. Thomas and John S. Gero 9.1 Introduction 179 9.2 Can Cyber Security and Risk be Quantified? 181 9.2.1 Schools of Thought 181 9.3 Social Processes of Innovation in Pre-paradigmatic Fields 183 9.3.1 Epistemic and Ontological Rivalry 183 9.3.2 Knowledge Artefacts 184 9.3.3 Implications of Theory 184 9.4 A Computational Model of Innovation 186 9.4.1 Base Model: Innovation as Percolation 186 9.4.2 Full Model: Innovation with Knowledge Artefacts 190 9.4.3 Experiment 190 9.5 Discussion 194 Acknowledgements 194 References 195 Part III CASES AND APPLICATIONS 197 10 Agent-Based Explorations of Environmental Consumption in Segregated Networks 199Adam Douglas Henry and Heike I. Brugger 10.1 Introduction 199 10.1.1 Micro-drivers of Technology Adoption 201 10.1.2 The Problem of Network Segregation 202 10.2 Model Overview 203 10.2.1 Synopsis of Model Parameters 204 10.2.2 Agent Selection by Firms 205 10.2.3 Agent Adoption Decisions 206 10.3 Results 206 10.3.1 Influence of Firm Strategy on Saturation Times 207 10.3.2 Characterizing Adoption Dynamics 208 10.3.3 Incentivizing Different Strategies 210 10.4 Conclusion 212 Acknowledgements 212 References 213 11 Modelling in the ‘Muddled Middle’: A Case Study of Water Service Delivery in Post-Apartheid South Africa 215Jai K. Clifford-Holmes, Jill H. Slinger, Chris de Wet and Carolyn G. Palmer 11.1 Introduction 215 11.2 The Case Study 216 11.3 Contextualizing Modelling in the ‘Muddled Middle’ in the Water Sector 217 11.4 Methods 219 11.5 Results 220 11.6 Discussion 228 Acknowledgements 230 References 231 12 Holistic System Design: The Oncology Carinthia Study 235Markus Schwaninger and Johann Klocker 12.1 The Challenge: Holistic System Design 235 12.2 Methodology 236 12.3 Introduction to the Case Study: Oncology Carinthia 238 12.3.1 Setting the Stage 238 12.3.2 Framing: Purpose and Overall Goals (F) 239 12.3.3 Mapping the System at the Outset (M) 240 12.3.4 A First Model (M) and Assessment (A) 242 12.3.5 The Challenge Ahead 245 12.3.6 A First Take on Design (D): Ascertaining Levers 246 12.3.7 From Design (D) to Change (C) 248 12.3.8 Progress in Organizational Design (D) 249 12.3.9 The Evolution of Oncology Carinthia (C) 258 12.3.10 Results 259 12.4 Insights, Teachings and Implications 261 Acknowledgements 263 Appendix: Mathematical Representations for Figures 12.5, 12.6 and 12.7 263 A1: VSM, for any System-in-Focus (one level of recursion; ref. Figure 12.5) 263 A2: Recursive Structure of the VSM (ref. Figure 12.6) 264 A3: Virtual Teams (ref. Figure 12.7) 264 References 265 13 Reinforcing the Social in Social Systems Engineering – Lessons Learnt from Smart City Projects in the United Kingdom 267Jenny O’Connor, Zeynep Gurguc and Koen H. van Dam 13.1 Introduction 267 13.1.1 Cities as Testbeds 268 13.1.2 Smart Cities as Artificial Systems 268 13.1.3 Chapter Structure 269 13.2 Methodology 270 13.3 Case Studies 271 13.3.1 Glasgow 271 13.3.2 London 274 13.3.3 Bristol 277 13.3.4 Peterborough 279 13.4 Discussion 283 13.4.1 Push/Pull Adoption Model 283 13.4.2 Civic Engagement 284 13.4.3 Solutions and Problems 285 13.4.4 Metrics, Quantification and Optimization 285 13.4.5 Project Scope and Lifecycles 286 13.4.6 Collaboration and Multidisciplinarity 286 13.4.7 Knowledge-Sharing 287 13.5 Conclusion 287 References 288 Index 291

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn Essential Guide to Electronic Material Surfaces and Interfaces is a streamlined yet comprehensive introduction that covers the basic physical properties of electronic materials, the experimental techniques used to measure them, and the theoretical methods used to understand, predict, and design them. Starting with the fundamental electronic properties of semiconductors and electrical measurements of semiconductor interfaces, this text introduces students to the importance of characterizing and controlling macroscopic electrical properties by atomic-scale techniques. The chapters that follow present the full range of surface and interface techniques now being used to characterize electronic, optical, chemical, and structural properties of electronic materials, including semiconductors, insulators, nanostructures, and organics. The essential physics and chemistry underlying each technique is described in sufficient depth for students to master the fundamental principlTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the Companion Websites xv 1. Why Surfaces and Interfaces of Electronic Materials 1 1.1 The Impact of Electronic Materials 1 1.2 Surface and Interface Importance as Electronics Shrink 1 1.3 Historical Background 5 1.4 Next Generation Electronics 10 1.5 Problems 10 References 11 Further Reading 13 2. Semiconductor Electronic and Optical Properties 14 2.1 The Semiconductor Band Gap 14 2.2 The Fermi Level and Energy Band Parameters 15 2.3 Band Bending at Semiconductor Surfaces and Interfaces 17 2.4 Surfaces and Interfaces in Electronic Devices 17 2.5 Effects of Localized States: Traps, Dipoles, and Barriers 19 2.6 Summary 19 2.7 Problems 20 References 20 Further Reading 21 3. Electrical Measurements of Surfaces and Interfaces 22 3.1 Sheet Resistance and Contact Resistivity 22 3.2 Contact Measurements: Schottky Barrier Overview 23 3.3 Heterojunction Band Offsets: Electrical Measurements 35 3.4 Summary 38 3.5 Problems 38 References 39 Further Reading 41 4. Localized States at Surfaces and Interfaces 42 4.1 Interface State Models 42 4.2 Intrinsic Surface States 43 4.3 Extrinsic Surface States 49 4.4 The Solid State Interface: Changing Perspectives 52 4.5 Problems 52 References 53 Further Reading 54 5. Ultrahigh Vacuum Technology 55 5.1 Ultrahigh Vacuum Chambers 55 5.2 Pumps 57 5.3 Manipulators 61 5.4 Gauges 61 5.5 Residual Gas Analysis 62 5.6 Deposition Sources 62 5.7 Deposition Monitors 64 5.8 Summary 65 5.9 Problems 65 References 65 Further Reading 66 6. Surface and Interface Analysis 67 6.1 Surface and Interface Techniques 67 6.2 Excited Electron Spectroscopies 70 6.3 Principles of Surface Sensitivity 72 6.4 Multi-technique UHV Chambers 73 6.5 Summary 75 6.6 Problems 75 References 75 Further Reading 75 7. Surface and Interface Spectroscopies 76 7.1 Photoemission Spectroscopy 76 7.2 Auger Electron Spectroscopy 89 7.3 Electron Energy Loss Spectroscopy 98 7.4 Rutherford Backscattering Spectrometry 104 7.5 Surface and Interface Technique Summary 112 7.6 Problems 113 References 116 Further Reading 117 8. Dynamical Depth-Dependent Analysis and Imaging 118 8.1 Ion Beam-Induced Surface Ablation 118 8.2 Auger Electron Spectroscopy 119 8.3 X-Ray Photoemission Spectroscopy 121 8.4 Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry 122 8.5 Spectroscopic Imaging 128 8.6 Depth-Resolved and Imaging Summary 129 8.7 Problems 129 References 130 Further Reading 130 9. Electron Beam Diffraction and Microscopy of Atomic-Scale Geometrical Structure 131 9.1 Low Energy Electron Diffraction – Principles 131 9.2 Reflection High Energy Electron Diffraction 141 9.3 Scanning Electron Microscopy 144 9.4 Transmission Electron Microscopy 145 9.5 Electron Beam Diffraction and Microscopy Summary 148 9.6 Problems 149 References 150 Further Reading 151 10. Scanning Probe Techniques 152 10.1 Atomic Force Microscopy 152 10.2 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy 155 10.3 Ballistic Electron Energy Microscopy 162 10.4 Atomic Positioning 163 10.5 Summary 164 10.6 Problems 164 References 165 Further Reading 165 11. Optical Spectroscopies 166 11.1 Overview 166 11.2 Optical Absorption 166 11.3 Modulation Techniques 168 11.4 Multiple Surface Interaction Techniques 169 11.5 Spectroscopic Ellipsometry 171 11.6 Surface Enhanced Raman Spectroscopy 171 11.7 Surface Photoconductivity 174 11.8 Surface Photovoltage Spectroscopy 175 11.9 Photoluminescence Spectroscopy 180 11.10 Cathodoluminescence Spectroscopy 181 11.11 Summary 190 11.12 Problems 191 References 192 Further Reading 192 12. Electronic Material Surfaces 193 12.1 Geometric Structure 193 12.2 Chemical Structure 196 12.3 Electronic Structure 203 12.4 Summary 209 12.5 Problems 210 References 211 Further Reading 212 13. Surface Electronic Applications 213 13.1 Charge Transfer and Band Bending 213 13.2 Oxide Gas Sensors 216 13.3 Granular Gas Sensors 217 13.4 Nanowire Sensors 217 13.5 Chemical and Biosensors 217 13.6 Surface Electronic Temperature, Pressure, and Mass Sensors 220 13.7 Summary 220 13.8 Problems 221 References 222 Further Reading 222 14. Semiconductor Heterojunctions 223 14.1 Geometrical Structure 223 14.2 Chemical Structure 230 14.3 Electronic Structure 232 14.4 Conclusions 245 14.5 Problems 246 References 247 Further Reading 248 15. Metal–Semiconductor Interfaces 249 15.1 Overview 249 15.2 Metal–Semiconductor Interface Dipoles 249 15.3 Interface States 251 15.4 Self-Consistent Electrostatic Calculations 258 15.5 Experimental Schottky Barriers 259 15.6 Interface Barrier Height Engineering 264 15.7 Atomic-Scale Control 266 15.8 Summary 272 15.9 Problems 272 References 273 Further Reading 275 16. Next Generation Surfaces and Interfaces 276 16.1 Current Status 276 16.2 Current Device Challenges 278 16.3 Emerging Directions 279 16.4 The Essential Guide Conclusions 282 Appendices Appendix A: Glossary of Commonly Used Symbols 283 Appendix B: Table of Acronyms 286 Appendix C: Table of Physical Constants and Conversion Factors 290 Appendix D: Semiconductor Properties 291 Index 293

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to the modelling and design of solid oxide fuel cell hybrid power plants This book explores all technical aspects of solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC) hybrid systems and proposes solutions to a range of technical problems that can arise from component integration. Following a general introduction to the state-of-the-art in SOFC hybrid systems, the authors focus on fuel cell technology, including the components required to operate with standard fuels. Micro-gas turbine (mGT) technology for hybrid systems is discussed, with special attention given to issues related to the coupling of SOFCs with mGTs. Throughout the book emphasis is placed on dynamic issues, including control systems used to avoid risk conditions. With an eye to mitigating the high costs and risks incurred with the building and use of prototype hybrid systems, the authors demonstrate a proven, economically feasible approach to obtaining important experimental results using simplifiTrade ReviewIn summary, this book provides comprehensive information and guidelines on the design and modeling of hybrid SOFC and gas turbine systems. Researchers, scientists, and engineers who are interested in developing such a hybrid system or carrying out new research in the area of integrated fuel cell systems will definitely get valuable information from this book. This book could also be effectively used as a reference book in some graduate level courses in energy conversion and fuel cell technology. There are also very interesting questions and exercises found at the end of the chapters, which could be given as assignments to students. In conclusion, I recommend this book as a unique source of information on the hybrid SOFC and gas turbine systems. -Dr. Can Ozgur Colpan, Dokuz Eylül University, Izmir, TurkeyTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgements xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 World Population Growth, Energy Demand and its Future 1 1.2 World Energy Future 3 1.3 Introduction to Fuel Cells and Associated Terms 6 1.3.1 Background for Fuel Cells and Thermodynamic Principles 6 1.3.2 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells (SOFCs) 11 1.3.3 Fuel Cell Reactions 15 1.3.4 Fuel Cell Performance 15 1.3.5 Pressure and Concentration Effects 18 1.3.6 Irreversibilities in Fuel Cells 19 1.3.7 Fuel Cell Applications 23 1.4 Gas Turbines 24 1.4.1 Background of Gas Turbines 24 1.5 Coupling of Microturbines with Fuel Cells to Obtain ‘Hybrid Systems’ 25 1.5.1 Active Hybrid Systems Research Groups 29 1.6 Conclusions 29 References 29 2 SOFC Technology 33 2.1 Basic Aspects of Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 33 2.2 SOFC Types 35 2.2.1 High-temperature SOFCs 35 2.2.2 Intermediate/Low-temperature SOFCs 35 2.3 Materials for SOFCs 36 2.4 Different SOFC Geometries 38 2.4.1 Tubular SOFCs 39 2.4.2 Planar SOFCs 41 2.5 SOFC Stacks 43 2.6 Effect of Pressurization for SOFCs 44 2.7 Fuel Processing for SOFCs 45 2.7.1 Processing for Gas and Liquid Fuels 46 2.7.2 Processing for Solid Fuels 48 2.8 SOFC Applications in Hybrid Systems 49 2.8.1 Atmospheric SOFC Hybrid Systems 50 2.8.2 Pressurized SOFC Hybrid Systems 51 2.9 Aspects Related to SOFC Reliability, Degradation and Costs 52 2.10 Conclusions 54 2.11 Questions 54 References 55 3 Micro Gas Turbine Technology 59 3.1 Fundamentals of the Brayton Cycle 59 3.1.1 The Simple Cycle 59 3.1.2 The Simple Recuperative Cycle 68 3.1.3 The Intercooled and Reheat Brayton Cycles 74 3.1.4 The Intercooled and Reheat, Recuperative Brayton Cycle 79 3.1.5 Cycle Layouts used by Contemporary Micro Gas Turbines 84 3.2 Turbomachinery 85 3.2.1 General Considerations on the Selection of Turbomachinery for Micro Gas Turbines 85 3.2.2 Fundamentals of Radial Compressor Design and Performance 89 3.2.3 Some Notes on Compressor Surge 101 3.2.4 Fundamentals of Radial Turbine Design and Performance 105 3.2.5 Scaling of Radial Turbomachinery 113 3.3 Recuperative Heat Exchanger 115 3.4 Bearings 124 3.5 Conclusions: Commercial Status and Areas of Research 131 3.6 Questions and Exercises 134 References 135 4 SOFC/mGT Coupling 141 4.1 Basic Aspects of SOFC Hybridization 141 4.2 SOFC Coupling with Traditional Power Plants 143 4.2.1 Coupling with Steam Power Plants 143 4.2.2 Coupling with Gas Turbines 144 4.2.3 Coupling with Combined Cycle-based Plants 146 4.3 Beneficial Attributes Related to SOFC/mGT Coupling 147 4.4 Constraints Related to SOFC/mGT Coupling 150 4.4.1 Turbine System Constraints 152 4.4.2 SOFC System Constraints 156 4.4.3 Control System Constraints 158 4.5 Design and Off-design Aspects 159 4.5.1 Design Aspects 159 4.5.2 Off-design Aspects 161 4.6 Issues Related to Dynamic Aspects 163 4.7 Main Prototypes Developed for SOFC Hybrid Systems 166 4.7.1 Prototype by Siemens-Westinghouse 167 4.7.2 Prototype by Mitsubishi Heavy Industries 169 4.7.3 Prototype by Rolls-Royce Fuel Cell Systems 170 4.8 Conclusions 171 4.9 Questions and Exercises 173 References 174 5 Computational Models for Hybrid Systems 183 5.1 Introduction 183 5.2 Steady-state Models for Hybrid Systems 185 5.3 Computational Models for Hybrid Systems: Modelling Steps 186 5.3.1 Computational Models for Hybrid Systems at the Component Level 190 5.3.2 Prediction of Performance of Gas Turbines 191 5.3.3 Off-design Operation of the Single-shaft Gas Turbine 192 5.3.4 Off-design Calculation with ‘Complex’ Layout Turbines 196 5.4 System Modelling 200 5.4.1 Reformer 201 5.4.2 SOFC Module 205 5.4.3 Overpotentials 207 5.4.4 Fuel and Air Supply Calculations 208 5.4.5 Combustor 209 5.4.6 Turbine 210 5.5 Compressor 211 5.5.1 Recuperator 211 5.6 Results and Discussion 212 5.7 Dynamic Models 213 5.8 Model Validation 216 5.9 Conclusion 217 5.10 Questions and Exercises 218 References 218 6 Experimental Emulation Facilities 225 6.1 Experimental Emulation Facilities 225 6.2 Reduced-scale Test Facilities 226 6.2.1 Anodic Recirculation Test Rig 227 6.2.2 Cathodic Loop Test Rig 229 6.3 Actual-scale Test Facilities 232 6.3.1 Low-temperature Rigs 233 6.3.2 High-temperature Rigs 236 6.4 Conclusions 247 6.5 Questions and Exercises 247 References 249 7 Problems and Solutions for Future Hybrid Systems 255 7.1 The Future of Micro Power Generation Systems 256 7.2 The Future of Hybrid Systems: Hydrogen as an Energy Carrier 258 7.2.1 Hydro-methane and Hydrogen-rich Fuel Mixtures 259 7.3 Future Hybrid Systems: Design, Optimization and Sizing 260 7.3.1 Hybrid Systems Sizing Techniques 261 7.3.2 Hybrid System Sizing Simulation Tools 262 7.4 Cost Analysis of Hybrid Systems for Power Generation Applications 264 7.5 Performance Degradation Problems in Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 268 7.6 Turbomachinery Problems 269 7.7 Dynamic and Control System Aspects 271 7.8 CO2 Separation Technologies for SOFC Hybrid Plants 272 7.9 Coal and Biofuel for Hybrid Systems 273 7.10 Conclusions 275 References 275 Glossary 285 Index 307

Read more less

Book SynopsisExplains the fundamentals and practical applications of flat and flexible OLEDs for displays and lighting Organic light-emitting diodes (OLEDs) have emerged as the leading technology for the new display and lighting market.Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 History of OLEDs 1 References 10 2 Fundamentals of OLEDs 12 2.1 Principle of the OLED 12 2.2 Fundamental Structure of the OLED 14 2.3 Features of the OLED 15 3 Light Emission Mechanism 17 3.1 Fluorescent OLEDs 17 3.2 Phosphorescent OLEDs 19 3.3 Thermally Activated Delayed Fluorescent OLEDs 21 3.4 Energy Diagram 21 3.5 Light Emission Efficiency 23 References 24 4 OLED Materials 25 4.1 Types of OLED Materials 26 4.2 Anode Materials 27 4.3 Evaporated Organic Materials (Small Molecular Materials) 29 4.3.1 Hole Injection Materials 29 4.3.2 Hole Transport Materials 32 4.3.3 Emitting Materials and Host Materials in Fluorescent Emission Layer 33 4.3.4 Emitting Materials and Host Materials in Phosphorescent Emission Layer 34 4.3.5 Emitting Materials and Host Materials in TADF Emission Layers 42 4.3.6 Electron Transport Materials 43 4.3.7 Electron Injection Materials and Cathodes 45 4.3.8 Charge-Carrier and Exciton Blocking Materials 46 4.3.9 N-Dope and P-Dope Materials 49 4.4 Solution Materials 50 4.4.1 Polymer Materials 50 4.4.2 Dendrimers 61 4.4.3 Small Molecules 69 4.5 Molecular Orientation of Organic Materials 70 References 71 5 OLED Devices 75 5.1 Bottom Emission, Top Emission, and Transparent Types 75 5.2 Normal and Inverted Structures 79 5.3 White OLEDs 81 5.4 Full-Color Technology 84 5.4.1 RGB-Side-by-Side 87 5.4.2 White + CF 87 5.4.3 Blue Emission with Color Changing Medium (CCM) 88 5.5 Micro-Cavity Structure 89 5.6 Multi-Photon OLED 91 5.7 Encapsulation 94 5.7.1 Thin Film Encapsulation 99 5.7.2 Desiccant Technologies 100 References 100 6 OLED Fabrication Process 103 6.1 Vacuum Evaporation Process 103 6.1.1 Mask Deposition 104 6.1.2 Three Types of Evaporation Methods 104 6.1.3 Ultra-High Vacuum 105 6.2 Wet Processes 107 6.3 Laser Processes 114 References 115 7 Performance of OLEDs 117 7.1 Characteristics of OLEDs 117 7.2 Lifetime 120 7.2.1 Storage Lifetime 121 7.2.2 Driving Lifetime 121 7.3 Temperature Measurement of OLED Devices 124 References 126 8 OLED Display 127 8.1 Features of OLED Displays 128 8.2 Types of OLED Displays 128 8.3 Passive-Matrix OLED Display 130 8.4 Active-Matrix OLED Display 132 8.4.1 TFT Circuit Technologies 133 8.4.2 TFT Device Technologies 137 8.4.3 Commercialized and Prototype AM-OLED Displays 139 References 144 9 OLED Lighting 147 9.1 Appearance of OLED Lighting 147 9.2 Features of OLED Lighting 148 9.3 Fundamental Technologies of OLED Lighting 152 9.4 Light Extraction Enhancement Technologies 154 9.5 Performance of OLED Lighting 159 9.6 Color Tunable OLED Lighting 159 9.7 Application of OLED Lighting – Products and Prototypes 161 References 164 10 Flexible OLEDs 166 10.1 Early Studies of Flexible OLEDs 166 10.2 Flexible Substrates 167 10.2.1 Ultra-Thin Glass 168 10.2.2 Stainless Steel Foil 171 10.2.3 Plastic Films 172 10.3 Flexible OLED Displays 174 10.3.1 Flexible OLED Displays on Ultra-Thin Glass 176 10.3.2 Flexible OLED Displays on Stainless Steel Foil 176 10.3.3 Flexible OLED Displays on Plastic Film 177 10.4 Flexible OLED Lighting 181 10.4.1 Flexible OLED Lighting on Ultra-Thin Glass 182 10.4.2 Flexible OLED Lighting on Stainless Steel Foil 184 10.4.3 Flexible OLED Lighting on Plastic Films 184 10.5 Toward the Flexible 186 References 186 11 New Technologies 189 11.1 Non-ITO Transparent Electrodes 189 11.1.1 Conducting Polymer 190 11.1.2 Stacked Layer Using Ag 194 11.1.3 Silver Nanowire (AgNW) 195 11.1.4 Carbon Nanotube (CNT) 196 11.2 Organic TFT 197 11.3 Wet-Processed TFT 198 11.4 Novel Wet-Processed or Printed OLED 201 11.5 Roll-to-Roll Equipment Technologies 203 11.6 Quantum Dot 204 References 206 Index 209

Read more less

Book SynopsisMechanics of Microsystems Alberto Corigliano, Raffaele Ardito, Claudia Comi, Attilio Frangi, Aldo Ghisi and Stefano Mariani, Politecnico di Milano, Italy A mechanical approach to microsystems, covering fundamental concepts including MEMS design, modelling and reliability Mechanics of Microsystems takes a mechanical approach to microsystems and covers fundamental concepts including MEMS design, modelling and reliability. The book examines the mechanical behaviour of microsystems from a design for reliability' point of view and includes examples of applications in industry. Mechanics of Microsystems is divided into two main parts. The first part recalls basic knowledge related to the microsystems behaviour and offers an overview on microsystems and fundamental design and modelling tools from a mechanical point of view, together with many practical examples of real microsystems. The second part covers the mechanical characterization of materials at the micro-scale and considers the mTable of ContentsSeries Preface xiii Preface xv Acknowledgements xvii Notation xix About the Companion Website xxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Microsystems 1 1.2 Microsystems Fabrication 3 1.3 Mechanics in Microsystems 5 1.4 Book Contents 6 References 7 Part I Fundamentals 9 2 Fundamentals of Mechanics and Coupled Problems 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Kinematics and Dynamics of Material Points and Rigid Bodies 12 2.2.1 Basic Notions of Kinematics and Motion Composition 12 2.2.2 Basic Notions of Dynamics and Relative Dynamics 15 2.2.3 One-Degree-of-Freedom Oscillator 17 2.2.4 Rigid-Body Kinematics and Dynamics 22 2.3 Solid Mechanics 25 2.3.1 Linear Elastic Problem for Deformable Solids 26 2.3.2 Linear Elastic Problem for Beams 35 2.4 Fluid Mechanics 43 2.4.1 Navier–Stokes Equations 43 2.4.2 Fluid–Structure Interaction 48 2.5 Electrostatics and Electromechanics 49 2.5.1 Basic Notions of Electrostatics 49 2.5.2 Simple Electromechanical Problem 54 2.5.3 General Electromechanical Coupled Problem 58 2.6 Piezoelectric Materials in Microsystems 60 2.6.1 Piezoelectric Materials 60 2.6.2 PiezoelectricModelling 62 2.7 Heat Conduction and Thermomechanics 64 2.7.1 Heat Problem 64 2.7.2 Thermomechanical Coupled Problem 67 References 70 3 Modelling of Linear and NonlinearMechanical Response 73 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 Fundamental Principles 74 3.2.1 Principle of Virtual Power 74 3.2.2 Total Potential Energy Principle 74 3.2.3 Hamilton’s Principle 75 3.2.4 Specialization of the Principle of Virtual Powers to Beams 76 3.3 Approximation Techniques andWeighted Residuals Approach 76 3.4 Exact and Approximate Solutions for Dynamic Problems 79 3.4.1 Free Flexural Linear Vibrations of a Single-span Beam 79 3.4.2 Nonlinear Vibration of an Axially Loaded Beam 80 3.5 Example of Application: Bistable Elements 84 References 90 Part II Devices 91 4 Accelerometers 93 4.1 Introduction 93 4.2 Capacitive Accelerometers 94 4.2.1 In-Plane Sensing 94 4.2.2 Out-of-Plane Sensing 96 4.3 Resonant Accelerometers 98 4.3.1 Resonating Proof Mass 98 4.3.2 Resonating Elements Coupled to the Proof Mass 99 4.4 Examples 101 4.4.1 Three-Axis Capacitive Accelerometer 101 4.4.2 Out-of-Plane Resonant Accelerometer 104 4.4.3 In-Plane Resonant Accelerometer 105 4.5 Design Problems and Reliability Issues 107 References 107 5 Coriolis-Based Gyroscopes 109 5.1 Introduction 109 5.2 BasicWorking Principle 109 5.2.1 Sensitivity of Coriolis Vibratory Gyroscopes 112 5.3 Lumped-Mass Gyroscopes 113 5.3.1 Symmetric and Decoupled Gyroscope 113 5.3.2 Tuning-Fork Gyroscope 114 5.3.3 Three-Axis Gyroscope 115 5.3.4 Gyroscopes with Resonant Sensing 115 5.4 Disc and Ring Gyroscopes 118 5.5 Design Problems and Reliability Issues 118 References 119 6 Resonators 121 6.1 Introduction 121 6.2 Electrostatically Actuated Resonators 123 6.3 Piezoelectric Resonators 125 6.4 Nonlinearity Issues 126 References 128 7 Micromirrors and Parametric Resonance 131 7.1 Introduction 131 7.2 Electrostatic Resonant Micromirror 132 7.2.1 Numerical Simulations with a Continuation Approach 136 7.2.2 Experimental Set-Up 140 References 145 8 Vibrating Lorentz Force Magnetometers 147 8.1 Introduction 147 8.2 Vibrating Lorentz Force Magnetometers 148 8.2.1 Classical Devices 148 8.2.2 Improved Design 151 8.2.3 Further Improvements 155 8.3 Topology or Geometry Optimization 156 References 159 9 Mechanical Energy Harvesters 161 9.1 Introduction 161 9.2 Inertial Energy Harvesters 162 9.2.1 Classification of Resonant Energy Harvesters 162 9.2.2 Mechanical Model of a Simple Piezoelectric Harvester 165 9.3 Frequency Upconversion and Bistability 174 9.4 Fluid–Structure Interaction Energy Harvesters 176 9.4.1 Synopsis of Aeroelastic Phenomena 177 9.4.2 Energy Harvesting through Vortex-Induced Vibration 179 9.4.3 Energy Harvesting through Flutter Instability 180 References 181 10 Micropumps 185 10.1 Introduction 185 10.2 Modelling Issues for Diaphragm Micropumps 186 10.3 Modelling of Electrostatic Actuator 188 10.3.1 Simplified Electromechanical Model 188 10.3.2 Reliability Issues 192 10.4 MultiphysicsModel of an Electrostatic Micropump 196 10.5 Piezoelectric Micropumps 198 10.5.1 Modelling of the Actuator 198 10.5.2 Complete Multiphysics Model 201 References 202 Part III Reliability and Dissipative Phenomena 205 11 Mechanical Characterization at theMicroscale 207 11.1 Introduction 207 11.2 Mechanical Characterization of Polysilicon as a Structural Material for Microsystems 209 11.2.1 Polysilicon as a Structural Material for Microsystems 209 11.2.2 TestingMethodologies 210 11.2.3 Quasi-Static Testing 211 11.2.4 High-Frequency Testing 214 11.3 Weibull Approach 215 11.4 On-Chip TestingMethodology for Experimental Determination of Elastic Stiffness and Nominal Strength 219 11.4.1 On-Chip Bending Test through a Comb-Finger Rotational Electrostatic Actuator 220 11.4.2 On-Chip Bending Test through a Parallel-Plate Electrostatic Actuator 225 11.4.3 On-Chip Tensile Test through an Electrothermomechanical Actuator 229 11.4.4 On-Chip Test forThick Polysilicon Films 233 References 240 12 Fracture and Fatigue in Microsystems 245 12.1 Introduction 245 12.2 Fracture Mechanics: An Overview 245 12.3 MEMS Failure Modes due to Cracking 249 12.3.1 Cracking and Delamination at Package Level 249 12.3.2 Cracking at Silicon Film Level 250 12.4 Fatigue in Microsystems 256 12.4.1 An Introduction to Fatigue in Mechanics 256 12.4.2 Polysilicon Fatigue 259 12.4.3 Fatigue in Metals at the Microscale 261 12.4.4 Fatigue Testing at the Microscale 263 References 266 13 Accidental Drop Impact 271 13.1 Introduction 271 13.2 Single-Degree-of-Freedom Response to Drops 272 13.3 Estimation of the Acceleration Peak Induced by an Accidental Drop 276 13.4 A Multiscale Approach to Drop Impact Events 277 13.4.1 Macroscale Level 277 13.4.2 Mesoscale Level 279 13.4.3 Microscale Level 279 13.5 Results: Drop-Induced Failure of Inertial MEMS 280 References 287 14 Fabrication-Induced Residual Stresses and Relevant Failures 291 14.1 Main Sources of Residual Stresses in Microsystems 291 14.2 The Stoney Formula and its Modifications 292 14.3 ExperimentalMethods for the Evaluation of Residual Stresses 299 14.4 Delamination, Buckling and Cracks inThin Films due to Residual Stresses 304 References 310 15 Damping in Microsystems 313 15.1 Introduction 313 15.2 Gas Damping in the Continuum Regime with Slip Boundary Conditions 314 15.2.1 Experimental Validation at Ambient Pressure 317 15.2.2 Effects of DecreasingWorking Pressure 318 15.3 Gas Damping in the Rarefied Regime 320 15.3.1 Evaluation of Damping at Low Pressure using KineticModels 321 15.3.2 Linearization of the BGK Model 323 15.3.3 Numerical Implementation 324 15.3.4 Application to MEMS 325 15.4 Gas Damping in the Free-Molecule Regime 328 15.4.1 Boundary Integral Equation Approach 328 15.4.2 Experimental Validations 330 15.5 Solid Damping: Thermoelasticity 335 15.6 Solid Damping: Anchor Losses 338 15.6.1 Analytical Estimation of Dissipation 339 15.6.2 Numerical Estimation of Anchor Losses 342 15.7 Solid Damping: Additional unknown Sources – Surface Losses 346 15.7.1 Solid Damping: Deviations from Thermoelasticity 346 15.7.2 Solid Damping: Losses in Piezoresonators 346 References 348 16 Surface Interactions 351 16.1 Introduction 351 16.2 Spontaneous Adhesion or Stiction 352 16.3 Adhesion Sources 353 16.3.1 Capillary Attraction 353 16.3.2 Van derWaals Interactions 356 16.3.3 Casimir Forces 358 16.3.4 Hydrogen Bonds 359 16.3.5 Electrostatic Forces 360 16.4 Experimental Characterization 361 16.4.1 Experiments by Mastrangelo and Hsu 361 16.4.2 Experiments by the Sandia Group 362 16.4.3 Experiments by the Virginia Group 365 16.4.4 Peel Experiments 367 16.4.5 Pull-in Experiments 368 16.4.6 Tests for Sidewall Adhesion 372 16.5 Modelling and Simulation 374 16.5.1 Lennard-Jones Potential 374 16.5.2 Tribological Models: Hertz, JKR, DMT 375 16.5.3 Computation of Adhesion Energy 377 16.6 Recent Advances 380 16.6.1 Finite Element Analysis of Adhesion between Rough Surfaces 380 16.6.2 Accelerated Numerical Techniques 383 References 387 Index 393

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe continued advancement of MEMS (micro-electro-mechanical systems) complexity, performance, commercial exploitation and market size requires an ever-expanding graduate population with state-of-the-art expertise. Understanding MEMS: Principles and Applications provides a comprehensive introduction to this complex and multidisciplinary technology that is accessible to senior undergraduate and graduate students from a range of engineering and physical sciences backgrounds. Fully self-contained, this textbook is designed to help students grasp the key principles and operation of MEMS devices and to inspire advanced study or a career in this field. Moreover, with the increasing application areas, product categories and functionality of MEMS, industry professionals will also benefit from this consolidated overview, source of relevant equations and extensive solutions to problems. Key features: Details the fundamentals of MEMS, enablTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the Companion Website xv 1 Scaling of Forces 1 1.1 Scaling of Forces Model 1 1.2 Weight 2 1.2.1 Example: MEMS Accelerometer 2 1.3 Elastic Force 3 1.3.1 Example: AFM Cantilever 4 1.4 Electrostatic Force 4 1.4.1 Example: MEMS RF Switch 6 1.5 Capillary Force 6 1.5.1 Example: Wet Etching Force 8 1.6 Piezoelectric Force 8 1.6.1 Example: Force in Film Embossing 9 1.7 Magnetic Force 10 1.7.1 Example: Compass Magnetometer 10 1.8 Dielectrophoretic Force 11 1.8.1 Example: Nanoparticle in a Spherical Symmetry Electric Field 12 1.9 Summary 13 Problems 13 2 Elasticity 15 2.1 Stress 15 2.2 Strain 18 2.3 Stress–strain Relationship 20 2.3.1 Example: Plane Stress 21 2.4 Strain–stress Relationship in Anisotropic Materials 22 2.5 Miller Indices 23 2.5.1 Example: Miller Indices of Typical Planes 24 2.6 Angles of Crystallographic Planes 25 2.6.1 Example 25 2.7 Compliance and Stiffness Matrices for Single-Crystal Silicon 26 2.7.1 Example: Young’s Modulus and Poisson Ratio for (100) Silicon 27 2.8 Orthogonal Transformation 29 2.9 Transformation of the Stress State 31 2.9.1 Example: Rotation of the Stress State 31 2.9.2 Example: Matrix Notation for the Rotation of the Stress State 32 2.10 Orthogonal Transformation of the Stiffness Matrix 32 2.10.1 Example: C11 Coefficient in Rotated Axes 33 2.10.2 Example: Young’s Modulus and Poisson Ratio in the (111) Direction 34 2.11 Elastic Properties of Selected MEMS Materials 36 Problems 36 3 Bending of Microstructures 37 3.1 Static Equilibrium 37 3.2 Free Body Diagram 38 3.3 Neutral Plane and Curvature 39 3.4 Pure Bending 40 3.4.1 Example: Neutral Plane for a Rectangular Cross-section 41 3.4.2 Example: Cantilever with Point Force at the Tip 42 3.5 Moment of Inertia and Bending Moment 43 3.5.1 Example: Moment of Inertia of a Rectangular Cross-section 43 3.6 Beam Equation 44 3.7 End-loaded Cantilever 45 3.8 Equivalent Stiffness 47 3.9 Beam Equation for Point Load and Distributed Load 48 3.10 Castigliano’s Second Theorem 48 3.10.1 Strain Energy in an Elastic Body Subject to Pure Bending 50 3.11 Flexures 51 3.11.1 Fixed–fixed Flexure 51 3.11.2 Example: Comparison of Stiffness Constants 53 3.11.3 Example: Folded Flexure 53 3.12 Rectangular Membrane 54 3.13 Simplified Model for a Rectangular Membrane Under Pressure 55 3.13.1 Example: Thin Membrane Subject to Pressure 57 3.14 Edge-clamped Circular Membrane 58 Problems 60 4 Piezoresistance and Piezoelectricity 65 4.1 Electrical Resistance 65 4.1.1 Example: Resistance Value 66 4.2 One-dimensional Piezoresistance Model 67 4.2.1 Example: Gauge Factors 68 4.3 Piezoresistance in Anisotropic Materials 69 4.4 Orthogonal Transformation of Ohm’s Law 70 4.5 Piezoresistance Coefficients Transformation 71 4.5.1 Example: Calculation of Rotated Piezoresistive Components 𝜋′ 11, 𝜋′ 12 and 𝜋′ 16 for unit axes X′ [110], Y′ [ ̄110] and Z′ [001] 72 4.5.2 Analytical Expressions for Some Rotated Piezoresistive Components 74 4.6 Two-dimensional Piezoresistors 74 4.6.1 Example: Accelerometer with Cantilever and Piezoresistive Sensing 76 4.7 Pressure Sensing with Rectangular Membranes 79 4.7.1 Example: Single-resistor Pressure Sensor 82 4.7.2 Example: Pressure Sensors Comparison 85 4.8 Piezoelectricity 86 4.8.1 Relevant Data for Some Piezoelectric Materials 88 4.8.2 Example: Piezoelectric Generator 89 Problems 91 5 Electrostatic Driving and Sensing 93 5.1 Energy and Co-energy 93 5.2 Voltage Drive 97 5.3 Pull-in Voltage 97 5.3.1 Example: Forces in a Parallel-plate Actuator 99 5.4 Electrostatic Pressure 101 5.5 Contact Resistance in Parallel-plate Switches 101 5.6 Hold-down Voltage 101 5.6.1 Example: Calculation of Hold-down Voltage 102 5.7 Dynamic Response of Pull-in-based Actuators 102 5.7.1 Example: Switching Transient 103 5.8 Charge Drive 105 5.9 Extending the Stable Range 105 5.10 Lateral Electrostatic Force 106 5.11 Comb Actuators 106 5.12 Capacitive Accelerometer 108 5.13 Differential Capacitive Sensing 108 5.14 Torsional Actuator 110 Problems 111 6 Resonators 115 6.1 Free Vibration: Lumped-element Model 115 6.2 Damped Vibration 116 6.3 Forced Vibration 117 6.3.1 Example: Vibration Amplitude as a Function of the Damping Factor 120 6.4 Small Signal Equivalent Circuit of Resonators 121 6.4.1 Example: Series and Parallel Resonances 125 6.4.2 Example: Spring Softening 125 6.5 Rayleigh–Ritz Method 126 6.5.1 Example: Vibration of a Cantilever 128 6.5.2 Example: Gravimetric Chemical Sensor 129 6.6 Resonant Gyroscope 130 6.7 Tuning Fork Gyroscope 133 6.7.1 Example: Calculation of Sensitivity in a Tuning Fork Gyroscope 134 Problems 135 7 Microfluidics and Electrokinetics 137 7.1 Viscous Flow 137 7.2 Flow in a Cylindrical Pipe 140 7.2.1 Example: Pressure Gradient Required to Sustain a Flow 141 7.3 Electrical Double Layer 142 7.3.1 Example: Debye Length and Surface Charge 144 7.4 Electro-osmotic Flow 144 7.5 Electrowetting 146 7.5.1 Example: Droplet Change by Electrowetting 148 7.5.2 Example: Full Substrate Contacts 149 7.6 Electrowetting Dynamics 151 7.6.1 Example: Contact-angle Dynamics 153 7.7 Dielectrophoresis 153 7.7.1 Electric Potential Created by a Constant Electric Field 154 7.7.2 Potential Created by an Electrical Dipole 155 7.7.3 Superposition 156 Problems 157 8 Thermal Devices 159 8.1 Steady-state Heat Equation 159 8.2 Thermal Resistance 161 8.2.1 Example: Temperature Profile in a Heated Wire 162 8.2.2 Example: Resistor Suspended in a Bridge 165 8.3 Platinum Resistors 166 8.4 Flow Measurement Based on Thermal Sensors 166 8.4.1 Example: Micromachined Flow Sensor 169 8.5 Dynamic Thermal Equivalent Circuit 171 8.6 Thermally Actuated Bimorph 172 8.6.1 Example: Bimorph Actuator 174 8.7 Thermocouples and Thermopiles 175 8.7.1 Example: IR Detector 175 Problems 176 9 Fabrication 181 9.1 Introduction 181 9.2 Photolithography 182 9.3 Patterning 183 9.4 Lift-off 184 9.5 Bulk Micromachining 184 9.5.1 Example: Angle of Walls in Silicon (100) Etching 185 9.6 Silicon Etch Stop When Using Alkaline Solutions 186 9.6.1 Example: Boron drive-in at 1050◦C 186 9.7 Surface Micromachining 186 9.7.1 Example: Cantilever Fabrication by Surface Micromachining 187 9.8 Dry Etching 188 9.9 CMOS-compatible MEMS Processing 188 9.9.1 Example: Bimorph Actuator Compatible with CMOS Process 189 9.10 Wafer Bonding 190 9.11 PolyMUMPs Foundry Process 190 9.11.1 Example: PolyMUMPs Cantilever for a Fabry–Perot Pressure Sensor 191 Problems 192 APPENDICES 195 A Chapter 1 Solutions 197 B Chapter 2 Solutions 207 C Chapter 3 Solutions 221 D Chapter 4 Solutions 239 E Chapter 5 Solutions 249 F Chapter 6 Solutions 267 G Chapter 7 Solutions 277 H Chapter 8 Solutions 285 I Chapter 9 Solutions 299 References 307 Index 311

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscusses the application of mathematical and engineering tools for modeling, simulation and control oriented for energy systems, power electronics and renewable energy This book builds on the background knowledge of electrical circuits, control of dc/dc converters and inverters, energy conversion and power electronics. The book shows readers how to apply computational methods for multi-domain simulation of energy systems and power electronics engineering problems. Each chapter has a brief introduction on the theoretical background, a description of the problems to be solved, and objectives to be achieved. Block diagrams, electrical circuits, mathematical analysis or computer code are covered. Each chapter concludes with discussions on what should be learned, suggestions for further studies and even some experimental work. Discusses the mathematical formulation of system equations for energy systems and power electronics aiming state-space and circuit oriented simulationsStudies theTable of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii 1 Introduction to Electrical Engineering Simulation 1 1.1 Fundamentals of State-Space-Based Modeling 4 1.2 Example of Modeling an Electrical Network 6 1.3 Transfer Function 9 1.3.1 State Space to Transfer Function Conversion 10 1.4 Modeling and Simulation of Energy Systems and Power Electronics 12 1.5 Suggested Problems 18 Further Reading 25 2 Analysis of Electrical Circuits with Mesh and Nodal Analysis 27 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Solution of Matrix Equations 28 2.3 Laboratory Project : Mesh and Nodal Analysis of Electrical Circuits with Superposition Theorem 29 2.4 Suggested Problems 37 References 40 Further Reading 40 3 Modeling and Analysis of Electrical Circuits with Block Diagrams 43 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Laboratory Project: Transient Response Study and Laplace Transform-Based Analysis Block Diagram Simulation 45 3.3 Comparison with Phasor-Based Steady-State Analysis 52 3.4 Finding the Equivalent Thèvenin 54 3.5 Suggested Problems 56 Further Reading 58 4 Power Electronics: Electrical Circuit-Oriented Simulation 61 4.1 Introduction 61 4.2 Case Study: Half-Wave Rectifier 67 4.3 Laboratory Project: Electrical Circuit Simulation Using PSIM and Simscape Power Systems MATLAB Analysis 72 4.4 Suggested Problems 79 Further Reading 81 5 Designing Power Electronic Control Systems 83 5.1 Introduction 83 5.1.1 Control System Design 85 5.1.2 Proportional–Integral Closed-Loop Control 86 5.2 Laboratory Project: Design of a DC/DC Boost Converter Control 89 5.2.1 Ideal Boost Converter 89 5.2.2 Small Signal Model and Deriving the Transfer Function of Boost Converter 90 5.2.3 Control Block Diagram and Transfer Function 93 5.3 Design of a Type III Compensated Error Amplifier 95 5.3.1 K Method 95 5.3.2 Poles and Zeros Placement in the Type III Amplifier 96 5.4 Controller Design 97 5.5 PSIM Simulation Studies for the DC/DC Boost Converter 99 5.6 Boost Converter: Average Model 99 5.7 Full Circuit for the DC/DC Boost Converter 103 5.8 Laboratory Project: Design of a Discrete Control in MATLAB Corunning with a DC Motor Model in Simulink 107 5.9 Suggested Problems 112 References 116 Further Reading 116 6 Instrumentation and Control Interfaces for Energy Systems and Power Electronics 117 6.1 Introduction 117 6.1.1 Sensors and Transducers for Power Systems Data Acquisition 118 6.2 Passive Electrical Sensors 119 6.2.1 Resistive Sensors 119 6.2.2 Capacitive Sensors 121 6.2.3 Inductive Sensors 123 6.3 Electronic Interface for Computational Data in Power Systems and Instrumentation 125 6.3.1 O perational Amplifiers 125 6.4 Analog Amplifiers for Data Acquisition and Power System Driving 125 6.4.1 Level Detector or Comparator 126 6.4.2 Standard Differential Amplifier for Instrumentation and Control 127 6.4.3 O ptically Isolated Amplifier 128 6.4.4 The V–I Converter of a Single Input and Floating Load 130 6.4.5 Schmitt Trigger Comparator 131 6.4.6 Voltage-Controlled Oscillator (VCO) 131 6.4.7 Phase Shifting 131 6.4.8 Precision Diode, Precision Rectifier, and the Absolute Value Amplifier 134 6.4.9 High-Gain Amplifier with Low-Value Resistors 136 6.4.10 Class B Feedback Push–Pull Amplifiers 137 6.4.11 Triangular Waveform Generator 137 6.4.12 Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) 138 6.5 Laboratory Project: Design a PWM Controller with Error Amplifier 140 6.6 Suggested Problems 140 References 145 7 Modeling Electrical Machines 147 7.1 Introduction to Modeling Electrical Machines 147 7.2 Equivalent Circuit of a Linear Induction Machine Connected to the Network 148 7.3 PSIM Block of a Linear IM Connected to the Distribution Network 150 7.4 PSIM Saturated IM Model Connected to the Distribution Network 152 7.5 Doubly Fed Induction Machine Connected to the Distribution Network 154 7.6 DC Motor Powering the Shaft of a Self-Excited Induction Generator 156 7.7 Modeling a Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine (PMSM) 158 7.8 Modeling a Saturated Transformer 158 7.9 Laboratory Project: Transient Response of a Single-Phase Nonideal Transformer for Three Types of Power Supply—Sinusoidal, Square Wave, and SPWM 158 7.10 Suggested Problems 169 References 175 Further Reading 175 8 Stand-Alone and Grid-Connected Inverters 177 8.1 Introduction 177 8.2 Constant Current Control 181 8.3 Constant P–Q Control 182 8.4 Constant P–V Control 183 8.5 IEEE 1547 and Associated Controls 184 8.6 P+Resonant Stationary Frame Control 187 8.7 Phase-Locked Loop (PLL) for Grid Synchronization 188 8.8 Laboratory Project: Simulation of a Grid-Connected/Stand-Alone Inverter 190 8.9 Suggested Problems 197 References 199 Further Reading 201 9 Modeling Alternative Sources of Energy 203 9.1 Electrical Modeling of Alternative Power Plants 203 9.2 Modeling a Photovoltaic Power Plant 204 9.3 Modeling an Induction Generator (IG) 205 9.4 Modeling a SEIG Wind Power Plant 207 9.5 Modeling a DFIG Wind Power Plant 208 9.6 Modeling a PMSG Wind Power Plant 208 9.7 Modeling a Fuel Cell Stack 211 9.8 Modeling a Lead Acid Battery Bank 215 9.9 Modeling an Integrated Power Plant 219 9.10 Suggested Problems 224 References 225 10 Power Quality Analysis 227 10.1 Introduction 227 10.2 Fourier Series 231 10.3 Discrete Fourier Transform for Harmonic Evaluation of Electrical Signals 237 10.3.1 Practical Implementation Issues of DFT Using FFT 237 10.4 Electrical Power and Power Factor Computation for Distorted Conditions 239 10.5 Laboratory Project: Design of a DFT-Based Electrical Power Evaluation Function in MATLAB 242 10.6 Suggested Problems 250 References 253 Further Reading 253 11 From PSIM Simulation to Hardware Implementation in DSP 255Hua Jin 11.1 Introduction 255 11.2 PSIM Overview 255 11.3 From Analog Control to Digital Control 257 11.4 Automatic Code Generation in PSIM 264 11.4.1 TI F28335 DSP Peripheral Blocks 265 11.4.2 Adding DSP Peripheral Blocks 266 11.4.3 Defining SCI Blocks for Real-Time Monitoring and Debugging 271 11.5 PIL Simulation with PSIM 272 11.6 Conclusion 275 References 278 Further Reading 278 12 Digital Processing Techniques applied to Power Electronics 279Danilo Iglesias Brandão and Fernando Pinhabel Marafão 12.1 Introduction 279 12.2 Basic Digital Processing Techniques 280 12.2.1 Instantaneous and Discrete Signal Calculations 280 12.2.2 Derivative and Integral Value Calculation 280 12.2.3 Moving Average Filter 282 12.2.4 Laboratory Project: Active Current Calculation 286 12.3 Fundamental Component Identification 287 12.3.1 IIR Filter 288 12.3.2 FIR Filter 290 12.3.3 Laboratory Project: THD Calculation 291 12.4 Fortescue’s Sequence Components Identification 293 12.4.1 Sequence Component Identification Using IIR Filter 296 12.4.2 Sequence Component Identification Using DCT Filter 297 12.4.3 Laboratory Project: Calculation of Negative- and Zero-Sequence Factors 298 12.5 Natural Reference Frame PLLs 300 12.5.1 Single-Phase PLL 301 12.5.2 Three-Phase PLL 302 12.5.3 Laboratory Project: Single-Phase PLL Implementation 303 12.5.4 Laboratory Project: Fundamental Wave Detector Based on PLL 306 12.6 MPPT Techniques 307 12.6.1 Perturb and Observe 310 12.6.2 Incremental Conductance 310 12.6.3 Beta Technique 312 12.6.4 Laboratory Project: Implementing the IC Technique 312 12.7 Islanding Detection 314 12.7.1 Laboratory Project: Passive Islanding Detection Based on IEEE Std. 1547 315 12.8 Suggested Problems 317 References 319 Index 321

Read more less

Book SynopsisEssential reference providing best practice of LTE-A, VoLTE, and IoT Design/deployment/Performance and evolution towards 5G This book is a practical guide to the design, deployment, and performance of LTE-A, VoLTE/IMS and IoT. A comprehensive practical performance analysis for VoLTE is conducted based on field measurement results from live LTE networks. Also, it provides a comprehensive introduction to IoT and 5G evolutions. Practical aspects and best practice of LTE-A/IMS/VoLTE/IoT are presented. Practical aspects of LTE-Advanced features are presented. In addition, LTE/LTE-A network capacity dimensioning and analysis are demonstrated based on live LTE/LTE-A networks KPIs. A comprehensive foundation for 5G technologies is provided including massive MIMO, eMBB, URLLC, mMTC, NGCN and network slicing, cloudification, virtualization and SDN. Practical Guide to LTE-A, VoLTE and IoT: Paving the Way Towards 5G can be used as a practical comprehensive guide forTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxi 1 LTE and LTE-A Overview 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Link Spectrum Efficiency 3 1.3 LTE-Advanced and Beyond 4 1.4 Evolved Packet System (EPS) Overview 9 1.5 Network Architecture Evolution 11 1.6 LTE UE Description 14 1.7 EPS Bearer Procedures 15 1.8 Access and Non-access Stratum Procedures 20 1.9 LTE Air Interface 26 1.10 OFDM Signal Generation 32 1.11 LTE Channels and Procedures 34 1.12 Uplink Physical Channels 43 1.13 Physical Layer Procedures 45 1.14 RRC Layer and Mobility Procedures 51 1.15 LTE Idle Mode Mobility Procedures 60 1.16 LTE Connected Mode Mobility Procedures 68 1.17 Interworking with Other 3GPP Radio Access 76 References 86 2 Introduction to the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) 87 2.1 Introduction 87 2.2 IMS Network Description 91 2.3 IMS Identities and Subscription 131 2.4 IMS Architecture and Interfaces 134 2.5 MMTel (Multimedia Telephony) Services 136 2.6 Service Centralization and Continuity AS (SCC AS) 141 2.7 Operator X IMS–VoLTE Architecture 145 3 VoLTE/CSFB Call Setup Delay and Handover Analysis 158 3.1 Overview 158 3.2 Introduction 158 3.3 CSFB Call Flow and Relevant KPIs 160 3.4 VoLTE Call Flow and Relevant KPIs 162 3.5 VoLTE Handover and Data Interruption Time 166 3.6 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) 169 3.7 Performance Analysis 171 3.8 Latency Reduction During Handover 182 3.9 Practical Use Cases and Recommendations 187 3.10 Conclusions 190 References 195 4 Comprehensive Performance Evaluation of VoLTE 197 4.1 Overview 197 4.2 Introduction 197 4.3 VoLTE Principles 198 4.4 Main VoLTE Features 200 4.5 Testing Environment and Main VoLTE KPIs 203 4.6 VoLTE Performance Evaluation 204 4.7 EVS Coding and Voice Evolution 214 4.8 TTI Bundling Performance Evaluation 219 4.9 BLER Impact on Voice Quality 220 4.10 Scheduler Performance 220 4.11 VoLTE KPI Evaluation 221 4.12 Use Cases and Recommendations 223 4.13 Conclusions 226 References 228 5 Evaluation of LTE-Advanced Features 230 5.1 Introduction to LTE-Advanced Features 230 5.2 Carrier Aggregation in LTE-A and LTE-A Pro 231 5.3 Higher-order Modulation (HOM) for Uplink and Downlink 242 5.4 LTE-A Feature Dependencies 247 5.5 Other Enhancements Towards Advanced LTE Deployments 252 References 263 6 LTE Network Capacity Analysis 264 6.1 Overview 264 6.2 Introduction 264 6.3 Users and Traffic Utilization 266 6.4 Downlink Analysis 270 6.5 DL KPI Analysis 274 6.6 UL KPI Analysis 289 6.7 Data Connection Performance 302 6.8 Link Reliability Analysis 305 6.9 Main KPI Comparison for Different Operators 307 References 309 7 IoT Evolution Towards a Super-connected World 310 7.1 Overview 310 7.2 Introduction to the IoT 310 7.3 IoT Standards 312 7.4 IoT Platform 314 7.5 IoT Gateways, Devices, and “Things” Management 318 7.6 Edge and Fog Computing 319 7.7 IoT Sensors 322 7.8 IoT Protocols 323 7.9 IoT Networks 327 7.10 3GPP Standards for IoT 337 7.11 3GPP NB-IoT 341 7.12 NB-IoT DL Specifications 343 7.13 NB-IoT UL Specifications 352 7.14 Release 13 Machine-type Communications Overview 358 7.15 Link Budget Analysis 359 7.16 NB-IoT Network Topology 364 7.17 Architecture Enhancement for CIoT 367 7.18 Sample IoT Use Cases 374 References 380 8 5G Evolution Towards a Super-connected World 382 8.1 Overview 382 8.2 Introduction 382 8.3 5G New Radio (NR) and Air Interface 385 8.4 What is Next for LTE-A Pro Evolution? 386 8.5 5G Spectrum View 387 8.6 5G Design Considerations 390 8.7 5G Deployment Scenarios for Mobile Applications 400 8.8 Air-to-Ground and Satellite Scenarios 401 8.9 5G Evaluation KPIs 405 8.10 Next-generation Radio Access Requirements 407 8.11 5G NextGen Core Network Architecture 416 8.12 5G Waveform and Multiple Access Design 423 8.13 NFV and SDN 433 8.14 Conclusion 440 References 441 Index 445

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book introduces the state-of-the-art in research in parallel and distributed embedded systems, which have been enabled by developments in silicon technology, micro-electro-mechanical systems (MEMS), wireless communications, computer networking, and digital electronics.Table of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgment xxi Part I OVERVIEW 1 Introduction 3 1.1 Embedded Systems Applications 6 1.1.1 Cyber-Physical Systems 6 1.1.2 Space 6 1.1.3 Medical 7 1.1.4 Automotive 8 1.2 Characteristics of Embedded Systems Applications 9 1.2.1 Throughput-Intensive 9 1.2.2 Thermal-Constrained 9 1.2.3 Reliability-Constrained 10 1.2.4 Real-Time 10 1.2.5 Parallel and Distributed 10 1.3 Embedded Systems—Hardware and Software 11 1.3.1 Embedded Systems Hardware 11 1.3.2 Embedded Systems Software 14 1.4 Modeling—An Integral Part of the Embedded Systems Design Flow 15 1.4.1 Modeling Objectives 16 1.4.2 Modeling Paradigms 18 1.4.3 Strategies for Integration of Modeling Paradigms 20 1.5 Optimization in Embedded Systems 21 1.5.1 Optimization of Embedded Systems Design Metrics 23 1.5.2 Multiobjective Optimization 26 1.6 Chapter Summary 27 2 Multicore-Based EWSNs—An Example of Parallel and Distributed Embedded Systems 29 2.1 Multicore Embedded Wireless Sensor Network Architecture 31 2.2 Multicore Embedded Sensor Node Architecture 33 2.2.1 Sensing Unit 34 2.2.2 Processing Unit 34 2.2.3 Storage Unit 34 2.2.4 Communication Unit 35 2.2.5 Power Unit 35 2.2.6 Actuator Unit 35 2.2.7 Location Finding Unit 36 2.3 Compute-Intensive Tasks Motivating the Emergence of MCEWSNs 36 2.3.1 Information Fusion 36 2.3.2 Encryption 38 2.3.3 Network Coding 38 2.3.4 Software-Defined Radio (SDR) 38 2.4 MCEWSN Application Domains 38 2.4.1 Wireless Video Sensor Networks (WVSNs) 39 2.4.2 Wireless Multimedia Sensor Networks (WMSNs) 39 2.4.3 Satellite-Based Wireless Sensor Networks (SBWSN) 40 2.4.4 Space Shuttle Sensor Networks (3SN) 41 2.4.5 Aerial–Terrestrial Hybrid Sensor Networks (ATHSNs) 42 2.4.6 Fault-Tolerant (FT) Sensor Networks 43 2.5 Multicore Embedded Sensor Nodes 43 2.5.1 InstraNode 43 2.5.2 Mars Rover Prototype Mote 43 2.5.3 Satellite-Based Sensor Node (SBSN) 44 2.5.4 Multi-CPU-Based Sensor Node Prototype 44 2.5.5 Smart Camera Mote 44 2.6 Research Challenges and Future Research Directions 45 2.7 Chapter Summary 47 Part II MODELING 3 An Application Metrics Estimation Model for Embedded Wireless Sensor Networks 51 3.1 Application Metrics Estimation Model 52 3.1.1 Lifetime Estimation 53 3.1.2 Throughput Estimation 56 3.1.3 Reliability Estimation 57 3.1.4 Models Validation 57 3.2 Experimental Results 58 3.2.1 Experimental Setup 58 3.2.2 Results 59 3.3 Chapter Summary 61 4 Modeling and Analysis of Fault Detection and Fault Tolerance in Embedded Wireless Sensor Networks 63 4.1 Related Work 67 4.1.1 Fault Detection 67 4.1.2 Fault Tolerance 68 4.1.3 WSN Reliability Modeling 69 4.2 Fault Diagnosis in WSNs 70 4.2.1 Sensor Faults 70 4.2.2 Taxonomy for Fault Diagnosis Techniques 72 4.3 Distributed Fault Detection Algorithms 74 4.3.1 Fault Detection Algorithm 1: The Chen Algorithm 74 4.3.2 Fault Detection Algorithm 2: The Ding Algorithm 76 4.4 Fault-Tolerant Markov Models 77 4.4.1 Fault-Tolerance Parameters 77 4.4.2 Fault-Tolerant Sensor Node Model 79 4.4.3 Fault-Tolerant WSN Cluster Model 81 4.4.4 Fault-Tolerant WSN Model 83 4.5 Simulation of Distributed Fault Detection Algorithms 85 4.5.1 Using ns−2 to Simulate Faulty Sensors 85 4.5.2 Experimental Setup for Simulated Data 86 4.5.3 Experiments Using Real-World Data 86 4.6 Numerical Results 91 4.6.1 Experimental Setup 91 4.6.2 Reliability and MTTF for an NFT and an FT Sensor Node 91 4.6.3 Reliability and MTTF for an NFT and an FT WSN Cluster 95 4.6.4 Reliability and MTTF for an NFT and an FT WSN 98 4.7 Research Challenges and Future Research Directions 101 4.7.1 Accurate Fault Detection 101 4.7.2 Benchmarks for Comparing Fault Detection Algorithms 101 4.7.3 Energy-Efficient Fault Detection and Tolerance 101 4.7.4 Machine-Learning-Inspired Fault Detection 102 4.7.5 FT in Multimedia Sensor Networks 102 4.7.6 Security 102 4.7.7 WSN Design and Tuning for Reliability 104 4.7.8 Novel WSN Architectures 104 4.8 Chapter Summary 105 5 A Queueing Theoretic Approach for Performance Evaluation of Low-Power Multicore-Based Parallel Embedded Systems 107 5.1 Related Work 110 5.2 Queueing Network Modeling of Multicore Embedded Architectures 112 5.2.1 Queueing Network Terminology 112 5.2.2 Modeling Approach 113 5.2.3 Assumptions 119 5.3 Queueing Network Model Validation 120 5.3.1 Theoretical Validation 120 5.3.2 Validation with a Multicore Simulator 120 5.3.3 Speedup 124 5.4 Queueing Theoretic Model Insights 125 5.4.1 Model Setup 125 5.4.2 The Effects of Cache Miss Rates on Performance 129 5.4.3 The Effects of Workloads on Performance 132 5.4.4 Performance per Watt and Performance per Unit Area Computations 135 5.5 Chapter Summary 139 Part III OPTIMIZATION 6 Optimization Approaches in Distributed Embedded Wireless Sensor Networks 143 6.1 Architecture-Level Optimizations 144 6.2 Sensor Node Component-Level Optimizations 146 6.2.1 Sensing Unit 146 6.2.2 Processing Unit 148 6.2.3 Transceiver Unit 148 6.2.4 Storage Unit 148 6.2.5 Actuator Unit 148 6.2.6 Location Finding Unit 149 6.2.7 Power Unit 149 6.3 Data Link-Level Medium Access Control Optimizations 149 6.3.1 Load Balancing and Throughput Optimizations 149 6.3.2 Power/Energy Optimizations 150 6.4 Network-Level Data Dissemination and Routing Protocol Optimizations 152 6.4.1 Query Dissemination Optimizations 152 6.4.2 Real-Time Constrained Optimizations 154 6.4.3 Network Topology Optimizations 154 6.4.4 Resource-Adaptive Optimizations 154 6.5 Operating System-Level Optimizations 155 6.5.1 Event-Driven Optimizations 155 6.5.2 Dynamic Power Management 155 6.5.3 Fault Tolerance 155 6.6 Dynamic Optimizations 156 6.6.1 Dynamic Voltage and Frequency Scaling 156 6.6.2 Software-Based Dynamic Optimizations 156 6.6.3 Dynamic Network Reprogramming 157 6.7 Chapter Summary 157 7 High-Performance Energy-Efficient Multicore-Based Parallel Embedded Computing 159 7.1 Characteristics of Embedded Systems Applications 163 7.1.1 Throughput-Intensive 163 7.1.2 Thermal-Constrained 165 7.1.3 Reliability-Constrained 165 7.1.4 Real-Time 165 7.1.5 Parallel and Distributed 165 7.2 Architectural Approaches 166 7.2.1 Core Layout 166 7.2.2 Memory Design 168 7.2.3 Interconnection Network 170 7.2.4 Reduction Techniques 172 7.3 Hardware-Assisted Middleware Approaches 173 7.3.1 Dynamic Voltage and Frequency Scaling 174 7.3.2 Advanced Configuration and Power Interface 174 7.3.3 Gating Techniques 175 7.3.4 Threading Techniques 176 7.3.5 Energy Monitoring and Management 177 7.3.6 Dynamic Thermal Management 178 7.3.7 Dependable Techniques 179 7.4 Software Approaches 180 7.4.1 Data Forwarding 180 7.4.2 Load Distribution 180 7.5 High-Performance Energy-Efficient Multicore Processors 182 7.5.1 ARM11 MPCore 183 7.5.2 ARM Cortex A-9 MPCore 184 7.5.3 MPC8572E PowerQUICC III 184 7.5.4 Tilera TILEPro64 and TILE-Gx 184 7.5.5 AMD Opteron Processor 185 7.5.6 Intel Xeon Processor 185 7.5.7 Intel Sandy Bridge Processor 185 7.5.8 Graphics Processing Units 186 7.6 Challenges and Future Research Directions 186 7.7 Chapter Summary 189 8 An MDP-Based Dynamic Optimization Methodology for Embedded Wireless Sensor Networks 191 8.1 Related Work 193 8.2 MDP-Based Tuning Overview 195 8.2.1 MDP-Based Tuning Methodology for Embedded Wireless Sensor Networks 195 8.2.2 MDP Overview with Respect to Embedded Wireless Sensor Networks 197 8.3 Application-Specific Embedded Sensor Node Tuning Formulation as an MDP 200 8.3.1 State Space 200 8.3.2 Decision Epochs and Actions 200 8.3.3 State Dynamics 201 8.3.4 Policy and Performance Criterion 201 8.3.5 Reward Function 202 8.3.6 Optimality Equation 204 8.3.7 Policy Iteration Algorithm 205 8.4 Implementation Guidelines and Complexity 205 8.4.1 Implementation Guidelines 205 8.4.2 Computational Complexity 206 8.4.3 Data Memory Analysis 207 8.5 Model Extensions 207 8.6 Numerical Results 210 8.6.1 Fixed Heuristic Policies for Performance Comparisons 210 8.6.2 MDP Specifications 210 8.6.3 Results for a Security/Defense System Application 213 8.6.4 Results for a Healthcare Application 216 8.6.5 Results for an Ambient Conditions Monitoring Application 220 8.6.6 Sensitivity Analysis 222 8.6.7 Number of Iterations for Convergence 223 8.7 Chapter Summary 223 9 Online Algorithms for Dynamic Optimization of Embedded Wireless Sensor Networks 225 9.1 Related Work 227 9.2 Dynamic Optimization Methodology 228 9.2.1 Methodology Overview 228 9.2.2 State Space 229 9.2.3 Objective Function 229 9.2.4 Online Optimization Algorithms 230 9.3 Experimental Results 233 9.3.1 Experimental Setup 233 9.3.2 Results 235 9.4 Chapter Summary 239 10 A Lightweight Dynamic Optimization Methodology for Embedded Wireless Sensor Networks 241 10.1 Related Work 243 10.2 Dynamic Optimization Methodology 244 10.2.1 Overview 244 10.2.2 State Space 246 10.2.3 Optimization Objection Function 246 10.3 Algorithms for Dynamic Optimization Methodology 248 10.3.1 Initial Tunable Parameter Value Settings and Exploration Order 248 10.3.2 Parameter Arrangement 249 10.3.3 Online Optimization Algorithm 251 10.3.4 Computational Complexity 252 10.4 Experimental Results 252 10.4.1 Experimental Setup 253 10.4.2 Results 255 10.5 Chapter Summary 266 11 Parallelized Benchmark-Driven Performance Evaluation of Symmetric Multiprocessors and Tiled Multicore Architectures for Parallel Embedded Systems 269 11.1 Related Work 271 11.2 Multicore Architectures and Benchmarks 272 11.2.1 Multicore Architectures 272 11.2.2 Benchmark Applications and Kernels 273 11.3 Parallel Computing Device Metrics 275 11.4 Results 277 11.4.1 Quantitative Comparison of SMPs and TMAs 277 11.4.2 Benchmark-Driven Results for SMPs 278 11.4.3 Benchmark-Driven Results for TMAs 280 11.4.4 Comparison of SMPs and TMAs 282 11.5 Chapter Summary 285 12 High-Performance Optimizations on Tiled Manycore Embedded Systems: A Matrix Multiplication Case Study 287 12.1 Related Work 290 12.1.1 Performance Analysis and Optimization 290 12.1.2 Parallelized MM Algorithms 290 12.1.3 Cache Blocking 291 12.1.4 Tiled Manycore Architectures 292 12.2 Tiled Manycore Architecture (TMA) Overview 293 12.2.1 Intel’s TeraFLOPS Research Chip 294 12.2.2 IBM’s Cyclops-64 (C64) 296 12.2.3 Tilera’s TILEPro64 297 12.2.4 Tilera’s TILE64 300 12.3 Parallel Computing Metrics and Matrix Multiplication (MM) Case Study 301 12.3.1 Parallel Computing Metrics for TMAs 301 12.3.2 Matrix Multiplication (MM) Case Study 302 12.4 Matrix Multiplication Algorithms’ Code Snippets for Tilera’s TILEPro64 303 12.4.1 Serial Non-blocked Matrix Multiplication Algorithm 303 12.4.2 Serial Blocked Matrix Multiplication Algorithm 304 12.4.3 Parallel Blocked Matrix Multiplication Algorithm 307 12.4.4 Parallel Blocked Cannon’s Algorithm for Matrix Multiplication 309 12.5 Performance Optimization on a Manycore Architecture 314 12.5.1 Performance Optimization on a Single Tile 314 12.5.2 Parallel Performance Optimizations 315 12.5.3 Compiler-Based Optimizations 319 12.6 Results 323 12.6.1 Data Allocation, Data Decomposition, Data Layout, and Communication 324 12.6.2 Performance Optimizations on a Single Tile 327 12.6.3 Parallel Performance Optimizations 332 12.7 Chapter Summary 339 13 Conclusions 343 References 349 Index 369

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book focuses on the emerging research topic green (energy efficient) wireless networks which has drawn huge attention recently from both academia and industry. This topic is highly motivated due to important environmental, financial, and quality-of-experience (QoE) considerations.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgements xiii Dedication xv Part I INTRODUCTION TO GREEN NETWORKS 1 Green Network Fundamentals 3 1.1 Introduction: Need for Green Networks 3 1.2 Traffic Models 5 1.2.1 Traffic Spatial Fluctuation Modelling 6 1.2.2 Traffic Temporal Fluctuation Modelling 8 1.3 Energy Efficiency and Consumption Models in Wireless Networks 9 1.3.1 Throughput Models 9 1.3.2 Power Consumption Models 10 1.3.3 Energy Efficiency and Consumption Models 19 1.4 Performance Trade-Offs 23 1.4.1 Network-side Trade-Offs 24 1.4.2 Mobile User Trade-Offs 26 1.5 Summary 28 2 Green Network Solutions 29 2.1 Green Solutions and Analytical Models at Low and/or Bursty Call Traffic Loads 29 2.1.1 Dynamic Planning 29 2.1.2 MT Radio Interface Sleep Scheduling 34 2.1.3 Discussion 37 2.2 Green Solutions and Analytical Models at High and/or Continuous Call Traffic Loads 38 2.2.1 Scheduling for Single-Network Access 38 2.2.2 Scheduling for Multi-Homing Access 41 2.2.3 Scheduling with Small-Cells 41 2.2.4 Relaying and Device-to-Device Communications 42 2.2.5 Scheduling with Multiple Energy Sources 45 2.2.6 Discussion 47 2.3 Green Projects and Standards 48 2.4 Road Ahead 49 2.5 Summary 52 Part II MULTI-HOMING RESOURCE ALLOCATION 3 Green Multi-homing Approach 55 3.1 Heterogeneous Wireless Medium 55 3.1.1 Wireless Networks 56 3.1.2 Mobile Terminals 57 3.1.3 Radio Resources and Propagation Attenuation 57 3.2 Green Multi-homing Resource Allocation 58 3.3 Challenging Issues 60 3.3.1 Single-User versus Multiuser System 60 3.3.2 Single-Operator versus Multioperator System 60 3.3.3 Fairness 61 3.3.4 Centralized versus Decentralized Implementation 61 3.3.5 In-device Coexistence Interference 62 3.3.6 Computational Complexity 66 3.3.7 Number of MT Radio Interfaces versus Number of Available Networks 67 3.4 Summary 69 4 Multi-homing for a Green Downlink 70 4.1 Introduction 70 4.2 Win–Win Cooperative Green Resource Allocation 72 4.2.1 Non-cooperative Single-Network Solution 73 4.2.2 Win–Win Cooperative Solution 75 4.2.3 Benchmark: Sum Minimization Solution 81 4.2.4 Performance Evaluation 81 4.3 IDC Interference-Aware Green Resource Allocation 86 4.3.1 IDC Interference-Aware Resource Allocation Design 87 4.3.2 Performance Evaluation 90 4.4 Summary 93 5 Multi-homing for a Green Uplink 94 5.1 Introduction 94 5.2 Green Multi-homing Uplink Resource Allocation for Data Calls 95 5.2.1 Optimal Green Uplink Radio Resource Allocation with QoS Guarantee 97 5.2.2 Suboptimal Uplink Energy-Efficient Radio Resource Allocation 102 5.2.3 Performance Evaluation 104 5.3 Green Multi-homing Uplink Resource Allocation for Video Calls 107 5.3.1 Energy Management Sub-system Design 109 5.3.2 Performance Evaluation 114 5.4 Summary 117 6 Radio Frequency and Visible Light Communication Internetworking 119 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 VLC Fundamentals 120 6.2.1 VLC Transceivers 120 6.2.2 VLC Channel 122 6.2.3 Interference Issues in VLC 124 6.2.4 VLC–RF Internetworking 126 6.3 Green RF–VLC Internetworking 128 6.3.1 Energy Efficiency Maximization 129 6.3.2 Performance Evaluation 133 6.3.3 Green VLC–RF Internetworking Challenging Issues 137 6.4 Summary 138 Part III NETWORK MANAGEMENT SOLUTIONS 7 Dynamic Planning in Green Networks 141 7.1 Introduction 141 7.2 Dynamic Planning with Dense Small-Cell Deployment 142 7.2.1 Energy-Efficient and QoS-Aware Cell Zooming 144 7.2.2 Performance Evaluation 145 7.3 Dynamic Planning with Cooperative Networking 148 7.3.1 Optimal Resource On–Off Switching Framework 150 7.3.2 Performance Evaluation 152 7.4 Balanced Dynamic Planning Approach 154 7.4.1 Two-Timescale Approach 157 7.4.2 Performance Evaluation 162 7.5 Summary 164 8 Greening the Cell Edges 166 8.1 Introduction 166 8.1.1 Why Cell-on-Edge Deployment? 167 8.1.2 Background Work 168 8.2 Two-Tier Small-Cell-on-Edge Deployment 169 8.2.1 Network Layout 169 8.2.2 Bandwidth Partition and Channel Allocation 170 8.2.3 Mobile User Distribution 171 8.3 Energy-Aware Transmission Design 171 8.3.1 Path-Loss Model for Strong LOS Conditions 171 8.3.2 Composite Fading Channel for Strong LOS Conditions 172 8.4 Area Spectral Efficiency of HetNets 173 8.5 Analytical Bounds on ASE of HetNets 176 8.5.1 Mean Achievable Capacity Based on MGF Approach 176 8.5.2 Assumptions to Derive Upper and Lower Bounds 177 8.5.3 Analytical Bounds on the Capacity of Macro-cell Network 179 8.5.4 Analytical Bounds on the Capacity of Small-Cell Networks 180 8.6 Analytical Bounds on ASE over Generalized-K Fading Channel 181 8.7 Energy Analysis of HetNets 183 8.7.1 Energy Consumption of Two-Tier HetNets 184 8.7.2 Energy Savings of Two-Tier HetNets 184 8.8 Ecology and Economics of HetNets 185 8.8.1 CO2e Emissions and Reduction in CO2e Emissions 186 8.8.2 Daily CO2e Emissions Profile 186 8.8.3 Low-Carbon Economy 186 8.9 Summary 188 Appendix A - Simulation Parameters 189 Appendix B - Proof of (8.38) 189 9 D2D Communications in Hierarchical HetNets 191 9.1 Introduction 191 9.2 Modelling Hierarchical Heterogeneous Networks 192 9.2.1 Network Architecture 193 9.2.2 D2D User Density in Hierarchical HetNets 194 9.2.3 Spectrum Partitioning in Hierarchical HetNets 196 9.2.4 Power Control over D2D Links 196 9.3 Spectral Efficiency Analysis 197 9.3.1 Traditional HetNet 197 9.3.2 Hierarchical HetNet 198 9.4 Average User Transmission Power Analysis 200 9.4.1 Discussion on Transmission Power Analysis of D2D Users 202 9.5 Backhaul Energy Analysis 204 9.5.1 Backhaul Power Consumption 204 9.5.2 Backhaul Energy Efficiency 205 9.5.3 Considerations on Backhaul Energy Efficiency of Hierarchical HetNet 206 9.6 Summary 208 Appendix A 209 Appendix B - Simulation Parameters 210 10 Emerging Device-Centric Communications 211 10.1 Introduction 211 10.2 Emerging Device-Centric Paradigms 212 10.2.1 Device-to-Device Communication Management 213 10.2.2 Device-to-Device Communication Architecture 213 10.2.3 Device-to-Device Communication Challenges 214 10.3 Devices-to-Device Communications 214 10.3.1 System Model 214 10.4 Optimal Selection of Source Devices and Radio Interfaces 216 10.4.1 Device Selection Criteria 217 10.4.2 Ascending Proxy Auction for Device Selection 218 10.4.3 Discussions on Device and Radio Interface Selection 219 10.5 Optimal Packet Split among Devices 221 10.6 Green Analysis of Mobile Devices 224 10.6.1 Energy Consumption of Mobile Devices 225 10.6.2 Electricity Cost for Mobile Charging 226 10.6.3 Battery Life of Mobile Devices 227 10.7 Some Challenges and Future Directions 228 10.7.1 Centralized Ds2D Set-up 228 10.7.2 Decentralized Ds2D Set-up 228 10.8 Summary 229 References 230 Index 245

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe third edition of this popular reference covers enabling technologies for building up 5G wireless networks. Due to extensive research and complexity of the incoming solutions for the next generation of wireless networks it is anticipated that the industry will select a subset of these results and leave some advanced technologies to be implemented later,. This new edition presents a carefully chosen combination of the candidate network architectures and the required tools for their analysis. Due to the complexity of the technology, the discussion on 5G will be extensive and it will be difficult to reach consensus on the new global standard. The discussion will have to include the vendors, operators, regulators as well as the research and academic community in the field. Having a comprehensive book will help many participants to join actively the discussion and make meaningful contribution to shaping the new standard.Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Introduction: Generalized Model of Advanced Wireless Networks 1 1.1 Network Model 3 1.2 Network Connectivity 5 1.3 Wireless Network Design with Small World Properties 7 1.4 Frequency Channels Backup 11 1.5 Generalized Network Model 13 1.6 Routing Protocols Over s-Lattice Network 14 1.7 Network Performance 16 1.8 Node, Route, Topology, and Network Robustness 19 1.9 Power Consumption 20 1.10 Protocol Complexity 20 1.11 Performance Evaluation 21 1.12 Book Layout 27 Appendix A.1 33 References 34 2 Adaptive Network Layer 35 2.1 Graphs and Routing Protocols 35 2.2 Graph Theory 54 2.3 Routing with Topology Aggregation 56 References 60 3 Mobility Management 65 3.1 Cellular Networks 65 3.2 Cellular Systems with Prioritized Handoff 89 3.3 Cell Residing Time Distribution 100 3.4 Mobility Prediction in Pico- and Micro-Cellular Networks 105 Appendix A.3 Distance Calculation in an Intermediate Cell 116 References 122 4 Ad Hoc Networks 126 4.1 Routing Protocols 126 4.2 Hybrid Routing Protocol 146 4.3 Scalable Routing Strategies 152 4.4 Multipath Routing 160 4.5 Clustering Protocols 162 4.6 Cashing Schemes for Routing 175 4.7 Distributed QoS Routing 181 References 190 5 Sensor Networks 194 5.1 Introduction 194 5.2 Sensor Network Parameters 196 5.3 Sensor Network Architecture 199 5.4 Mobile Sensor Network Deployment 209 5.5 Directed Diffusion 212 5.6 Aggregation in Wireless Sensor Networks 216 5.7 Boundary Estimation 220 5.8 Optimal Transmission Radius in Sensor Networks 227 5.9 Data Funneling 233 5.10 Equivalent Transport Control Protocol in Sensor Networks 236 References 237 6 Security 244 6.1 Authentication 244 6.2 Security Architecture 253 6.3 Key Management 257 6.4 Security in Ad Hoc Networks 261 6.5 Security in Sensor Networks 268 References 269 7 Network Economics 272 7.1 Fundamentals of Network Economics 272 7.2 Wireless Network Microeconomics: Data Sponsoring 286 7.3 Spectrum Pricing for Market Equilibrium 291 7.4 Sequential Spectrum Sharing 300 7.5 Data Plan Trading 308 References 315 8 Multi-Hop Cellular Networks 318 8.1 Modeling Multi-Hop Multi-Operator Multi-Technology Wireless Networks 318 8.2 Technology Background 319 8.3 System Model and Notation 321 8.4 m3 Route Discovery Protocols 323 8.5 Performance of m3 Route Discovery Protocols 327 8.6 Protocol Complexity 329 8.7 Traffic Offloading Incentives 330 8.8 Performance Illustrations 335 References 344 9 Cognitive Networks 346 9.1 Technology Background 346 9.2 Spectrum Auctions for Multi-hop Cognitive Networks 350 9.3 Compound Auctioning in Multi-hop Cognitive Cellular Networks 363 References 388 10 Stochastic Geometry 391 10.1 Background Theory 391 References 398 11 Heterogeneous Networks 402 11.1 Preliminaries 402 11.2 Self-Organized Small Cell Networks 404 11.3 Dynamic Network Architecture 411 11.4 Economics of Heterogeneous Networks 434 References 443 12 Access Point Selection 446 12.1 Background Technology 446 12.2 Network Selection Game 449 12.3 Joint Access Point Selection and Power Allocation 453 12.4 Joint AP Selection and Beamforming Optimization 463 References 474 13 Self-Organizing Networks 478 13.1 Self-Organizing Network Optimization 478 13.2 System Model 478 13.3 Joint Optimization of Tilts and AP Association 481 References 484 14 Complex Networks 486 14.1 Evolution Towards Large-Scale Networks 486 14.2 Network Characteristics 491 14.3 Random Graphs 494 References 496 15 Massive MIMO 499 15.1 Linearly Precoded Multicellular Downlink System 499 15.2 System Model 503 15.3 Optimization for Perfect Channel State Information 505 15.4 Robust Designs for WSRM Problem 509 Appendix A.15 519 Appendix B.15 519 References 521 16 Network Optimization Theory 523 16.1 Introduction 523 16.2 Layering as Optimization Decomposition 524 16.3 Cross-Layer Optimization 533 16.4 Optimization Problem Decomposition Methods 543 References 554 17 Network Information Theory 557 17.1 Capacity of Ad Hoc Networks 557 17.2 Information Theory and Network Architectures 569 17.3 Cooperative Transmission in Wireless Multihop Ad Hoc Networks 577 References 584 18 Stability of Advanced Network Architectures 585 18.1 Stability of Cooperative Cognitive Wireless Networks 585 18.2 System Model 586 18.4 Optimal Control Policy 592 18.5 Achievable Rates 594 18.6 Stabilizing Transmission Policies 598 References 605 19 Multi-Operator Spectrum Sharing 607 19.1 Business Models for Spectrum Sharing 607 19.2 Spectrum Sharing in Multi-hop Networks 638 References 656 20 Large Scale Networks and Mean Field Theory 659 20.1 MFT for Large Heterogeneous Cellular Networks 659 20.2 Large Scale Network Model Compression 664 20.3 Mean Field Theory Model of Large Scale DTN Networks 668 20.4 Mean Field Modeling of Adaptive Infection Recovery in Multicast DTN Networks 674 20.5 Mean Field Theory for Scale-Free Random Networks 701 20.6 Spectrum Sharing and MFT 709 20.7 Modeling Dynamics of Complex System 711 Appendix A.20 Iterative Algorithm to Solve Systems of Nonlinear ODEs (DiNSE-Algorithm) 721 Appendix B.20 Infection Rate of Destinations for DNCM 722 Appendix C.20 Infection Rate for Basic Epidemic Routing 722 References 722 21 mmWave Networks 726 21.1 mmWave Technology in Subcellular Architecture 726 21.2 Microeconomics of Dynamic mmWave Networks 737 References 747 22 Cloud Computing in Wireless Networks 750 22.1 Technology Background 750 22.2 System Model 752 22.3 System Optimization 756 22.4 Dynamic Control Algorithm 758 22.5 Achievable Rates 761 22.6 Stabilizing Control Policies 763 References 769 23 Wireless Networks and Matching Theory 771 23.1 Background Technology: Matching Markets 772 23.2 Distributed Stable Matching in Multiple Operator Cellular Network with Traffic Offloading 776 23.3 College Admissions Game Model for Cellular Networks with Traffic Offloading 779 23.4 Many to Many Matching Games for Caching in Wireless Networks 783 23.5 Many to One Matching with Externalities in Cellular Networks with Traffic Offloading 787 23.6 Security in Matching of Device to Device Pairs in Cellular Networks 791 References 795 24 Dynamic Wireless Network Infrastructure 797 24.1 Infrastructure Sharing in Multi-Operator Cellular Networks 797 24.2 User Provided Connectivity 802 24.3 Network Virtualization 806 24.4 Software Defined Networks 810 24.5 SDN Security 816 References 819 Index 827

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn exhaustive review of the history, current state, and future opportunities for harnessing light to accomplish useful work in materials, this book describes the chemistry, physics, and mechanics of light-controlled systems. Describes photomechanical materials and mechanisms, along with key applications Exceptional collection of leading authors, internationally recognized for their work in this growing area Covers the full scope of photomechanical materials: polymers, crystals, ceramics, and nanocomposites Deals with an interdisciplinary coupling of mechanics, materials, chemistry, and physics Emphasizes application opportunities in creating adaptive surface features, shape memory devices, and actuators; while assessing future prospects for utility in optics and photonics and soft roboticsTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xv 1 A Historical Overview of Photomechanical Effects in Materials, Composites, and Systems 1Toru Ube and Tomiki Ikeda 1.1 Introduction 1 References 25 2 Photochromism in the Solid State 37Oleksandr S. Bushuyev and Christopher J. Barrett 2.1 Molecular Photoswitches in the Solid State 37 2.2 Molecular and Macroscopic Motion of Azobenzene Chromophores 39 2.3 Photomechanical Effects 41 2.4 Solid-State Photochromic Molecular Machines 54 2.5 Surface Mass Transport and Phase Change Effects 62 2.6 Photochromic Reactions in Framework Architectures 65 2.7 Summary and Outlook 68 References 69 3 Photomechanics: Bend, Curl, Topography, and Topology 79Daniel Corbett, Carl D. Modes, and Mark Warner 3.1 The Photomechanics of Liquid-Crystalline Solids 81 3.2 Photomechanics and Its Mechanisms 82 3.3 A Sketch of Macroscopic Mechanical Response in LC Rubbers and Glasses 92 3.4 Photo- and Heat-Induced Topographical and Topological Changes 97 3.5 Continuous Director Variation, Part 1 97 3.6 Mechanico-Geometric Effects, Part 1 100 3.7 Continuous Director Variation, Part 2 100 3.8 Continuous Director Variation, Part 3 103 3.9 Mechanico-Geometric Effects, Part 2 106 3.10 Director Fields with Discontinuities–Advanced Origami! 107 3.11 Mechanico-Geometric Consequences of Nonisometric Origami 110 3.12 Conclusions 110 References 112 4 Photomechanical Effects in Amorphous and Semicrystalline Polymers 117Jeong JaeWie 4.1 Introduction 117 4.2 Polymeric Materials 119 4.3 The Amorphous Polymer State 119 4.4 The Semicrystalline Polymer State 121 4.5 Absorption Processes 124 4.6 Photomechanical Effects in Amorphous and Semicrystalline Azobenzene-Functionalized Polymers 126 4.7 Molecular Alignment 132 4.8 Annealing and Aging 138 4.9 Sub-Tg SegmentalMobility 142 4.10 Cross-Link Density 145 4.11 Concluding Remarks 146 References 148 5 Photomechanical Effects in Liquid-Crystalline Polymer Networks and Elastomers 153Timothy J. White 5.1 Introduction 153 5.2 Optically Responsive Liquid Crystal Polymer Networks 159 5.3 Literature Survey 165 5.4 Outlook and Conclusion 169 References 171 6 Photomechanical Effects in Polymer Nanocomposites 179Balaji Panchapakesan, Farhad Khosravi, James Loomis, and Eugene M. Terentjev 6.1 Introduction 179 6.2 Photomechanical Actuation in Polymer–Nanotube Composites 180 6.3 Fast Relaxation of Carbon Nanotubes in Polymer Composite Actuators 186 6.4 Highly Oriented Nanotubes for Photomechanical Response and Flexible Energy Conversion 191 6.5 Photomechanical Actuation Based on 2-D Nanomaterial (Graphene)–Polymer Composites 205 6.6 Applications of Photomechanical Actuation in Nanopositioning 213 6.7 Future Outlook 224 Acknowledgments 225 References 225 7 Photomechanical Effects in Photochromic Crystals 233Lingyan Zhu, Fei Tong, Rabih O. Al-Kaysi, and Christopher J. Bardeen 7.1 Introduction 233 7.2 General Principles for Organic Photomechanical Materials 234 7.3 History and Background 234 7.4 Modes of Mechanical Action 240 7.5 Photomechanical Molecular Crystal Systems 242 7.6 Future Directions 260 7.7 Conclusion 264 Acknowledgments 264 References 264 8 Photomechanical Effects in Piezoelectric Ceramics 275Kenji Uchino 8.1 Introduction 275 8.2 Photovoltaic Effect 276 8.3 Photostrictive Effect 288 8.4 Photostrictive Device Applications 294 8.5 Concluding Remarks 299 References 300 9 Switching Surface Topographies Based on Liquid Crystal Network Coatings 303Danqing Liu and Dirk J. Broer 9.1 Introduction 303 9.2 Liquid Crystal Networks 304 9.3 Conclusions 322 References 322 10 Photoinduced Shape Programming 327Taylor H.Ware 10.1 One-Way Shape Memory 329 10.2 Two-Way Shape Memory 343 10.3 Summary and Outlook 358 References 358 11 Photomechanical Effects to Enable Devices 369M. Ravi Shankar 11.1 Introduction 369 11.2 Analog Photomechanical Actuators 371 11.3 Discrete-State (Digital) Photomechanical Actuators 373 11.4 Photomechanical Mechanisms and Machines 387 References 388 12 Photomechanical Effects in Materials, Composites, and Systems: Outlook and Future Challenges 393Timothy J.White 12.1 Introduction 393 12.2 Outlook and Challenges 393 12.3 Conclusion 401 References 401 Index 405

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides unique coverage of wireless sensor system applications in space, underwater, underground, and extreme industrial environments in one volume This book covers the challenging aspects of wireless sensor systems and the problems and conditions encountered when applying them in outer space, under the water, below the ground, and in extreme industrial environments. It explores the unique aspects of designs and solutions that address those problems and challenges, and illuminates the connections, similarities, and differences between the challenges and solutions in those various environments. The creation of Wireless Sensor Systems for Extreme Environments is a response to the spread of wireless sensor technology into fields of health, safety, manufacturing, space, environmental, smart cities, advanced robotics, surveillance, and agriculture. It is the first of its kind to present, in a single reference, the unique aspects of wireless sensor system desiTable of ContentsList of Contributors xviiPreface xxi Part I Wireless Sensor Systems for Extreme Environments–Generic Solutions 11 Wireless Sensor Systems for Extreme Environments 3Habib F. Rashvand and Ali Abedi 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Wireless Sensor Systems for Space and other Extreme Environments 4 1.3 Chapter Summaries 6 2 Feedback Control Challenges with Wireless Networks in Extreme Environments 21Lonnie Labonte, Ali Abedi and Praveen Shankar 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Controllers in Extreme Environments 22 2.3 System Dynamics and Control Design Fundamentals 24 2.4 Feedback Control Challenges when using Wireless Networks 32 2.5 Effect of Delay on the Transient Response of a Second-order System 38 2.6 Discussion 42 2.7 Summary 42 References 43 3 Optimizing Lifetime and Power Consumption for Sensing Applications in Extreme Environments 45Gholamreza Alirezaei, Omid Taghizadeh and Rudolf Mathar 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Overview and Technical System Description 46 3.3 Power and Lifetime Optimisation 48 3.4 Visualization and Numerical Results 54 3.5 Application of Power Control in Extreme Environments 58 3.6 Summary 62 References 63 4 On Improving Connectivity-based Localisation in Wireless Sensor Networks 65Bang Wang 4.1 Introduction 65 4.2 Connectivity-based Localisation in One-Hop Networks 66 4.3 Connectivity-based Localisation in Multi-Hop Networks 67 4.4 On Improving Connectivity-based Localisation 70 4.5 Summary 78 References 79 5 Rare-events Sensing and Event-powered Wireless Sensor Networks 83Winston K.G. Seah and David Harrison 5.1 Coverage Preservation [19] 85 5.2 Event-powered Wireless Sensor [20] 92 5.3 Cluster-Centric WSNs for Rare-event Monitoring [21] 100 5.4 Summary 106 References 107 Part II Space WSS Solutions and Applications 111 6 Battery-less Sensors for Space 113Ali Abedi 6.1 Introduction 113 6.2 Wired or Wireless Sensing: Cost–Benefit Analysis 114 6.3 Active and Passive Wireless Sensors 117 6.4 Design Considerations for Battery-less Sensors 119 7 Contact Plan Design for Predictable Disruption-tolerant Space Sensor Networks 123Juan A. Fraire, Pablo Madoery and Jorge M. Finochietto 7.1 Introduction 123 7.2 Contact Plan Design Methodology 129 7.3 Contact Plan Design Analysis 140 7.4 Contact Plan Design Discussion 145 7.5 Summary 147 References 147 8 Infrared Wireless Sensor Network Development for the Ariane Launcher 151Hendra Kesuma, Johannes Sebald and Steffen Paul 8.1 Introduction 151 8.2 Development Processes and Measurements of Infrared Transceiver ASIC 154 8.3 Summary 166 References 167 9 Multichannel Wireless Sensor Networks for Structural Health Monitoring of Aircraft and Launchers 169Pascale Minet, Gerard Chalhoub, Erwan Livolant, Michel Misson, Ridha Soua, Rana Diab, Badr Rmili and Jean-Francois Perelgritz 9.1 Context 169 9.2 General Multichannel Challenges 173 9.3 Multichannel Challenges for Data Gathering Support 181 9.4 Sahara: Example of Solution 188 9.5 Summary 197 10 Wireless Piezoelectric Sensor Systems for Defect Detection and Localization 201Xuewu Dai, Shang Gao, Kewen Pan, Jiwen Zhu and Habib F. Rashvand 10.1 Introduction 201 10.2 Lamb Wave-based Defect Detection 204 10.3 Wireless PZT Sensor Networks 209 10.4 Wireless PZT Sensor Node 211 10.5 Distributed Data Processing 212 10.6 Summary 215 11 Navigation and Remote Sensing using Near-space Satellite Platforms 221Wen-Qin Wang and Dingde Jiang 11.1 Background and Motivation 221 11.2 Near-space Platforms in Wireless Sensor Systems 225 11.3 Overview of NSPs in Wireless Sensor Systems 228 11.4 Integrated Wireless Sensor Systems 231 11.5 Arrangement of Near-space Platforms 234 11.6 Limitations and Vulnerabilities 236 Part III Underwater and Submerged WSS Solutions 247 12 Underwater Acoustic Sensing: An Introduction 249Habib F. Rashvand, Lloyd Emokpae and James Agajo 12.1 Introduction 249 12.2 Underwater Wireless Smart Sensing 251 12.3 Netted Sensors 256 12.4 Networking 262 12.5 Typical Underwater Sensing Applications 266 13 Underwater Anchor Localisation Using Surface-reflected Beams 275Lloyd Emokpae 13.1 Introduction 275 13.2 UREAL Angle of Arrival Measurements 277 13.3 Closed-form Least Squares Position Estimation 278 13.4 Prototype Evaluation 281 Summary 286 References 286 14 Coordinates Determination of Submerged Sensors with a Single Beacon Using the Cayley–Menger Determinant 287Anisur Rahman and Vallipuram Muthukkumarasamy 14.1 Introduction 287 14.2 Underwater Wireless Sensor Networks 288 14.3 Dynamicity of Underwater Environment 289 14.4 Proposed Configuration 291 14.5 Distance Determination 293 14.6 Coordinate Determination 297 14.7 Simulation Results 304 15 Underwater and Submerged Wireless Sensor Systems: Security Issues and Solutions 311Kübra Kalkan, Albert Levi and Sherali Zeadally 15.1 Introduction 311 15.2 Underwater Wireless Sensor Systems 312 15.3 Security Requirements, Issues and Solutions 314 15.4 Future Challenges and Research Directions 320 15.5 Summary 321 References 321 Part IV Underground and Confined Environments WSS Solutions 325 16 Achievable Throughput of Magnetic Induction Based Sensor Networks for Underground Communications 327Steven Kisseleff, Ian F. Akyildiz and Wolfgang H. Gerstacker 16.1 Introduction 327 16.2 Method 329 16.3 Results 343 16.4 Discussion 346 16.5 Summary 347 References 348 17 Agricultural Applications of Underground Wireless Sensor Systems: A Technical Review 351Saeideh Sheikhpour, Ali Mahani and Habib F. Rashvand 17.1 Introduction 351 17.2 WSN Technology in Agriculture 352 17.3 WSNs for Agriculture 357 17.4 Design Challenges of WSNs in Agriculture 359 17.5 WSN-based Applications in Agriculture 366 Part V Industrial and Other WSS Solutions 381 18 Structural Health Monitoring with WSNs 383Chaoqing Tang, Habib F. Rashvand, Gui Yun Tian, Pan Hu, Ali Imam Sunny and Haitao Wang 18.1 Introduction 383 18.2 SHM Sensing Techniques 386 18.3 WSN-enabled SHM Applications 391 18.4 Network Topology and Overlays 397 19 Error Manifestations in Industrial WSN Communications and Guidelines for Countermeasures 409Filip Barac, Mikael Gidlund, Tingting Zhang and Emiliano Sisinni 19.1 Introduction 409 19.2 Compromising Factors in IWSN Communication 410 19.3 The Statistics of Link-quality Metrics for Poor Links 414 19.4 The Statistical Properties of Bit- and Symbol-Errors 417 19.5 Guidelines for Countermeasures 419 20 A Medium-access Approach to Wireless Technologies for Reliable Communication in Aircraft 431Murat Gürsu, Mikhail Vilgelm, Eriza Fazli and Wolfgang Kellerer 20.1 Introduction 431 20.2 Reliability Assessment Framework 433 20.3 Metrics and Parameters 438 20.4 Candidate Wireless Technologies 440 20.5 Evaluation 448 21 Applications of Wireless Sensor Systems for Monitoring of Offshore Windfarms 453Deepshikha Agarwal and Nand Kishor 21.1 Introduction 453 21.2 Literature Review 454 21.3 WSNs in Windfarms 454 21.4 Simulation and Discussion 463 Summary 465 References 466 Index 469

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive look at state-of-the-art ADP theory and real-world applications This book fills a gap in the literature by providing a theoretical framework for integrating techniques from adaptive dynamic programming (ADP) and modern nonlinear control to address data-driven optimal control design challenges arising from both parametric and dynamic uncertainties. Traditional model-based approaches leave much to be desired when addressing the challenges posed by the ever-increasing complexity of real-world engineering systems. An alternative which has received much interest in recent years are biologically-inspired approaches, primarily RADP.Despite their growing popularity worldwide, until now books on ADP have focused nearly exclusively on analysis and design, with scant consideration given to how it can be applied to address robustness issues, a new challenge arising from dynamic uncertainties encountered in common engineering problems. Robust Adaptive Dynamic Programmingzeros in Table of ContentsABOUT THE AUTHORS xi PREFACE AND ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xiii ACRONYMS xvii GLOSSARY xix 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 From RL to RADP 1 1.2 Summary of Each Chapter 5 References 6 2 ADAPTIVE DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING FOR UNCERTAIN LINEAR SYSTEMS 11 2.1 Problem Formulation and Preliminaries 11 2.2 Online Policy Iteration 14 2.3 Learning Algorithms 16 2.4 Applications 24 2.5 Notes 29 References 30 3 SEMI-GLOBAL ADAPTIVE DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING 35 3.1 Problem Formulation and Preliminaries 35 3.2 Semi-Global Online Policy Iteration 38 3.3 Application 43 3.4 Notes 46 References 46 4 GLOBAL ADAPTIVE DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING FOR NONLINEAR POLYNOMIAL SYSTEMS 49 4.1 Problem Formulation and Preliminaries 49 4.2 Relaxed HJB Equation and Suboptimal Control 52 4.3 SOS-Based Policy Iteration for Polynomial Systems 55 4.4 Global ADP for Uncertain Polynomial Systems 59 4.5 Extension for Nonlinear Non-Polynomial Systems 64 4.6 Applications 70 4.7 Notes 81 References 81 5 ROBUST ADAPTIVE DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING 85 5.1 RADP for Partially Linear Composite Systems 86 5.2 RADP for Nonlinear Systems 97 5.3 Applications 103 5.4 Notes 109 References 110 6 ROBUST ADAPTIVE DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING FOR LARGE-SCALE SYSTEMS 113 6.1 Stability and Optimality for Large-Scale Systems 113 6.2 RADP for Large-Scale Systems 122 6.3 Extension for Systems with Unmatched Dynamic Uncertainties 124 6.4 Application to a Ten-Machine Power System 128 6.5 Notes 132 References 133 7 ROBUST ADAPTIVE DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING AS A THEORY OF SENSORIMOTOR CONTROL 137 7.1 ADP for Continuous-Time Stochastic Systems 138 7.2 RADP for Continuous-Time Stochastic Systems 143 7.3 Numerical Results: ADP-Based Sensorimotor Control 153 7.4 Numerical Results: RADP-Based Sensorimotor Control 165 7.5 Discussion 167 7.6 Notes 172 References 173 A BASIC CONCEPTS IN NONLINEAR SYSTEMS 177 A.1 Lyapunov Stability 177 A.2 ISS and the Small-Gain Theorem 178 B SEMIDEFINITE PROGRAMMING AND SUM-OF-SQUARES PROGRAMMING 181 B.1 SDP and SOSP 181 C PROOFS 183 C.1 Proof of Theorem 3.1.4 183 C.2 Proof of Theorem 3.2.3 186 References 188 INDEX 191

Read more less

Book SynopsisSystematically presents the input-output finite-time stability (IO-FTS) analysis of dynamical systems, covering issues of analysis, design and robustness The interest in finite-time control has continuously grown in the last fifteen years. This book systematically presents the input-output finite-time stability (IO-FTS) analysis of dynamical systems, with specific reference to linear time-varying systems and hybrid systems. It discusses analysis, design and robustness issues, and includes applications to real world engineering problems. While classical FTS has an important theoretical significance, IO-FTS is a more practical concept, which is more suitable for real engineering applications, the goal of the research on this topic in the coming years. Key features: Includes applications to real world engineering problems. Input-output finite-time stability (IO-FTS) is a practical concept, useful to study the behavior of a dynamiTable of ContentsPreface xi List of Acronyms xiii 1. Introduction 1 1.1 Finite-Time Stability (FTS) 1 1.2 Input-Output Finite-Time Stability 6 1.3 FTS and Finite-Time Convergence 10 1.4 Background 10 1.4.1 Vectors and signals 10 1.4.2 Impulsive dynamical linear systems 12 1.5 Book Organization 13 2. Linear Time-Varying Systems: IO-FTS Analysis 15 2.1 Problem Statement 15 2.2 IO-FTS for W2 Exogenous Inputs 16 2.2.1 Preliminaries 16 2.2.2 Necessary and sufficient conditions for IO-FTS for W2 exogenous inputs 22 2.2.3 Computational issues 25 2.3 A Sufficient Condition for IO-FTS for W∞ Inputs 26 2.4 Summary 29 3. Linear Time-Varying Systems: Design of IO Finite-Time Stabilizing Controllers 33 3.1 IO Finite-Time Stabilization via State Feedback 34 3.2 IO-Finite-Time Stabilization via Output Feedback 36 3.3 Summary 42 4. IO-FTS with Nonzero Initial Conditions 45 4.1 Preliminaries 45 4.2 Interpretation of the Norm of the Operator LSNZ 48 4.3 Sufficient Conditions for IO-FTS-NZIC 52 4.4 Design of IO Finite-Time Stabilizing Controllers NZIC 55 4.4.1 State feedback 56 4.4.2 Output feedback 57 4.5 Summary 58 5. IO-FTS with Constrained Control Inputs 61 5.1 Structured IO-FTS and Problem Statement 61 5.2 Structured IO-FTS Analysis 63 5.3 State Feedback Design 65 5.4 Design of an Active Suspension Control System Using Structured IO-FTS 67 5.5 Summary 70 6. Robustness Issues and the Mixed H∞/FTS Control Problem 71 6.1 Preliminaries 72 6.1.1 System setting 72 6.1.2 IO-FTS with an H∞ bound 73 6.2 Robust and Quadratic IO-FTS with an H∞ Bound 77 6.2.1 Main result 78 6.2.2 A numerical example 80 6.3 State Feedback Design 82 6.3.1 Numerical example: Cont’d 85 6.4 Case study: Quadratic IO-FTS with an H∞ Bound of the Inverted Pendulum 86 6.5 Summary 88 7. Impulsive Dynamical Linear Systems: IO-FTS Analysis 89 7.1 Background 90 7.1.1 Preliminary results for the W2 case 90 7.2 Main Results: Necessary and Sufficient Conditions for IO-FTS in Presence of W2 Signals 91 7.3 Example and Computational Issues 96 7.4 Main Result: A Sufficient Condition for IO-FTS in Presence of W∞ Signals 98 7.4.1 An illustrative example 99 7.5 Summary 100 8. Impulsive Dynamical Linear Systems: IO Finite-Time Stabilization via Dynamical Controllers 103 8.1 Problem Statement 103 8.2 IO Finite-Time Stabilization of IDLSs: W2 Signals 104 8.2.1 A numerical example 107 8.3 IO Finite-Time Stabilization of IDLSs: W∞ Signals 108 8.3.1 Illustrative example: Cont’d 110 8.4 Summary 111 9. Impulsive Dynamical Linear Systems with Uncertain Resetting Times 113 9.1 Arbitrary Switching 113 9.2 Uncertain Switching 114 9.3 Numerical Example 116 9.3.1 Known resetting times 117 9.3.2 Arbitrary switching 118 9.3.3 Uncertain switching 118 9.4 Summary 119 10. Hybrid Architecture for Deployment of Finite-Time Control Systems 121 10.1 Controller Architecture 121 10.2 Examples 123 10.2.1 Hybrid active suspension control 123 10.2.2 Lateral collision avoidance system 124 10.3 Summary 129 A. Fundamentals on Linear Time-Varying Systems 131 B. Schur Complements 137 C. Computation of Feasible Solutions to Optimizations Problems Involving DLMIs 139 D. Solving Optimization Problems Involving DLMIs using MATLAB® 145 E. Examples of Applications of IO-FTS Control Design to Real-World Systems 151 References 159 Index 167

Read more less

Book SynopsisLEDs are in the midst of revolutionizing the lighting industry Up-to-date and comprehensive coverage of light-emitting materials and devices used in solid state lighting and displaysPresents the fundamental principles underlying luminescenceIncludes inorganic and organic materials and devicesLEDs offer high efficiency, long life and mercury free lighting solutionsTable of ContentsList of Contributors xi Series Preface xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii About the Editor xix 1. Principles of Solid State Luminescence 1Adrian Kitai 1.1 Introduction to Radiation from an Accelerating Charge 1 1.2 Radiation from an Oscillating Dipole 4 1.3 Quantum Description of an Electron during a Radiation Event 5 1.4 The Exciton 7 1.5 Two-Electron Atoms 10 1.6 Molecular Excitons 16 1.7 Band-to-Band Transitions 19 1.8 Photometric Units 23 1.9 The Light Emitting Diode 28 References 30 2. Quantum Dots for Displays and Solid State Lighting 31Jesse R. Manders, Debasis Bera, Lei Qian and Paul H. Holloway 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Nanostructured Materials 34 2.3 Quantum Dots 35 2.3.1 History of Quantum Dots 36 2.3.2 Structure and Properties Relationship 36 2.3.3 Quantum Confinement Effects on Band Gap 38 2.4 Relaxation Process of Excitons 41 2.4.1 Radiative Relaxation 42 2.4.2 Nonradiative Relaxation Process 45 2.5 Blinking Effect 46 2.6 Surface Passivation 47 2.6.1 Organically Capped QDs 47 2.6.2 Inorganically Passivated QDs 48 2.7 Synthesis Processes 49 2.7.1 Top-Down Synthesis 49 2.7.2 Bottom-Up Approach 50 2.8 Optical Properties and Applications 53 2.8.1 Displays 53 2.8.2 Solid State Lighting 73 2.8.3 Biological Applications 78 2.9 Perspective 81 Acknowledgments 82 References 82 3. Color Conversion Phosphors for Light Emitting Diodes 91Jack Silver, George R. Fern and Robert Withnall 3.1 Introduction 91 3.2 Disadvantages of Using LEDs Without Color Conversion Phosphors 93 3.3 Phosphors for Converting the Color of Light Emitted by LEDs 95 3.3.1 General Considerations 95 3.3.2 Requirements of Color Conversion Phosphors 95 3.3.3 Commonly Used Activators in Color Conversion Phosphors 97 3.3.4 Strategies for Generating White Light from LEDs 97 3.3.5 Outstanding Problems with Color Conversion Phosphors for LEDs 98 3.4 Survey of the Synthesis and Properties of Some Currently Available Color Conversion Phosphors 99 3.4.1 Phosphor synthesis 99 3.4.2 Metal Oxide Based Phosphors 99 3.4.3 Metal Sulfide Based Phosphors 113 3.4.4 Metal Nitrides 117 3.4.5 Alkaline Earth Metal Oxo-Nitrides 120 3.4.6 Metal Fluoride Phosphors 121 3.5 Multi-Phosphor pcLEDs 122 3.6 Quantum Dots 123 3.7 Laser Diodes 124 3.8 Conclusions 125 Acknowledgments 125 References 126 4. Nitride and Oxynitride Phosphors for Light Emitting Diodes 135Le Wang and Rong-Jun Xie 4.1 Introduction 135 4.2 Synthesis of Nitride and Oxynitride Phosphors 138 4.2.1 Solid State Reaction Method 138 4.2.2 Gas Reduction and Nitridation 139 4.2.3 Carbothermal Reduction and Nitridation 140 4.2.4 Alloy Nitridation 140 4.2.5 Ammonothermal Synthesis 141 4.3 Photoluminescence Properties of Nitride and Oxynitride Phosphors 142 4.3.1 Luminescence Spectra of Typical Activators 142 4.4 Emerging Nitride Phosphors and Their Synthesis 165 4.4.1 Narrow-Band Red Nitride Phosphors 165 4.4.2 Narrow-Band Green Nitride Phosphors 167 4.5 Applications of Nitride Phosphors 169 4.5.1 General Lighting 169 4.5.2 LCD Backlight 172 References 173 5. Organic Light Emitting Device Materials for Displays 183Tyler Davidson-Hall, Yoshitaka Kajiyama and Hany Aziz 5.1 Introduction to OLEDs and Organic Electroluminscent Materials 184 5.2 OLED Light Emitting Materials 186 5.2.1 Neat Emitters 187 5.2.2 Guest Emitters 192 5.2.3 Aggregate-Induced Emission 201 5.3 OLED Displays 203 5.3.1 RGB Color Patterning Approaches 203 5.3.2 Display Addressing Approaches 204 5.3.3 FMM Technology 207 5.3.4 Alternative Fabrication Techniques 208 5.3.5 Outlook on OLED Display Commercialization 212 5.4 Quantum Dot Light Emitting Devices 213 5.4.1 QD Optimization by Core–Shell Morphology 214 5.4.2 Organic Charge Transport QD-LEDs 215 5.4.3 Hybrid Organic–Inorganic Charge Transport QD-LEDs 217 5.4.4 Energy Transfer Enhanced QD-LEDs 219 5.4.5 QD-LED Lifetime 220 References 220 6. White-Light Emitting Materials for Organic Light-Emitting Diode-Based Displays and Lighting 231Simone Lenk, Michael Thomschke and Sebastian Reineke 6.1 Introduction 231 6.2 White Organic Light-Emitting Diodes 233 6.3 Photometry and Radiometry 236 6.3.1 OLED Efficiencies 239 6.3.2 Color Stimulus Specification 239 6.3.3 Color Correlated Temperature 240 6.3.4 Color Rendering Index 241 6.3.5 White Light 241 6.4 Device Optics 242 6.4.1 Optical Properties of Thin Films 242 6.4.2 Optical Outcoupling 245 6.4.3 Top-Emitting OLEDs 247 6.4.4 Simulation Tools 248 6.5 Materials for Efficient White Electroluminescence 248 6.5.1 Spin Statistics for Electroluminescence 248 6.5.2 Fluorescence-Emitting Molecules 249 6.5.3 Advanced Concepts Comprising Fluorescent Emitters 251 6.5.4 Phosphorescence-Emitting Molecules 251 6.5.5 Single White-Light Emitting Phosphorescent Materials 256 6.5.6 Thermally Activated Delayed Fluorescence-Based Emitters 257 6.5.7 Phosphorescence Versus Thermally Activated Delayed Fluorescence 261 6.5.8 TADF Assisted Fluorescence (TAF) Emitters 263 6.6 Polymer Concepts 263 6.6.1 Various Concepts Involving Polymer Materials 265 6.6.2 Learning from High Performance Small Molecules for High Efficiency Polymers 267 6.7 Summary and Outlook 268 References 269 7. Light Emitting Diode Materials and Devices 273Michael R. Krames 7.1 Introduction 273 7.2 Light Emitting Diode Basics 273 7.2.1 Construction 273 7.2.2 Recombination Processes 275 7.2.3 Heterojunctions 277 7.2.4 Quantum Wells 278 7.2.5 Current Injection 278 7.2.6 Forward voltage 280 7.3 Material Systems 280 7.3.1 Ga(As,P) 280 7.3.2 Ga(As,P):N 281 7.3.3 (Al,Ga)As 282 7.3.4 (Al,Ga)InP 282 7.3.5 (Ga,In)N 283 7.3.6 White Light Generation 285 7.4 Packaging Technologies 288 7.4.1 Low Power 288 7.4.2 Mid Power 288 7.4.3 High Power 289 7.4.4 Chip-On-Board LEDs 290 7.4.5 Multi-Color LEDs 290 7.4.6 Electrostatic Discharge Protection 290 7.5 Performance 291 7.5.1 Light Extraction Efficiency 291 7.5.2 Monochromatic Performance 292 7.5.3 White-Emitting Performance 298 7.5.4 Temperature Effects 306 7.5.5 Reliability 306 References 307 8. Alternating Current Thin Film and Powder Electroluminescence 313Adrian Kitai 8.1 Introduction 313 8.2 Background of TFEL 314 8.2.1 Thick Film Dielectric EL Structure 315 8.2.2 Ceramic Sheet Dielectric EL 316 8.2.3 Sphere-Supported TFEL 316 8.3 Theory of Operation 317 8.4 Electroluminescent Phosphors 324 8.5 Thin Film Double-Insulating EL Devices 325 8.6 Current Status of TFEL 327 8.7 Background of AC Powder EL 328 8.8 Mechanism of Light Emission in AC Powder EL 329 8.9 Electroluminescence Characteristics of AC Powder EL Materials 333 8.10 Emission Spectra of AC Powder EL 334 8.11 Luminance Degradation 335 8.12 Moisture and Operating Environment 336 8.13 Current Status and Limitations of Powder EL 336 8.14 Research Directions in AC Powder EL and TFEL 336 References 337 Index 339

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffers a holistic approach to guiding product design, manufacturing, and after-sales support as the manufacturing industry transitions from a product-oriented model to service-oriented paradigm This book provides fundamental knowledge and best industry practices in reliability modelling, maintenance optimization, and service parts logistics planning. It aims to develop an integrated product-service system (IPSS) synthesizing design for reliability, performance-based maintenance, and spare parts inventory. It also presents a lifecycle reliability-inventory optimization framework where reliability, redundancy, maintenance, and service parts are jointly coordinated. Additionally, the book aims to report the latest advances in reliability growth planning, maintenance contracting and spares inventory logistics under non-stationary demand condition. Reliability Engineering and Service provides in-depth chapter coverage of topics such as: Reliability Concepts and Models; Mean and Variance Table of ContentsSeries Editor’s Foreword xxi Preface xxiii Acknowledgement xxv About the Companion Website xxvii 1 Basic Reliability Concepts and Models 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Reliability Definition and Hazard Rate 1 1.3 Mean Lifetime and Mean Residual Life 9 1.4 System Downtime and Availability 14 1.5 Discrete Random Variable for Reliability Modeling 15 1.6 Continuous Random Variable for Reliability Modeling 18 1.7 Bayesian Reliability Model 28 1.8 Markov Model and Poisson Process 30 References 34 Problems 35 2 Reliability Estimation with Uncertainty 41 2.1 Introduction 41 2.2 Reliability Block Diagram 41 2.3 Series Systems 43 2.4 Parallel Systems 47 2.5 Mixed Series and Parallel Systems 49 2.6 Systems with k-out-of-n:G Redundancy 55 2.7 Network Systems 58 2.8 Reliability Confidence Intervals 66 2.9 Reliability of Multistate Systems 68 2.10 Reliability Importance 71 References 78 Problems 81 3 Design and Optimization for Reliability 89 3.1 Introduction 89 3.2 Lifecycle Reliability Optimization 89 3.3 Reliability and Redundancy Allocation 95 3.4 Multiobjective Reliability–Redundancy Allocation 103 3.5 Failure-in-Time Based Design 108 3.6 Failure Rate Considering Uncertainty 115 3.7 Fault-Tree Method 118 3.8 Failure Mode, Effect, and Criticality Analysis 121 3.9 Case Study: Reliability Design for Six Sigma 123 References 127 Problems 129 4 Reliability Growth Planning 133 4.1 Introduction 133 4.2 Classification of Failures 133 4.3 Failure Mode Types 136 4.4 No Fault Found (NFF) Failures 138 4.5 Corrective Action Effectiveness 141 4.6 Reliability Growth Model 145 4.7 Reliability Growth and Demonstration Test 154 4.8 Lifecycle Reliability Growth Planning 159 4.9 Case Study 164 References 166 Problems 169 5 Accelerated Stress Testing and Economics 171 5.1 Introduction 171 5.2 Design of Accelerated Stress Test 171 5.3 Scale Acceleration Model and Usage Rate 178 5.4 Arrhenius Model 184 5.5 Eyring Model and Power Law Model 187 5.6 Semiparametric Acceleration Models 190 5.7 Highly Accelerated Stress Screening Testing 195 5.8 A Case Study for HASS Project 199 References 204 Problems 206 6 Renewal Theory and Superimposed Renewal 211 6.1 Introduction 211 6.2 Renewal Integral Equation 211 6.3 Exponential and Erlang Renewal 219 6.4 Generalized Exponential Renewal 221 6.5 Weibull Renewal with Decreasing Failure Rate 226 6.6 Weibull Renewal with Increasing Failure Rate 230 6.7 Renewal under Deterministic Fleet Expansion 239 6.8 Renewal under Stochastic Fleet Expansion 245 6.9 Case Study 248 References 252 Problems 255 7 Performance-Based Maintenance 259 7.1 Introduction 259 7.2 Corrective Maintenance 259 7.3 Preventive Maintenance 262 7.4 Condition-Based Maintenance 267 7.5 Inverse Gaussian Degradation Process 275 7.6 Non-Stationary Gaussian Degradation Process 278 7.7 Performance-Based Maintenance 285 7.8 Contracting for Performance-Based Logistics 293 7.9 Case Study – RUL Prediction of Electronics Equipment 295 Appendix 298 References 299 Problems 304 8 Warranty Models and Services 309 8.1 Introduction 309 8.2 Warranty Concept and Its Roles 309 8.3 Warranty Policy for Non-repairable Product 312 8.4 Warranty Models for Repairable Products 321 8.5 Warranty Service for Variable Installed Base 325 8.6 Warranty Service under Reliability Growth 329 8.7 Other Warranty Services 335 8.8 Case Study: Design for Warranty 340 References 343 Problems 346 9 Basic Spare Parts Inventory Models 349 9.1 Introduction 349 9.2 Overview of Inventory Model 349 9.3 Deterministic EOQ Model 352 9.4 The News vendor Model 357 9.5 The (q, r) Inventory System under Continuous Review 361 9.6 The (s, S, T) Policy under Periodic Review 368 9.7 Basic Supply Chain Systems 372 9.8 Spare Parts Demand Forecasting 377 References 383 Problems 387 10 Repairable Inventory System 391 10.1 Introduction 391 10.2 Characteristics of Repairable Inventory Systems 391 10.3 Single-Echelon Inventory with Uncapacitated Repair 396 10.4 Single-Echelon Inventory with Capacitated Repair 402 10.5 Repairable Inventory for a Finite Fleet Size 405 10.6 Single-Echelon Inventory with Emergency Repair 408 10.7 Repairable Inventory Planning under Fleet Expansion 412 10.8 Multi-echelon, Multi-item Repairable Inventory 417 10.9 Case Study: Teradyne’s Spare Parts Supply Chain 424 References 432 Problems 434 11 Reliability and Service Integration 439 11.1 Introduction 439 11.2 The Rise of Product-Service System 439 11.3 Allocation of Reliability and Inventory for a Static Fleet 444 11.4 Allocation of Reliability and Inventory under Fleet Expansion 451 11.5 Joint Allocation of Maintenance, Inventory, and Repair 458 11.6 Case Study: Supporting Wind Generation Using PBC 467 Appendix 470 References 475 Problems 479 12 Resilience Engineering and Management 481 12.1 Introduction 481 12.2 Resilience Concept and Measures 481 12.3 Disaster Resilience Models of Power Grid 489 12.4 Prevention, Survivability, and Recovery 500 12.5 Variable Generation System Model 508 12.6 Case Study: Design for Resilient Distribution Systems 512 References 516 Problems 520 Index 525

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe recent widespread use of mobile Internet together with the advent of numerous smart applications has led to the explosive growth of the mobile data traffic in the last few years. This momentum of mobile traffic will continue due to the emerging needs of connecting people, machines, and applications through mobile infrastructure. As a result, the current and projected dramatic growth of mobile data traffic necessitates the development of fifth-generation (5G) mobile communications technology. As a result, there is significant interest in the development of innovative backhaul and fronthaul solutions for ultra-dense heterogeneous networks. This book brings together mobile stakeholders from academia and industry to identify and promote technical challenges and recent results related to smart backhaul/fronthaul research for future communication system such as 5G. Moreover, it presents a comprehensive analysis on different types of backhaul/fronthaul technology and topology. ITable of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii 1 Introduction: The Communication Haul Challenge 1 Kazi Mohammed Saidul Huq and Jonathan Rodriguez 1.1 Introduction 1 References 7 2 A C‐RAN Approach for 5G Applications 9 Kazi Mohammed Saidul Huq, Shahid Mumtaz and Jonathan Rodriguez 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 From Wired to Wireless Backhaul/Fronthaul Technologies 11 2.3 Architecture for Coordinated Systems According to Baseline 3GPP 12 2.4 Reference Architecture for C‐RAN 15 2.4.1 System Architecture for Fronthaul‐based C‐RAN 15 2.4.2 Cloud Resource Optimizer 16 2.5 Potential Applications for C‐RAN‐based Mobile Systems 20 2.5.1 Virtualization of D2D Services 20 2.5.2 Numerical Analysis 21 2.6 Conclusion 24 References 27 3 Backhauling 5G Small Cells with Massive‐MIMO‐Enabled mmWave Communication 29 Ummy Habiba, Hina Tabassum and Ekram Hossain 3.1 Introduction 29 3.2 Existing Wireless Backhauling Solutions for 5G Small Cells 31 3.3 Fundamentals of mmWave and Massive MIMO Technologies 32 3.3.1 MmWave Communication 32 3.3.2 MU‐MIMO with Large Antenna Arrays 33 3.4 MmWave Backhauling: State of the Art and Research Issues 34 3.4.1 LOS mmWave Backhauling 35 3.4.2 NLOS mmWave Backhauling 36 3.4.3 Research Challenges for Backhauling in 5G Networks 37 3.5 Case Study: Massive‐MIMO‐based mmWave Backhauling System 40 3.5.1 System Model 41 3.5.2 Maximizing User Rate 44 3.5.3 Matching Theory for User Association 45 3.5.4 Numerical Results 48 3.6 Conclusion 51 Acknowledgement 51 References 51 4 Fronthaul for a Flexible Centralization in Cloud Radio Access Networks 55 Jens Bartelt, Dirk Wübben, Peter Rost, Johannes Lessmann and Gerhard Fettweis 4.1 Introduction 55 4.2 Radio Access Network Architecture 57 4.3 Functional Split Options 58 4.4 Requirements of Flexible Functional Splits 60 4.4.1 Split A 61 4.4.2 Split B 62 4.4.3 Split C 63 4.4.4 Split D 64 4.4.5 Summary and Examples 64 4.5 Statistical Multiplexing in a Flexibly Centralized Network 67 4.5.1 Distribution of FH Data Rate per Base Station 67 4.5.2 Outage Rate 68 4.5.3 Statistical Multiplexing on Aggregation Links 69 4.6 Convergence of Fronthaul and Backhaul Technologies 73 4.6.1 Physical Layer Technologies 73 4.6.2 Data/MAC Layer Technologies 75 4.6.3 Network Layer Technologies 77 4.6.4 Control and Management Plane 78 4.7 Enablers of a Flexible Functional Split 78 4.8 Summary 80 Acknowledgement 82 References 82 5 Analysis and Optimization for Heterogeneous Backhaul Technologies 85 Gongzheng Zhang, Tony Q. S. Quek, Marios Kountouris, Aiping Huang and Hangguan Shan 5.1 Introduction 85 5.2 Backhaul Model 88 5.2.1 Network Model 88 5.2.2 Delay Model 89 5.2.3 Cost Model 92 5.3 Backhaul Packet Delay Analysis 93 5.3.1 Mean Backhaul Packet Delay 93 5.3.2 Delay‐limited Success Probability 95 5.3.3 Performance Evaluation 97 5.4 Backhaul Deployment Cost Analysis 101 5.5 Backhaul‐aware BS Association Policy 103 5.5.1 Mean Network Packet Delay 103 5.5.2 BS Association Policy 107 5.5.3 Numerical Results 109 5.6 Conclusions 115 References 115 6 Dynamic Enhanced Inter‐cell Interference Coordination Strategy with Quality of Service Guarantees for Heterogeneous Networks 119 Wei‐Sheng Lai, Tsung‐Hui Chang, Kuan‐Hsuan Yeh and Ta‐Sung Lee 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 System Model and Problem Statement 121 6.2.1 Network Environments 121 6.2.2 QoS Constraint 124 6.2.3 Problem Statements 125 6.3 Dynamic Interference Coordination Strategy 126 6.3.1 SMDP Analysis 126 6.3.2 Admission Control with a QoS Constraint 128 6.3.3 Joint Dynamic eICIC and Admission Control for Sum Rate Maximization 129 6.3.4 Joint Dynamic eICIC and Admission Control for Proportional Fairness Maximization 130 6.4 Numerical Results 132 6.5 Conclusion 140 References 140 7 Cell Selection for Joint Optimization of the Radio Access and Backhaul in Heterogeneous Cellular Networks 143 Antonio De Domenico, Valentin Savin and Dimitri Ktenas 7.1 Introduction 143 7.2 System Model and Problem Statement 145 7.2.1 Joint RAN/BH Capacity 146 7.2.2 Problem Statement 151 7.3 Proposed Solutions 151 7.3.1 Evolve 151 7.3.2 Relax 154 7.3.3 Practical Implementation of the Proposed Algorithms 156 7.4 Simulation Results 157 7.5 Conclusion 165 References 165 8 Multiband and Multichannel Aggregation for High‐speed Wireless Backhaul: Challenges and Solutions 167 Xiaojing Huang 8.1 Introduction 167 8.2 Spectrum for Wireless Backhaul 170 8.2.1 Microwave Band and Channel Allocation 170 8.2.2 Millimetre‐wave Band and Usage Trend 171 8.3 Multiband and Multichannel Aggregation 172 8.3.1 Band and Channel Aggregation Overview 172 8.3.2 System Architecture 174 8.3.3 Subband Aggregation and Implementations 177 8.3.4 Full SDR Approach for Band and Channel Aggregation 183 8.4 Spectrally Efficient Channel Aggregation 185 8.4.1 System Overview 185 8.4.2 Frequency‐domain Multiplexing Without a Guard Band 186 8.4.3 Digital IF Signal Generation and Reception 188 8.4.4 High-performance OFDM Transmission 188 8.5 Practical System Examples 189 8.5.1 CSIRO Ngara Backhaul 190 8.5.2 CSIRO High‐speed E‐band Systems 191 8.6 Conclusions 194 References 194 9 Security Challenges for Cloud Radio Access Networks 195 Victor Sucasas, Georgios Mantas and Jonathan Rodriguez 9.1 Introduction 195 9.2 Overview of C‐RAN Architecture 196 9.3 Intrusion Attacks in the C‐RAN Environment 197 9.3.1 Entry Points for Intrusion Attacks 198 9.3.2 Technical Challenges for Intrusion Detection Counter‐mechanisms 201 9.3.3 Insider Attacks 203 9.4 Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) Attacks Against C‐RAN 205 9.4.1 DDoS Attacks Using Signalling Amplification 206 9.4.2 DDoS Attacks Against External Entities Over the Mobile Network 207 9.4.3 DDoS Attacks from External Compromised IP Networks Over the Mobile Network 208 9.5 Conclusions 209 References 209 Index 213

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to the theory, methodology, and development for modeling systems of systems Modeling and Managing Interdependent Complex Systems of Systems examines the complexity of, and the risk to, emergent interconnected and interdependent complex systems of systems in the natural and the constructed environment, and in its critical infrastructures. For systems modelers, this book focuses on what constitutes complexity and how to understand, model and manage it.Previous modeling methods for complex systems of systems were aimed at developing theory and methodologies for uncoupling the interdependencies and interconnections that characterize them. In this book, the author extends the above by utilizing public- and private- sector case studies; identifies, explores, and exploits the core of interdependencies; and seeks to understand their essence via the states of the system, and their dominant contributions to the complexity of systems of systems. The book proposes a reevalTable of ContentsForeword vii Acknowledgments xv 1 Modeling and Managing Interdependent Complex Systems of Systems:Fundamentals, Theory and Methodology 1 2 Modeling, Decomposition, and Multilevel Coordination of Complex Systems of Systems 51 3 Hierarchical Holographic Modeling and Multilevel Coordination of Complex Systems of Systems 111 4 Modeling Complex Systems of Systems with Phantom System Models 141 5 Complex Systems of Systems: Multiple Goals and Objectives 183 6 Hierarchical Coordinated Bayesian Modeling of Complex Systems of Systems 229 7 Hierarchical Multiobjective Modeling and Decision Making for Complex Systems of Systems 279 8 Modeling Economic Interdependencies among Complex Systems of Systems 363 9 Guiding Principles for Modeling and Managing Complex Systems of Systems 411 10 Modeling Cyber–Physical Complex Systems of Systems: Four Case Studies 447 11 Global Supply Chain as Complex Systems of Systems 527 12 Understanding and Managing the Organizational Dimension of Complex Systems of Systems 559 13 Software Engineering: The Driver of Cyber–Physical Complex Systems of Systems 607 14 Infrastructure Preparedness for Communities as Complex Systems of Systems 647 15 Modeling Safety of Transportation Complex Systems of Systems via Fault Trees 695 Appendix 739 Author Index 773 Subject Index 779

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to the fundamental concepts, designs, and implementation schemes, performance considerations, and applications of arithmetic circuits for DSP Arithmetic Circuits for DSP Applications is a complete resource on arithmetic circuits for digital signal processing (DSP). It covers the key concepts, designs and developments of different types of arithmetic circuits, which can be used for improving the efficiency of implementation of a multitude of DSP applications. Each chapter includes various applications of the respective class of arithmetic circuits along with information on the future scope of research. Written for students, engineers, and researchers in electrical and computer engineering, this comprehensive text offers a clear understanding of different types of arithmetic circuits used for digital signal processing applications. The text includes contributions from noted researchers on a wide range of topics, including a review of circuits used in implementingTable of ContentsPreface xiii About the Editors xvii 1 Basic Arithmetic Circuits 1 Oscar Gustafsson and Lars Wanhammar 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Addition and Subtraction 1 1.2.1 Ripple-Carry Addition 2 1.2.2 Bit-Serial Addition and Subtraction 3 1.2.3 Digit-Serial Addition and Subtraction 4 1.3 Multiplication 4 1.3.1 Partial Product Generation 5 1.3.2 Avoiding Sign-Extension (the Baugh and Wooley Method) 6 1.3.3 Reducing the Number of Partial Products 6 1.3.4 Reducing the Number of Columns 8 1.3.5 Accumulation Structures 8 1.3.6 Serial/Parallel Multiplication 11 1.4 Sum-of-Products Circuits 15 1.4.1 SOP Computation 17 1.4.2 Linear-Phase FIR Filters 18 1.4.3 Polynomial Evaluation (Horner's Method) 18 1.4.4 Multiple-Wordlength SOP 18 1.5 Squaring 19 1.5.1 Parallel Squarers 19 1.5.2 Serial Squarers 21 1.5.3 Multiplication Through Squaring 23 1.6 Complex Multiplication 24 1.6.1 Complex Multiplication Using Real Multipliers 24 1.6.2 Lifting-Based Complex Multipliers 25 1.7 Special Functions 26 1.7.1 Square Root Computation 26 1.7.2 Polynomial and Piecewise Polynomial Approximations 28 2 Shift-Add Circuits for Constant Multiplications 33 Parmod Kumar Meher, C.-H. Chang, Oscar Gustafsson, A.P. Vinod, and M. Faust 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 Representation of Constants 36 2.3 Single Constant Multiplication 40 2.3.1 Direct Simplification from a Given Number Representation 40 2.3.2 Simplification by Redundant Signed Digit Representation 41 2.3.3 Simplification by Adder Graph Approach 41 2.3.4 State of the Art in SCM 43 2.4 Algorithms for Multiple Constant Multiplications 43 2.4.1 MCM for FIR Digital Filter and Basic Considerations 43 2.4.2 The Adder Graph Approach 45 2.4.3 Common Subexpression Elimination Algorithms 49 2.4.4 Difference Algorithms 56 2.4.5 Reconfigurable and Time-MultiplexedMultiple Constant Multiplications 56 2.5 Optimization Schemes and Optimal Algorithms 58 2.5.1 Optimal Subexpression Sharing 58 2.5.2 Representation Independent Formulations 60 2.6 Applications 62 2.6.1 Implementation of FIR Digital Filters and Filter Banks 62 2.6.2 Implementation of Sinusoidal and Other Linear Transforms 63 2.6.3 Other Applications 63 2.7 Pitfalls and Scope for Future Work 64 2.7.1 Selection of Figure of Merit 64 2.7.2 Benchmark Suites for Algorithm Evaluation 65 2.7.3 FPGA-Oriented Design of Algorithms and Architectures 65 2.8 Conclusions 66 3 DA-Based Circuits for Inner-Product Computation 77 Mahesh Mehendale, Mohit Sharma, and Pramod Kumar Meher 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Mathematical Foundation and Concepts 78 3.3 Techniques for Area Optimization of DA-Based Implementations 81 3.3.1 Offset Binary Coding 81 3.3.2 Adder-Based DA 85 3.3.3 Coefficient Partitioning 85 3.3.4 Exploiting Coefficient Symmetry 87 3.3.5 LUT Implementation Optimization 88 3.3.6 Adder-Based DA Implementation with Single Adder 90 3.3.7 LUT Optimization for Fixed Coefficients 90 3.3.8 Inner-Product with Data and Coefficients Represented as Complex Numbers 92 3.4 Techniques for Performance Optimization of DA-Based Implementations 93 3.4.1 Two-Bits-at-a-Time (2-BAAT) Access 93 3.4.2 Coefficient Distribution over Data 93 3.4.3 RNS-Based Implementation 95 3.5 Techniques for Low Power and Reconfigurable Realization of DA-Based Implementations 98 3.5.1 Adder-Based DA with Fixed Coefficients 99 3.5.2 Eliminating Redundant LUT Accesses and Additions 100 3.5.3 Using Zero-Detection to Reduce LUT Accesses and Additions 102 3.5.4 Nega-Binary Coding for Reducing Input Toggles and LUT Look-Ups 103 3.5.5 Accuracy versus Power Tradeoff 107 3.5.6 Reconfigurable DA-Based Implementations 108 3.6 Conclusion 108 4 Table-Based Circuits for DSP Applications 113 Pramod Kumar Meher and Shen-Fu Hsiao 4.1 Introduction 113 4.2 LUT Design for Implementation of Boolean Function 115 4.3 Lookup Table Design for Constant Multiplication 117 4.3.1 Lookup Table Optimizations for Constant Multiplication 117 4.3.2 Implementation of LUT-Multiplier using APC for L = 5 122 4.3.3 Implementation of Optimized LUT using OMS Technique 123 4.3.4 Optimized LUT Design for Signed and Unsigned Operands 124 4.3.5 Input Operand Decomposition for Large InputWidth 126 4.4 Evaluation of Elementary Arithmetic Functions 127 4.4.1 Piecewise Polynomial Approximation (PPA) Approach for Function Evaluation 128 4.4.2 Table-Addition (TA) Approach for Function Evaluation 131 4.5 Applications 134 4.5.1 LUT-Based Implementation of Cyclic Convolution and Orthogonal Transforms 135 4.5.2 LUT-Based Evaluation of Reciprocals and Division Operation 136 4.5.3 LUT-Based Design for Evaluation of Sigmoid Function 138 4.6 Summary 143 5 CORDIC Circuits 149 Pramod Kumar Meher, Javier Valls, Tso-Bing Juang, K. Sridharan, and Koushik Maharatna 5.1 Introduction 149 5.2 Basic CORDIC Techniques 151 5.2.1 The CORDIC Algorithm 151 5.2.2 Generalization of the CORDIC Algorithm 154 5.2.3 Multidimensional CORDIC 155 5.3 Advanced CORDIC Algorithms and Architectures 156 5.3.1 High-Radix CORDIC Algorithm 157 5.3.2 Angle Recoding Methods 158 5.3.3 Hybrid or Coarse-Fine Rotation CORDIC 161 5.3.4 Redundant Number-Based CORDIC Implementation 164 5.3.5 Pipelined CORDIC Architecture 166 5.3.6 Differential CORDIC Algorithm 167 5.4 Scaling, Quantization, and Accuracy Issues 168 5.4.1 Implementation of Mixed-Scaling Rotation 168 5.4.2 Low-Complexity Scaling 169 5.4.3 Quantization and Numerical Accuracy 170 5.4.4 Area-Delay-Accuracy Trade-off 170 5.5 Applications of CORDIC 172 5.5.1 Matrix Computation 172 5.5.2 Signal Processing and Image Processing Applications 173 5.5.3 Applications to Communication 174 5.5.4 Applications of CORDIC to Robotics and Graphics 176 5.6 Conclusions 178 6 RNS-Based Arithmetic Circuits and Applications 186 P.V. Ananda Mohan 6.1 Introduction 186 6.2 Modulo Addition and Subtraction 189 6.2.1 Modulo (2n− 1) Adders 189 6.2.2 Modulo (2n + 1) Adders 191 6.3 Modulo Multiplication and Modulo Squaring 193 6.3.1 Multipliers for General Moduli 194 6.3.2 Multipliers mod (2n − 1) 195 6.3.3 Multipliers mod (2n + 1) 196 6.3.4 Modulo Squarers 199 6.4 Forward (binary to RNS) Conversion 200 6.5 RNS to Binary Conversion 203 6.5.1 CRT-Based RNS to Binary Conversion 203 6.5.2 Mixed Radix Conversion 206 6.5.3 RNS to Binary conversion using New CRT 207 6.5.4 RNS to Binary conversion using Core Function 208 6.6 Scaling and Base Extension 210 6.7 Magnitude Comparison and Sign Detection 213 6.8 Error Correction and Detection 214 6.9 Applications of RNS 216 6.9.1 FIR Filters 216 6.9.2 RNS in Cryptography 218 6.9.3 RNS in Digital Communication Systems 225 7 Logarithmic Number System 237 Vassilis Paliouras and Thanos Stouraitis 7.1 Introduction 237 7.1.1 The Logarithmic Number System 237 7.1.2 Organization of the Chapter 237 7.2 Basics of LNS Representation 238 7.2.1 LNS and Equivalence to Linear Representation 238 7.3 Fundamental Arithmetic Operations 240 7.3.1 Multiplication, Division, Roots, and Powers 240 7.3.2 Addition and Subtraction 241 7.4 Forward and Inverse Conversion 249 7.5 Complex Arithmetic in LNS 250 7.6 LNS Processors 251 7.6.1 A VLIW LNS Processor 252 7.7 LNS for Low-Power Dissipation 257 7.7.1 Impact of LNS Encoding on Signal Activity 258 7.7.2 Power Dissipation and LNS Architecture 261 7.8 Applications 265 7.8.1 Signal Processing and Communications 265 7.8.2 Video Processing 267 7.8.3 Graphics 268 7.9 Conclusions 268 8 Redundant Number System-Based Arithmetic Circuits 273 G. Jaberipur 8.1 Introduction 273 8.1.1 Introductory Definitions and Examples 274 8.2 Fundamentals of Redundant Number Systems 278 8.2.1 Redundant Digit Sets 278 8.3 Redundant Number Systems 280 8.3.1 Constant Time Addition 281 8.3.2 Carry-Save Addition 283 8.3.3 Borrow Free Subtraction 285 8.4 Basic Arithmetic Circuits for Redundant Number Systems 287 8.4.1 Circuit Realization of Carry-Free Adders 287 8.4.2 Fast Maximally Redundant Carry-Free Adders 288 8.4.3 Carry-Free Addition of Symmetric Maximally Redundant Numbers 290 8.4.4 Addition and Subtraction of Stored-Carry Encoded Redundant Operands 292 8.5 Binary to Redundant Conversion and the Reverse 297 8.5.1 Binary to MRSD Conversion and the Reverse 297 8.5.2 Binary to Stored Unibit Conversion and the Reverse 298 8.6 Special Arithmetic Circuits for Redundant Number Systems 299 8.6.1 Radix-2h MRSD Arithmetic Shifts 299 8.6.2 Stored Unibit Arithmetic Shifts 300 8.6.3 Apparent Overflow 303 8.7 Applications 303 8.7.1 Redundant Representation of Partial Products 305 8.7.2 Recoding the Multiplier to a Redundant Representation 305 8.7.3 Use of Redundant Number Systems in Digit Recurrence Algorithms 306 8.7.4 Transcendental Functions and Redundant Number Systems 306 8.7.5 RDNS and Fused Multiply-Add Operation 307 8.7.6 RDNS and Floating Point Arithmetic 307 8.7.7 RDNS and RNS Arithmetic 308 8.8 Summary and Further Reading 308 Index 313

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn Engineering theory and applications, we think and operate in terms of logics and models with some acceptable and reasonable assumptions. The present text is aimed at providing modelling and analysis techniques for the evaluation of reliability measures (2-terminal, all-terminal, k-terminal reliability) for systems whose structure can be described in the form of a probabilistic graph. Among the several approaches of network reliability evaluation, the multiple-variable-inversion sum-of-disjoint product approach finds a well-deserved niche as it provides the reliability or unreliability expression in a most efficient and compact manner. However, it does require an efficiently enumerated minimal inputs (minimal path, spanning tree, minimal k-trees, minimal cut, minimal global-cut, minimal k-cut) depending on the desired reliability. The present book covers these two aspects in detail through the descriptions of several algorithms devised by the reliability fraternity and explained tTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgements xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Graph Theory: A Tool for Reliability Evaluation 2 1.1.1 Undirected Networks 4 1.1.2 Directed Networks 4 1.1.3 Mixed Networks 5 1.2 Large versus Complex System 7 1.2.1 Large System 7 1.2.2 Complex System 7 1.2.3 Large and Complex System 9 1.3 Network Reliability Measures: Deterministic versus Probabilistic 9 1.3.1 Terminal-pair Reliability Measure 11 1.3.2 All-Terminal Reliability Measure 12 1.3.3 k-terminal Reliability Measure 12 1.4 Common Assumptions 12 1.5 Approaches for NSP Network Reliability Evaluation 13 1.5.1 Non Path or Cut Sets Based Techniques 14 1.5.1.1 State Enumeration Technique 14 1.5.1.2 Network Decomposition Technique 18 1.5.1.3 Probability Transformation Technique 19 1.5.1.4 Binary Decision Diagram Based Technique 20 1.5.2 Minimal POC Based Techniques 21 1.5.2.1 Inclusion-Exclusion Technique 21 1.5.2.2 Monte-Carlo Simulation Based Technique 22 1.5.2.3 Domination Theory Based Technique 23 1.5.2.4 Reliability Bounds Technique 24 1.5.2.5 Sum-of-disjoint Product Based Technique 25 Exercises 26 References 27 2 Reliability Evaluation of General SP-Networks 31 2.1 Notation and Assumptions 33 2.2 Unit-Reliability and Failure Models 34 2.2.1 Constant-Hazard Model 35 2.2.2 Linear-Hazard Model 35 2.2.3 Weibull-Hazard Model 35 2.2.4 Extreme Value-Hazard Model 36 2.3 Module Representation of Reliability Graphs 36 2.3.1 Single-Unit Module 36 2.3.2 Multi-Unit Module 36 2.3.2.1 Series Model 37 2.3.2.2 Parallel Model 38 2.3.2.3 Standby Model 39 2.3.2.4 k-out-of-m Model 41 2.4 Misra Matrix Method 44 2.5 Algorithm 45 2.6 Implementation and Documentation 55 2.6.1 Main Module 55 2.6.2 Function formCmat 56 2.6.3 Function processCmat 58 2.6.4 Function systDetail 58 2.7 Remarks 58 Exercises 59 References 60 3 Path Sets Enumeration 63 3.1 Enumeration of (s, f) Connected Path Sets 64 3.1.1 Method 1: Using Powers of Connection matrix 65 3.1.2 Method 2: Traversing Through Connection Matrix 67 3.1.3 Method 3: Using Incidence Matrix 69 3.2 Enumeration of All-node Connected Path Sets: Spanning Tree 73 3.2.1 Method 1: Using the Cartesian Product of the Node Cut Sets 74 3.2.2 Method 2: Using the Incidence Matrix 75 3.3 Number of Spanning Trees 84 3.3.1 Matrix Tree Theorem 84 3.4 Enumeration of k-node Connected Path Sets: k-Trees 86 Appendix 3A.1: Enumeration of Path Sets Algorithm, Illustration and Matlab® Code Notation 88 Appendix 3A.2: Sample program I/O for Figure 3A.1 Contents ix 97 Exercises 100 References 101 4 Cut Sets Enumeration 103 4.1 (s, f) Cut Sets Enumeration 104 4.1.1 Method 1: Using Connection Matrix 104 4.1.2 Method 2: Using Minimal Path Sets 106 4.1.2.1 Using Set-theoretic Product of Path Sets 106 4.1.2.2 Using Path Sets Matrix 107 4.1.2.3 Using Path Sets Inversion 108 4.2 Global Cut Sets Enumeration 109 4.2.1 Testing Connectivity of a Specified Node Set 110 4.2.1.1 Node Fusion Technique 110 4.2.2 Generation of Node Set Combination from its Lower Order Node-Sets 112 4.2.3 Checking Validity of a Node Set 112 4.2.4 Formation of Cutset 113 4.2.5 General Algorithm to Enumerate Minimal Cutsets for a Reliability Measure 113 Appendix 4A.1: Node Fusion Technique and Generation of Node Set Combination 123 Appendix 4A.2: Code for Checking Validity of a Node Set and Converting Node-Sets into Link Cutsets 124 Appendix 4A.3: Sample Program I/O for Network Graph of Figure 4.3 126 Appendix 4A.4: g-Terminal Reliability Evaluation Program Sample I/O for Example of Figure 4.3 128 Appendix 4A.5: Results are provided by the program (output of g-reliability expression for the Figure 4.3 for method HM-1 of (Chaturvedi & Misra, 2002). 129 Exercises 130 References 131 5 Reliability Evaluation using MVI Techniques 133 5.1 Notation and Assumptions 134 5.2 Preliminaries 135 5.2.1 Definitions 135 5.3 MVI Methods 137 5.3.1 Method 1: KDH88 137 5.3.2 Method 2: CAREL 139 5.3.3 Comparison between KDH88 and CAREL 144 5.4 Method 3: Hybrid Methods-HM 147 5.4.1 An Alternative Representation of Path or Cut Sets 147 5.4.2 Hybrid Methods (HM) 149 5.4.2.1 HM-1 149 5.4.2.2 HM-2 149 5.5 Applying HM-1 and HM-2 149 5.5.1 Applying HM-1 150 5.5.2 Applying HM-2 151 5.5.3 Complete Solution to Example 5.2 152 5.6 Global and k-terminal Reliability with SDP Approach 159 5.6.1 All-terminal Reliability Evaluation 161 5.6.2 Characteristics of a g-reliability Expression 164 5.6.3 k-terminal Reliability Evaluation 164 5.6.4 Number of k-trees 167 5.7 Unreliability with SDP Approach 169 5.8 Some Suggested Guidelines 171 5.8.1 Directed Network Graph 171 5.8.2 Undirected Network Graph 172 Appendix 5A.1: Program output of g-reliability expression for the Figure 5.1(b). 173 Appendix 5A.2: Program output of k-terminal reliability expression for Figure 5.1(b). 179 Appendix 5A.3: Program output of k-terminal reliability expression for Figure 5.1(b). 181 Exercises 183 References 185 6 Unified Framework and Capacitated Network Reliability 187 6.1 The Unified Framework 188 6.2 Capacitated Reliability Measure: An Introduction 189 6.2.1 Some Related Definitions 191 6.2.1.1 Minimal Cutset and Subset Cut Group 191 6.2.1.2 External Redundant Subset Cut Group 191 6.2.1.3 Internal Redundant Subset Cut Group 192 6.2.1.4 Invalid Cut Set Cut Group 192 6.2.1.5 Description of the Algorithm 192 6.3 Algorithm Description 192 6.3.1 Equations: The idea 193 6.3.2 Is Cut itself a SCG or does it need its Subsets Enumeration? 194 6.3.3 What Initial Order? 194 6.3.4 Efficient enumeration of particular order SCG of a minimal cut 197 6.3.5 External or Both External/ Internal Redundancy Removal 197 6.3.6 Internal Redundancy Removal 199 6.4 The CRR Evaluation Algorithm 200 6.5 A Complete Example 202 6.6 Experimental Results, Comparison and Discussion 207 References 212 7 A LAN and Water Distribution Network: Case Studies 213 7.1 Case Study-I: IIT Kharagpur LAN Network 213 7.1.1 k-Terminal and global reliability evaluation for hostel area of IIT Kharagpur LAN 215 7.1.2 All terminal reliability evaluation for academic area of LAN 215 7.1.3 All terminal reliability evaluation for IIT Kharagpur LAN network 215 7.2 Case Study-II: Real-Type of Large Size Unsaturated Water Distribution Networks 219 References 222 Epilogue 223 References 225 Bibliography 227 Index 235

Read more less

Book SynopsisEnergy Production Systems Engineering presents IEEE, Electrical Apparatus Service Association (EASA), and International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards of engineering systems and equipment in utility electric generation stations.Table of ContentsLIST OF FIGURES xiii LIST OF TABLES xxi LIST OF ANNEX xxv ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xxvii INTRODUCTION xxix CHAPTER 1 ELECTRICAL SAFETY 1 Installation Safety Requirements—General Industry (NEC®) 5 Installation Safety Requirements—Special Industry – Utility (NESC) 7 Safe Work Practice Requirements 11 Electrical PPE 15 ARC Flash Analysis Utilizing NFPA 70E Tables 21 Hazardous/Classified Areas 25 Classified Area – “Class” System 26 Classified Area – “Zone” System 32 Boiler Control and Burner Management 34 Glossary of Terms 37 Problems 39 Recommended Reading 41 CHAPTER 2 BASIC THERMAL CYCLES 43 Steam Thermodynamic Analysis Fundamentals 43 Pressure, Temperature, and Volume Relationships 60 Heat Rate 70 Gas Thermodynamic Analysis Fundamentals 72 Glossary of Terms 77 Problems 78 Recommended Reading 81 CHAPTER 3 BOILERS AND STEAM GENERATORS 83 Air Preheater 95 Cooling Towers 98 Glossary of Terms 102 Problems 104 Recommended Reading 105 CHAPTER 4 FOSSIL FUELS AND THE BASIC COMBUSTION PROCESS 107 Combustible Fuel 107 Oxygen 108 Fossil Fuels 115 Natural Gas 118 Fuel Oil 119 Glossary of Terms 120 Problems 122 Recommended Reading 122 CHAPTER 5 HYDRAULIC TURBINES 123 Hydraulic Reaction Turbines 127 Hydraulic Impulse Turbines 128 Kinetic Energy Hydraulic Turbines 128 Glossary of Terms 129 Problems 130 Recommended Reading 130 CHAPTER 6 NUCLEAR POWER 131 Boiling Water Reactor 137 Pressurized Water Reactor 139 Pressurized Heavy Water Reactor 142 Pressure Tube Graphite Reactor 142 High Temperature Gas-Cooled Reactor 143 Liquid Metal Fast Breeder Reactor 143 Nuclear Power Safety 143 Units of Activity 147 Units of Exposure 148 Glossary of Terms 151 Problems 154 Recommended Reading 157 CHAPTER 7 CONVEYORS 159 Belt Conveyor 161 Pneumatic Conveyor Systems 171 Rotary Screw Conveyor System 171 Vibrating Conveyor System 171 Conveyor Safety 172 Glossary of Terms 172 Problems 173 Recommended Reading 174 CHAPTER 8 FANS 175 Centrifugal Fan (Radial Airflow) 176 Axial Fan (Axial Airflow) 183 Centrifugal Fan Fundamental Laws 183 Glossary of Terms 185 Problems 186 Recommended Reading 187 CHAPTER 9 PUMPS 189 System Resistance Curves 189 Centrifugal Pump 195 Axial Flow Pump 204 Positive Displacement Pump 205 Glossary of Terms 206 Problems 207 Recommended Reading 207 CHAPTER 10 CONDENSER COOLING SYSTEM 209 Condenser Cooling 209 Condenser Operation 213 Condenser Safety Precautions 214 Glossary of Terms 215 Problems 216 Recommended Reading 216 CHAPTER 11 STEAM TURBINES 217 Turbine Safety 231 Turbine Vibration 233 Glossary of Terms 239 Problems 241 Recommended Reading 243 CHAPTER 12 GAS TURBINES 245 Glossary of Terms 255 Problems 256 Recommended Reading 257 CHAPTER 13 RECIPROCATING ENGINES 259 Glossary of Terms 269 Problems 271 Recommended Reading 272 CHAPTER 14 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 273 Distribution System Configuration 277 Enclosures 283 Busway Applications 284 Cables 289 Cable Testing 313 Megger Testing 313 High Potential Testing 314 Acceptance 317 Cathodic Protection 317 Glossary of Terms 319 Problems 321 Recommended Reading 324 CHAPTER 15 TRANSFORMERS AND REACTORS 325 Glossary of Terms 345 Problems 346 Recommended Reading 347 CHAPTER 16 GENERATORS 349 Generator Protection 383 Glossary of Terms 386 Problems 388 Recommended Reading 389 CHAPTER 17 MOTORS 391 Reduced Voltage Starting Methods 416 Glossary of Terms 435 Problems 437 Recommended Reading 439 CHAPTER 18 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS 441 Harmonics 458 Glossary of Terms 465 Problems 465 Recommended Reading 466 CHAPTER 19 SWITCHGEAR 467 Glossary of Terms 480 Problems 481 Recommended Reading 482 CHAPTER 20 BATTERY/VITAL BUS SYSTEMS 483 Design of Battery Systems (DC System Load and Battery Capacity) 489 Design of Battery Systems (Battery Charger) 496 Glossary of Terms 497 Problems 498 Recommended Reading 498 CHAPTER 21 GROUND SYSTEM 499 Ungrounded System 500 Resistance Grounded System 503 Reactance Grounded System 504 Solidly Grounded System 506 Glossary of Terms 513 Problems 514 Recommended Reading 515 CHAPTER 22 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTION AND COORDINATION 517 Glossary of Terms 531 Problems 532 Recommended Reading 533 CHAPTER 23 CONTROL SYSTEMS 535 Glossary of Terms 554 Problems 555 Recommended Reading 556 CHAPTER 24 INSTRUMENTS AND METERS 557 Temperature 561 Flow 566 Pressure 568 Level 570 Instrument Identification Standards 584 Glossary of Terms 599 Problems 599 Recommended Reading 602 CHAPTER 25 VALVES AND ACTUATORS 603 Valve Types 607 Ball Valve 607 Check Valve 609 Gate Valve 610 Globe Valve 611 Relief Valve 612 Valve Losses 613 Glossary of Terms 621 Problems 622 Recommended Reading 623 CHAPTER 26 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 625 Particulate Emission Control 626 Nitrogen Oxides Emissions Control 628 Combustion Control of Nox 629 Post-Combustion Control of NOx 630 Sulfur Dioxide Emissions Control (Scrubber) 632 Continuous Emission Monitoring System (CEMS) 635 Carbon Dioxide (CO2) and Greenhouse Gas Emission Control 636 Glossary of Terms 644 Problems 645 Recommended Reading 646 CHAPTER 27 WATER TREATMENT 647 Flow 650 Areas and Volumes 652 Volume 652 Detention Time 654 Dosage 654 Process Removal Efficiency 655 Pump Calculations 656 Glossary of Terms 659 Problems 659 Recommended Reading 661 CHAPTER 28 SOLAR AND WIND ENERGY 663 Wind Energy 663 Thermal Solar Energy 666 Parabolic Trough Solar Field Technology 667 Solar Power Towers 669 Dish System 670 Photovoltaic Solar Energy 670 Glossary of Terms 678 Problems 679 Recommended Reading 679 ANNEXES 681 INDEX 783

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn overview on the challenging new topic of phase-aware signal processing Speech communication technology is a key factor in human-machine interaction, digital hearing aids, mobile telephony, and automatic speech/speaker recognition. With the proliferation of these applications, there is a growing requirement for advanced methodologies that can push the limits of the conventional solutions relying on processing the signal magnitude spectrum. Single-Channel Phase-Aware Signal Processing in Speech Communication provides a comprehensive guide to phase signal processing and reviews the history of phase importance in the literature, basic problems in phase processing, fundamentals of phase estimation together with several applications to demonstrate the usefulness of phase processing. Key features: Analysis of recent advances demonstrating the positive impact of phase-based processing in pushing the limits of conventional methods. Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xiii List of Symbols xvii Part I History, Theory and Concepts 1 1 Introduction: Phase Processing, History 3 Pejman Mowlaee 1.1 Chapter Organization 3 1.2 Conventional Speech Communication 3 1.3 Historical Overview of the Importance or Unimportance of Phase 6 1.4 Importance of Phase in Speech Processing 9 1.4.1 Speech Enhancement 9 1.4.1.1 Unimportance of Phase in Speech Enhancement 10 1.4.1.2 Effects of Phase Modification in Speech Signals 10 1.4.1.3 Phase Spectrum Compensation 10 1.4.1.4 Phase Importance for Improved Signal Reconstruction 11 1.4.2 Speech Watermarking 11 1.4.3 Speech Coding 12 1.4.4 Artificial Bandwidth Extension 13 1.4.5 Speech Synthesis 14 1.4.6 Speech/Speaker Recognition 15 1.5 Structure of the Book 16 1.6 Experiments 18 1.6.1 Experiment 1.1: Phase Unimportance in Speech Enhancement 18 1.6.2 Experiment 1.2: Effects of Phase Modification 20 1.6.3 Experiment 1.3: Mismatched Window 22 1.6.4 Experiment 1.4: Phase Spectrum Compensation 24 1.7 Summary 26 References 26 2 Fundamentals of Phase-Based Signal Processing 33 Pejman Mowlaee 2.1 Chapter Organization 33 2.2 STFT Phase: Background and Some Remarks 33 2.2.1 Short-Time Fourier Transform 33 2.2.2 Fourier Analysis of Speech: STFT Amplitude and Phase 34 2.3 Phase Unwrapping 35 2.3.1 Problem Definition 35 2.3.2 Remarks on Phase Unwrapping 38 2.3.3 Phase Unwrapping Solutions 38 2.3.3.1 Detecting Discontinuities 39 2.3.3.2 Numerical Integration (NI) 40 2.3.3.3 Isolating Sharp Zeros 41 2.3.3.4 Iterative Phase Unwrapping 41 2.3.3.5 Polynomial Factorization (PF) 42 2.3.3.6 Time Series Approach 42 2.3.3.7 Composite Method 43 2.3.3.8 Schur–Cohn and Nyquist Frequency 44 2.4 Useful Phase-Based Representations 44 2.4.1 Group Delay Representations 45 2.4.2 Instantaneous Frequency 48 2.4.3 Baseband Phase Difference 49 2.4.4 Harmonic Phase Decomposition 50 2.4.4.1 Background on the Harmonic Model 50 2.4.4.2 Phase Decomposition using the Harmonic Model 51 2.4.5 Phasegram: Unwrapped Harmonic Phase 52 2.4.5.1 Definitions and Background 52 2.4.5.2 Circular Mean and Variance 52 2.4.6 Relative Phase Shift 53 2.4.7 Phase Distortion 54 2.5 Experiments 57 2.5.1 Experiment 2.1: One-Dimensional Phase Unwrapping 57 2.5.1.1 Clean Signal Scenario 57 2.5.1.2 Noisy Signal Scenario 58 2.5.2 Experiment 2.2: Comparative Study of Phase Unwrapping Methods 58 2.5.3 Experiment 2.3: Comparative Study on Group Delay Spectra 59 2.5.4 Experiment 2.4: Circular Statistics of the Harmonic Phase 60 2.5.5 Experiment 2.5: Circular Statistics of the Spectral Phase 62 2.5.6 Experiment 2.6: Comparative Study of Phase Representations 63 2.6 Summary 65 References 65 3 Phase Estimation Fundamentals 71 Josef Kulmer and Pejman Mowlaee 3.1 Chapter Organization 71 3.2 Phase Estimation Fundamentals 71 3.2.1 Background and Fundamentals 71 3.2.2 Key Examples: Phase Estimation Problem 72 3.2.2.1 Example 1: Discrete-Time Sinusoid 72 3.2.2.2 Example 2: Discrete-Time Sinusoid in Noise 76 3.2.3 Phase Estimation 80 3.2.3.1 Maximum Likelihood Estimation 80 3.2.3.2 Maximum a Posteriori Estimation 83 3.3 Existing Solutions 84 3.3.1 Iterative Signal Reconstruction 84 3.3.1.1 Background 84 3.3.1.2 Griffin–Lim Algorithm (GLA) 85 3.3.1.3 Extensions of the GLA 87 3.3.2 Phase Reconstruction Across Time 89 3.3.3 Phase Reconstruction Across Frequency 90 3.3.4 Phase Randomization 91 3.3.5 Geometry-Based Phase Estimation 93 3.3.6 Least Squares (LS) 95 3.3.7 Spectro-Temporal Smoothing of Unwrapped Phase 97 3.3.7.1 Signal Segmentation 97 3.3.7.2 Linear Phase Removal 98 3.3.7.3 Apply Smoothing Filter 98 3.3.7.4 Reconstruction of the Enhanced-Phase Signal 101 3.4 Experiments 101 3.4.1 Experiment 3.1: Monte Carlo Simulation Comparing ML and MAP 101 3.4.2 Experiment 3.2: Monte Carlo Simulation on Window Impact 103 3.4.3 Experiment 3.3: Phase Recovery Using the Griffin–Lim Algorithm 105 3.4.4 Experiment 3.4: Phase Estimation for Speech Enhancement: A Comparative Study 105 3.5 Summary 107 References 108 Part II Applications 113 4 Phase Processing for Single-Channel Speech Enhancement 115 Johannes Stahl and Pejman Mowlaee 4.1 Introduction and Chapter Organization 115 4.2 Speech Enhancement in the STFT Domain: General Concepts 116 4.2.1 A priori SNR Estimation 116 4.2.1.1 Decision-Directed a priori SNR Estimation 117 4.2.1.2 Cepstro-Temporal Smoothing 118 4.2.2 Noise PSD Estimation 118 4.2.2.1 Minimum Statistics 119 4.3 Conventional Speech Enhancement 119 4.3.1 Statistical Model 119 4.3.2 Short-Time Spectral Amplitude Estimation 121 4.4 Phase-Sensitive Speech Enhancement 123 4.4.1 Phase Estimation for Signal Reconstruction 123 4.4.2 Spectral Amplitude Estimation Given the STFT Phase 124 4.4.3 Iterative Closed-Loop Phase-Aware Single-Channel Speech Enhancement 126 4.4.4 Incorporating Voiced/Unvoiced Uncertainty 128 4.4.5 Uncertainty in Prior Phase Information 130 4.4.6 Stochastic–Deterministic MMSE-STFT Speech Enhancement 131 4.4.6.1 Obtaining the Speech Parameters 134 4.5 Experiments 135 4.5.1 Experiment 4.1: Proof of Concept 135 4.5.2 Experiment 4.2: Consistency 136 4.5.3 Experiment 4.3: Sensitivity Analysis 137 4.6 Summary 139 References 139 5 Phase Processing for Single-Channel Source Separation 143 Pejman Mowlaee and Florian Mayer 5.1 Chapter Organization 143 5.2 Why Single-Channel Source Separation? 143 5.2.1 Background 143 5.2.2 Problem Formulation 144 5.3 Conventional Single-Channel Source Separation 145 5.3.1 Source-Driven SCSS 146 5.3.1.1 Ideal Binary Mask 147 5.3.1.2 Ideal Ratio Mask 147 5.3.2 Model-Based SCSS 147 5.3.2.1 Deep Learning 149 5.3.2.2 Non-NegativeMatrix Factorization 150 5.4 Phase Processing for Single-Channel Source Separation 152 5.4.1 Complex Matrix Factorization Methods 152 5.4.1.1 Complex Matrix Factorization 152 5.4.1.2 Complex Matrix Factorization with Intra-Source Additivity 154 5.4.2 Phase Importance for Signal Reconstruction 155 5.4.2.1 Multiple Input Spectrogram Inversion 155 5.4.2.2 Partial Phase Reconstruction 156 5.4.2.3 Informed Source Separation Using Iterative Reconstruction (ISSIR) 157 5.4.2.4 Sinusoidal-Based PPR 158 5.4.2.5 Spectrogram Consistency 159 5.4.2.6 Geometry-Based Phase Estimation 160 5.4.2.7 Phase Decomposition and Temporal Smoothing 162 5.4.2.8 Phase Reconstruction of Spectrograms with Linear Unwrapping 163 5.4.3 Phase-Aware Time–Frequency Masks 164 5.4.3.1 Phase-Insensitive Masks 164 5.4.3.2 Phase-Sensitive Mask 165 5.4.3.3 Complex Ratio Mask 165 5.4.3.4 Complex Mask 166 5.4.4 Phase Importance in Signal Interaction Models 166 5.5 Experiments 168 5.5.1 Experiment 5.1: Phase Estimation for Proof-of-Concept Signal Reconstruction 168 5.5.2 Experiment 5.2: Comparative Study of GLA-Based Phase Reconstruction Methods 168 5.5.2.1 Convergence Analysis 169 5.5.2.2 Quantized Scenario 169 5.5.3 Experiment 5.3: Phase-Aware Time–Frequency Mask 170 5.5.4 Experiment 5.4: Phase-Sensitive Interaction Functions 172 5.5.5 Experiment 5.5: Complex Matrix Factorization 172 5.6 Summary 174 References 174 6 Phase-Aware Speech Quality Estimation 179 Pejman Mowlaee 6.1 Chapter Organization 179 6.2 Introduction: Speech Quality Estimation 179 6.2.1 General Definition of Speech Quality 180 6.2.2 Speech Quality Estimators: Amplitude, Phase, or Both? 181 6.3 Conventional Instrumental Metrics for Speech Quality Estimation 182 6.3.1 Perceived Quality 182 6.3.2 Speech Intelligibility 184 6.4 Why Phase-Aware Metrics? 188 6.4.1 Phase and Speech Intelligibility 188 6.4.2 Phase and Perceived Quality 188 6.5 New Phase-Aware Metrics 189 6.5.1 Group Delay Deviation 189 6.5.2 Instantaneous Frequency Deviation 190 6.5.3 Unwrapped MSE 190 6.5.4 Phase Deviation 190 6.5.5 UnHPSNR and UnRMSE 191 6.6 Subjective Tests 191 6.6.1 CCR Test 192 6.6.2 MUSHRA Test 192 6.6.3 Statistical Analysis 193 6.6.4 Speech Intelligibility Test 194 6.6.5 Evaluation of Speech Quality Measures 196 6.7 Experiments 198 6.7.1 Experiment 6.1: Impact of Phase Modifications on Speech Quality 199 6.7.2 Experiment 6.2: Phase and Perceived Quality Estimation 201 6.7.3 Experiment 6.3: Phase and Speech Intelligibility Estimation 202 6.7.4 Experiment 6.4: Evaluating the Phase Estimation Accuracy 203 6.8 Summary 205 References 205 7 Conclusion and Future Outlook 210 Pejman Mowlaee 7.1 Chapter Organization 210 7.2 Renaissance of Phase-Aware Signal Processing: Decline and Rise 210 7.3 Directions for Future Research 211 7.3.1 Related Research Disciplines 212 7.3.1.1 Phase-Aware Processing for Speech and Speaker Recognition 212 7.3.1.2 Speech Synthesis and Speech Coding 212 7.3.1.3 Phase-Aware Speech Enhancement for De-Reverberation 213 7.3.1.4 Iterative Signal Estimation 213 7.3.1.5 More Robust Phase Estimators 214 7.3.1.6 Instrumental Measures in Complex Signal Domain 214 7.3.1.7 Multi-Channel Speech Processing 214 7.3.2 Other Research Disciplines 215 7.3.2.1 Processing Non-Speech Signals 215 7.3.2.2 Processing Signals of Higher Dimensionality Than One 215 7.4 Summary 215 References 216 A MATLAB Toolbox 220 A.1 Chapter Organization 220 A.2 Phase Lab Toolbox 220 A.2.1 MATLAB® Code 220 A.2.2 Additional Material 221 References 221 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisA detailed and systematic introduction to the distributed cooperative control of multi-agent systems from a theoretical, network perspective Features detailed analysis and discussions on the distributed cooperative control and dynamics of multi-agent systems Covers comprehensively first order, second order and higher order systems, swarming and flocking behaviors Provides a broad theoretical framework for understanding the fundamentals of distributed cooperative control Table of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Background 1 1.1.1 Networked Multi-agent Systems 1 1.1.2 Collective Behaviors and Cooperative Control in Multi-agent Systems 2 1.1.3 Network Control in Multi-agent Systems 4 1.1.4 Distributed Consensus Filtering in Sensor Networks 5 1.2 Organization 6 2 Consensus in Multi-agent Systems 11 2.1 Consensus in Linear Multi-agent Systems 11 2.1.1 Preliminaries 11 2.1.2 Model Formulation and Results 13 2.2 Consensus in Nonlinear Multi-agent Systems 15 2.2.1 Preliminaries and Model Formulation 15 2.2.2 Local Consensus of Multi-agent Systems 16 2.2.3 Global Consensus of Multi-agent Systems in General Networks 19 2.2.4 Global Consensus of Multi-agent Systems in Virtual Networks 26 2.2.5 Simulation Examples 29 2.3 Notes 30 3 Second-Order Consensus in Multi-agent Systems 31 3.1 Second-Order Consensus in Linear Multi-agent Systems 32 3.1.1 Model Formulation 32 3.1.2 Second-Order Consensus in Directed Networks 33 3.1.3 Second-Order Consensus in Delayed Directed Networks 37 3.1.4 Simulation Examples 41 3.2 Second-Order Consensus in Nonlinear Multi-agent Systems 42 3.2.1 Preliminaries 42 3.2.2 Second-Order Consensus in Strongly Connected Networks 45 3.2.3 Second-Order Consensus in Rooted Networks 50 3.2.4 Simulation Examples 53 3.3 Notes 54 4 Higher-Order Consensus in Multi-agent Systems 56 4.1 Preliminaries 56 4.2 Higher-Order Consensus in a General Form 58 4.2.1 Synchronization in Complex Networks 58 4.2.2 Higher-Order Consensus in a General Form 59 4.2.3 Consensus Region in Higher-Order Consensus 60 4.3 Leader-Follower Control in Multi-agent Systems 64 4.3.1 Leader-Follower Control in Multi-agent Systems with Full-State Feedback 65 4.3.2 Leader-Follower Control with Observers 67 4.4 Simulation Examples 69 4.4.1 Consensus Regions 69 4.4.2 Leader-Follower Control with Full-State Feedback 70 4.4.3 Leader-Follower Control with Observers 70 4.5 Notes 71 5 Stability Analysis of Swarming Behaviors 73 5.1 Preliminaries 73 5.2 Analysis of Swarm Cohesion 76 5.3 Swarm Cohesion in a Noisy Environment 80 5.4 Cohesion in Swarms with Switched Topologies 82 5.5 Cohesion in Swarms with Changing Topologies 84 5.6 Simulation Examples 93 5.7 Notes 95 6 Distributed Leader-Follower Flocking Control 96 6.1 Preliminaries 96 6.1.1 Model Formulation 97 6.1.2 Nonsmooth Analysis 99 6.2 Distributed Leader-Follower Control with Pinning Observers 103 6.3 Simulation Examples 110 6.4 Notes 114 7 Consensus of Multi-agent Systems with Sampled Data Information 115 7.1 Problem Statement 116 7.2 Second-Order Consensus of Multi-agent Systems with Sampled Full Information 117 7.2.1 Second-Order Consensus of Multi-agent Systems with Sampled Full Information 119 7.2.2 Selection of Sampling Periods 122 7.2.3 Design of Coupling Gains 123 7.2.4 Consensus Region for the Network Spectrum 125 7.2.5 Second-Order Consensus in Delayed Undirected Networks with Sampled Position and Velocity Data 125 7.2.6 Simulation Examples 128 7.3 Second-Order Consensus of Multi-agent Systems with Sampled Position Information 132 7.3.1 Second-Order Consensus in Multi-agent Dynamical Systems with Sampled Position Data 132 7.3.2 Simulation Examples 139 7.4 Consensus of Multi-agent Systems with Nonlinear Dynamics and Sampled Information 142 7.4.1 The Case with a Fixed and Strongly Connected Topology 145 7.4.2 The Case with Topology Containing a Directed Spanning Tree 149 7.4.3 The Case with Topology Having no Directed Spanning Tree 155 7.5 Notes 158 8 Consensus of Second-Order Multi-agent Systems with Intermittent Communication 159 8.1 Problem Statement 159 8.2 The Case with a Strongly Connected Topology 161 8.3 The Case with a Topology Having a Directed Spanning Tree 165 8.4 Consensus of Second-Order Multi-agent Systems with Nonlinear Dynamics and Intermittent Communication 167 8.5 Notes 172 9 Distributed Adaptive Control of Multi-agent Systems 174 9.1 Distributed Adaptive Control in Complex Networks 175 9.1.1 Preliminaries 175 9.1.2 Distributed Adaptive Control in Complex Networks 176 9.1.3 Pinning Edges Control 178 9.1.4 Simulation Examples 181 9.2 Distributed Control Gains Design for Second-Order Consensus in Nonlinear Multi-agent Systems 183 9.2.1 Preliminaries 184 9.2.2 Distributed Control Gains Design: Leaderless Case 186 9.2.3 Distributed Control Gains Design: Leader-Follower Case 190 9.2.4 Simulation Examples 194 9.3 Notes 196 10 Distributed Consensus Filtering in Sensor Networks 198 10.1 Preliminaries 199 10.2 Distributed Consensus Filters Design for Sensor Networks with Fully-Pinned Controllers 201 10.3 Distributed Consensus Filters Design for Sensor Networks with Pinning Controllers 205 10.4 Distributed Consensus Filters Design for Sensor Networks with Pinning Observers 207 10.5 Simulation Examples 210 10.6 Notes 213 11 Delay-Induced Consensus and Quasi-Consensus in Multi-agent Systems 214 11.1 Problem Statement 214 11.2 Delay-Induced Consensus and Quasi-Consensus in Multi-agent Dynamical Systems 217 11.3 Motivation for Quasi-Consensus Analysis 223 11.4 Simulation Examples 224 11.5 Notes 228 12 Conclusions and FutureWork 229 12.1 Conclusions 229 12.2 Future Work 230 Bibliography 232 Index 241

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book highlights the display applications of c-axis aligned crystalline indiumgalliumzinc oxide (CAAC-IGZO), a new class of oxide material that challenges the dominance of silicon in the field of thin film semiconductor devices. It is an enabler for displays with high resolution and low power consumption, as well as high-productivity manufacturing. The applications of CAAC-IGZO focus on liquid crystal displays (LCDs) with extremely low power consumption for mobile applications, and high-resolution and flexible organic light-emitting diode (OLED) displays, and present a large number of prototypes developed at the Semiconductor Energy Laboratory. In particular, the description of LCDs includes how CAAC-IGZO enables LCDs with extremely low refresh rate that provides ultra-low power consumption in a wide range of use cases. Moreover, this book also offers the latest data of IGZO. The IGZO has recently achieved a mobility of 65.5 cm2?}V-s, and it is expected to pTable of ContentsAbout the Editors ix List of Contributors xi Series Editor’s Foreword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xviii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 History of Displays 3 1.2 Requirement for Displays 4 1.3 Transistor Technology for Displays 5 1.3.1 Comparison of Silicon and Oxide Semiconductors 6 1.3.2 FETs in LCDs 8 1.3.3 FETs in OLED Displays 11 1.3.4 Recent FET Technologies 14 1.3.5 Development of OLED Displays 17 References 19 2 Applications of CAAC-IGZO FETs to Displays 21 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Bottom-Gate Top-Contact FET 24 2.2.1 Manufacturing Process for CAAC-IGZO FETs with C.E.-Type BGTC Structure 27 2.2.2 GI Formation 27 2.2.3 Formation of Buried Channel by Stacked Active Layer 33 2.2.4 Baking Treatment of CAAC-IGZO 42 2.2.5 Damaged Layer (n-Type) Formed by Deposition of S/D Electrodes 45 2.2.6 Cleaning of the Back Channel 47 2.2.7 Copper Wiring for S/D Electrodes 52 2.3 Top-Gate Self-Aligned FET 62 2.3.1 Fabrication Process of TGSA CAAC-IGZO FETs 64 2.3.2 Formation of GE/GI Patterns 65 2.3.3 Formation of S/D Regions 66 2.3.4 GI Thinning and L Reduction 70 2.4 Characteristics of CAAC-IGZO FET 71 2.4.1 Current Drivability 71 2.4.2 Low Off-State Current 94 2.4.3 Normally-Off Id–Vg Characteristics and Small Threshold-Voltage Variation 98 2.4.4 Saturability of Id–Vd Characteristics 103 2.4.5 Summary 109 2.5 Density of States and Device Reliability 109 2.5.1 Introduction 110 2.5.2 Measurement of Defect States in IGZO Film 111 2.5.3 Correlation between Oxygen Vacancies and FET Characteristics 115 2.5.4 Defect States in Silicon-Oxide Film 117 2.5.5 NBITS Mechanism 122 2.5.6 Summary 122 2.6 Oxide Conductor Electrode Process 124 2.6.1 Introduction 124 2.6.2 Method of Fabricating Oxide Conductor Electrode and Measurements of its Resistivity 124 2.6.3 LCD Device with Oxide Conductor Electrode 131 2.6.4 Summary 134 References 135 3 Driver Circuit 138 3.1 Introduction 138 3.2 Gate-Driver Circuit 139 3.2.1 Logic Circuit and Bootstrapping 139 3.2.2 Flip-Flops 141 3.2.3 Reduction in Area of Gate-Driver Circuit 149 3.3 Source-Driver Circuit 154 3.3.1 Introduction 154 3.3.2 Demultiplexer 157 3.3.3 8-Bit Source-Driver IC for 13.3-Inch, 60-Hz, 8-Bit 8 K OLED Panels 161 3.3.4 12-Bit Source-Driver IC for 13.3-Inch, 120-Hz, 12-Bit 8 K OLED Panels 172 3.3.5 Full-Driver IC 179 References 181 4 Application to OLED Displays 183 4.1 Introduction 183 4.2 Device Architecture for High-Performance OLED 185 4.2.1 Fundamentals of OLEDs 185 4.2.2 Organic Material/Metal Oxide Composite 201 4.2.3 Exciplex–Triplet Energy Transfer for High-Performance Phosphorescent OLEDs 221 4.2.4 Enhancement in the Emission Efficiency of Fluorescent OLEDs 240 4.2.5 Increase in Outcoupling Efficiency of OLEDs by Molecular Orientation 253 4.3 OLED Structure for Higher Pixel Density 261 4.3.1 Tandem OLED 262 4.3.2 WTC Structure 269 4.3.3 Measures for Crosstalk 272 4.4 Circuit Design for OLED Displays 274 4.4.1 Driving OLED Displays 274 4.4.2 External Compensation 280 4.4.3 Internal Compensation 282 4.4.4 Arrangement of Pixel Circuit and High Resolution 291 4.5 Characteristics of OLED Displays 293 4.5.1 Application of WTC Structure to Displays 293 4.5.2 Performance of OLED and LCDs 295 References 300 5 Flexible Displays 306 5.1 Introduction 306 5.1.1 OLED and Flexible Displays 306 5.2 Flexible Display Fabrication Technology 309 5.2.1 Separation Layer 309 5.2.2 Separation Process 309 5.2.3 Transfer Process of Flexible Displays 316 5.2.4 Moisture-Blocking Property of the Flexible OLED Display 320 5.2.5 Bending Test 326 5.2.6 System Automation by Transfer Technology Apparatus (TT Apparatus) 328 5.3 Prototypes of Flexible OLED Displays 338 References 347 6 Application to Liquid Crystal Displays 349 6.1 Introduction 349 6.2 Technology for Higher Resolution 351 6.2.1 Introduction 351 6.2.2 The Pixel Circuit 351 6.2.3 Pixel Layout and Aperture Ratio of an LCD 353 6.2.4 Applicability of Large-Sized Displays 355 6.3 Driving Method for Power Saving 358 6.3.1 Introduction 358 6.3.2 Saving Power with Low-Frequency Driving 358 6.3.3 Low-Frequency Driving with CAAC-IGZO 360 6.3.4 Configuration of a Liquid Crystal Cell for Low-Frequency Driving 367 6.3.5 Conclusions 376 6.4 Characteristics of LCDs 376 6.4.1 Introduction 376 6.4.2 High-Resolution Fringe-Field Switching LCDs 376 6.4.3 A 434-PPI Reflective LCD 388 References 395 Appendix 398 Index 400

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe modern microprocessor based electronic equipment most vulnerable to Intentional Destructive Electromagnetic Interferences (IDEI) includes High-Altitude Electromagnetic Pulse (HEMP) in all substation equipment. However, power equipment and especially transformers are also subject to the influence of HEMP.Trade Review'This book provides background information on EMP and practical solutions for protecting power networks ... There are a variety of interesting protection circuits discussed and many interesting photos of unusual power distribution equipment and test equipment' IEEE, October 2017Table of ContentsAbout the Author ix Preface xi 1 Technical Progress and Its Consequences 1 1.1 Technical Progress in Relay Protection 12 1.2 Microprocessors – The Basis of the Contemporary Stage of Technical Progress 14 1.3 Smart Grid – A Dangerous Vector of ‘Technical Progress’ in Power Engineering 15 1.4 Dangerous Trends in the Development of Relay Protection Equipment 16 References 22 2 Intentional Destructive Electromagnetic Threats 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 A Brief Historical Background 25 2.3 The First Reliable Information on HEMP as Well as Protection Methods in the Field of Electrical Power Engineering 26 2.4 The Actual Situation with Respect to the Protection of Power Electrical Systems from HEMP and other Types of Intentional Destructive Electromagnetic Threats 27 2.5 Medium and Short-Range Missile Systems – Potential Sources of Intentional Destructive Electromagnetic Threats that Anti-Missile Defence Systems Are Powerless to Defend Against 30 2.6 What is Needed to Actually Defend the Country Against an ‘Electromagnetic Armageddon’? 34 2.7 The Classification and Specifics of High Power Electromagnetic Threats 35 2.8 The Effect of HPEM on Microprocessor-based Relay Protection Systems 53 2.9 The Principle Technical Standards in the HEMP Field 56 References 59 3 Methods and Techniques of Protecting DPR from EMP 65 3.1 The Sensitivity of DPR to Electromagnetic Threats 65 3.2 Methods of Protection from HEMP 68 References 69 4 Passive Methods and Techniques of Protecting DPR from EMP 71 4.1 Cabinets 71 4.2 The Earthing of Sensitive Electronic Apparatus 72 4.3 HEMP Filters 80 4.3.1 Ferrite Filters 80 4.3.2 LC Section-based Filters 87 4.4 Non-linear Overvoltage Limiters 94 4.5 Shielding of the Control Cables 99 4.6 Design Changes to DPR 105 4.6.1 Analogue Input Points 105 4.6.2 Discrete Input Points 106 4.6.3 Output Relays 107 4.6.4 Printed Boards 108 4.7 Construction Materials 109 References 112 5 Active Methods and Techniques of Protecting DPR from EMP 113 5.1 A New Principle in the Active Protection of DPR 113 5.2 Current and Voltage Sensors with Regulated Pickup Threshold based on Reed Switches 122 5.3 Technical and Economic Aspects Affecting the Active Methods of Protecting DPR 128 5.4 Protecting the Circuit Breaker Remote Control System 141 References 146 6 Testing the DPR Immunity to HPEM 149 6.1 An Analysis of Sources of HPEM 149 6.2 The Parameters of Testing DPR on Immunity to HEMP 153 6.3 The Parameters for Testing Immunity to Intentional Electromagnetic Interference (IEMI) 154 6.4 Testing Equipment for Testing Immunity to HPEM 155 6.5 Use of the Performance Criteria During Testing of Electronic Apparatus for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 166 6.6 The Idiosyncrasies of using Performance Criteria during Testing of Microprocessor Based Relay Protection Devices for their Immuinity to HPEM 167 6.7 A critique of the Method of Testing of the DPR Used in [6.16- 168 6.8 An Analysis of the Results of the Second Independent Test of a DPR of the Same Type 170 6.9 Conclusions and Recommendations for Testing Microprocessor Based Protective Relays 173 References 174 7 Administrative and Technical Measures to Protect DPR from EMP 177 7.1 Problems with the Standardization of DPR 177 7.1.1 Who Coordinates the Process of Standardization in the Field of Relay Protection? 177 7.1.2 The Fundamental Principles of the Standardization of DPR 179 7.2 The Fundamental Principles for the Standardization of DPR Testing 189 7.2.1 A New Look at the Problem 190 7.2.2 Modern Testing Systems to Test Protective Relays 192 7.2.3 The Problems with Modern Protective Relay Testing Systems 193 7.2.4 A Proposed Solution to the Problem 194 7.3 Establishment of Reserves of Electronic Equipment Replacement Modules as a Way to Improve the Survivability of the Power System 195 7.3.1 Optimizing the Capacity of Reserves of Replacement Modules 195 7.3.2 The Problem of Storing SPTA Reserves 196 References 202 8 Protecting High-Power Electrical Equipment from EMP 205 8.1 The Magneto-Hydrodynamic Effect of HEMP 205 8.2 The Influence of the E3 HEMP Component on High-Power Electrical Equipment 207 8.3 Protection of High-Power Equipment from the Impact of Geo-Magnetically Induced Currents (GIC) 208 References 216 Appendix: EMP and its Impact on the Power System 217 Index 223

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn essential guide to the background, design, and application of common-mode filtering structures in modern high-speed differential communication links Written by a team of experts in the field, Electromagnetic Bandgap (EBG) Structures explores the practical electromagnetic bandgap based common mode filters for power integrity applications and covers the theoretical and practical design approaches for common mode filtering in high-speed printed circuit boards, especially for boards in high data-rate systems. The authors describe the classic applications of electromagnetic bandgap (EBG) structures and the phenomena of common mode generation in high speed digital boards. The text also explores the fundamental electromagnetic mechanisms of the functioning of planar EBGs and considers the impact of planar EBGs on the digital signal propagation of single ended and differential interconnects routed on top or between EBGs. The authors examine the concept, design, and modeling of EBG common moTable of ContentsAbout the Authors vii Preface xi Acknowledgments xiii 1 Introduction 1 2 Planar EBGs: Fundamentals and Design 21 3 Impact of Planar EBGs on Signal Integrity in High-Speed Digital Boards 61 4 Planar Onboard EBG Filters for Common Mode Current Reduction 77 5 Special Topics for EBG Filters 159 6 Removable EBG Common Mode Filters 165 7 EBG Common Mode Filters: Modeling and Measurements 199 Index 219

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a comprehensive practical review of the new technologies used to obtain hydrogen more efficiently via catalytic, electrochemical, bio- and photohydrogen production. Hydrogen has been gaining more attention in both transportation and stationary power applications. Fuel cell-powered cars are on the roads and the automotive industry is demanding feasible and efficient technologies to produce hydrogen. The principles and methods described herein lead to reasonable mitigation of the great majority of problems associated with hydrogen production technologies. The chapters in this book are written by distinguished authors who have extensive experience in their fields, and readers will have a chance to compare the fundamental production techniques and learn about the pros and cons of these technologies. The book is organized into three parts. Part I shows the catalytic and electrochemical principles involved in hydrogen production technologies. Part II addresses hydrogen prodTable of ContentsPreface xvii Part I Catalytic and Electrochemical Hydrogen Production 1 Hydrogen Production from Oxygenated Hydrocarbons: Review of Catalyst Development, Reaction Mechanism and Reactor Modeling 3 Mohanned Mohamedali, Amr Henni and Hussameldin Ibrahim 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Catalyst Development for the Steam Reforming Process 6 1.3 Kinetics and Reaction Mechanism for Steam Reforming of Oxygenated Hydrocarbons 37 1.4 Reactor Modeling and Simulation in Steam Reforming of Oxygenated Hydrocarbons 48 References 50 2 Ammonia Decomposition for Decentralized Hydrogen Production in Microchannel Reactors: Experiments and CFD Simulations 77 Steven Chiuta, Raymond C. Everson, Hein W.J.P. Neomagus and Dmitri G. Bessarabov 2.1 Introduction 78 2.2 Ammonia Decomposition for Hydrogen Production 80 2.3 Ammonia-Fueled Microchannel Reactors for Hydrogen Production: Experiments 89 2.4 CFD Simulation of Hydrogen Production in Ammonia-Fueled Microchannel Reactors 96 2.5 Summary 104 Acknowledgments 104 References 104 3 Hydrogen Production with Membrane Systems 113 F. Gallucci, A. Arratibel, J.A. Medrano, E. Fernandez, M.v. Sint Annaland and D.A. Pacheco Tanaka 3.1 Introduction 114 3.2 Pd-Based Membranes 115 3.3 Fuel Reforming in Membrane Reactors for Hydrogen Production 125 3.4 Thermodynamic and Economic Analysis of Fluidized Bed Membrane Reactors for Methane Reforming 129 3.5 Conclusions 143 Acknowledgments 144 References 144 4 Catalytic Hydrogen Production from Bioethanol 153 Peng He and Hua Song 4.1 Introduction 154 4.2 Production Technology Overview 155 4.3 Catalyst Overview 166 4.4 Catalyst Optimization Strategies 168 4.5 Reaction Mechanism and Kinetic Studies 174 4.6 Computational Approaches 179 4.7 Economic Considerations 182 4.8 Future Development Directions 185 Acknowledgment 189 References 189 5 Hydrogen Generation from the Hydrolysis of Ammonia Borane Using Transition Metal Nanoparticles as Catalyst 207 Serdar Akbayrak and Saim Özkar 5.1 Introduction 207 5.2 Transition Metal Nanoparticles in Catalysis 209 5.3 Preparation, Stabilization and Characterization of Metal Nanoparticles 209 5.4 Transition Metal Nanoparticles in Hydrogen Generation from the Hydrolysis of Ammonia Borane 212 5.5 Durability of Catalysts in Hydrolysis of Ammonia Borane 218 5.6 Conclusion 221 References 222 6 Hydrogen Production by Water Electrolysis 231 Sergey A. Grigoriev and Vladimir N. Fateev 6.1 Historical Aspects of Water Electrolysis 231 6.2 Fundamentals of Electrolysis 232 6.3 Modern Status of Electrolysis 238 6.4 Perspectives of Hydrogen Production by Electrolysis 266 Acknowledgment 268 References 269 7 Electrochemical Hydrogen Production from SO2 and Water in a SDE Electrolyzer 277 A.J. Krüger, J. Kerres, H.M. Krieg and D. Bessarabov 7.1 Introduction 278 7.2 Membrane Characterization 280 7.3 MEA Characterization 286 7.4 Effect of Anode Impurities 293 7.5 High Temperature SO2 Electrolysis 295 7.6 Conclusion 297 References 298 Part II Bio Hydrogen Production 8 Biomass Fast Pyrolysis for Hydrogen Production from Bio-Oil 307 K. Bizkarra, V.L. Barrio, P.L. Arias and J.F. Cambra 8.1 Introduction 308 8.2 Biomass Pyrolysis to Produce Bio-Oils 310 8.3 Bio–oil Reforming Processes 331 8.4 Future Prospects 346 References 348 9 Production of a Clean Hydrogen-Rich Gas by the Staged Gasification of Biomass and Plastic Waste 363 Joo-Sik Kim and Young-Kon Choi 9.1 Introduction 364 9.2 Chemistry of Gasification 365 9.3 Tar Cracking and H2 Production 367 9.4 Staged Gasification 368 9.5 Experimental Results and Discussion 370 9.6 Conclusions 383 References 383 10 Enhancement of Bio-hydrogen Production Technologies by Sulphate-Reducing Bacteria 385 Hugo Iván Velázquez-Sánchez, Pablo Antonio López-Pérez, María Isabel Neria-González and Ricardo Aguilar-López 10.1 Introduction 386 10.2 Sulphate-Reducing Bacteria for H2 Production 387 10.3 Kinetic Modeling of the SR Fermentation 388 10.4 Bifurcation Analysis 394 10.5 Process Control Strategies 398 10.6 Conclusions 403 Acknowledgment 403 Nomenclature 403 References 404 11 Microbial Electrolysis Cells (MECs) as Innovative Technology for Sustainable Hydrogen Production: Fundamentals and Perspective Applications 407 Abudukeremu Kadier, Mohd Sahaid Kalil, Azah Mohamed, Hassimi Abu Hasan, Peyman Abdeshahian, Tayebeh Fooladi and Aidil Abdul Hamid 11.1 Introduction 408 11.2 Principles of MEC for Hydrogen Production 409 11.3 Thermodynamics of MEC 410 11.4 Factors Influencing the Performance of MECs 412 11.5 Current Application of MECs 432 11.6 Conclusions and Prospective Application of MECs 440 Acknowledgments 441 References 441 12 Algae to Hydrogen: Novel Energy-Efficient Co-Production of Hydrogen and Power 459 Muhammad Aziz and Ilman Nuran Zaini 12.1 Introduction 459 12.2 Algae Potential and Characteristics 461 12.3 Energy-Efficient Energy Harvesting Technologies 464 12.4 Pretreatment (Drying) 467 12.5 Conversion of Algae to Hydrogen-Rich Gases 470 12.6 Conclusions 482 References 483 Part III Photo Hydrogen Production 13 Semiconductor-Based Nanomaterials for Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation 489 Zipeng Xing, Zhenzi Li and Wei Zhou 13.1 Introduction 490 13.2 Semiconductor Oxide-Based Nanomaterials for Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation 491 13.3 Semiconductor Sulfide-Based Nanomaterials for Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation 506 13.4 Metal-Free Semiconductor Nanomaterials for Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation 517 13.5 Summary and Prospects 527 Acknowledgments 528 References 528 14 Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation Enabled by Nanostructured TiO2 Materials 545 Mengye Wang, Meidan Ye, James Iocozziaand Zhiqun Lin 14.1 Introduction 546 14.2 Photocatalytic H2 Generation 547 14.3 Main Experimental Parameters in Photocatalytic H2 Generation Reaction 549 14.4 Types of TiO2 Nanostructures 551 14.5 Conclusions and Outlook 568 Acknowledgments 569 References 569 15 Polymeric Carbon Nitride-Based Composites for Visible-Light-Driven Photocatalytic Hydrogen Generation 579 Pablo Martín-Ramos, Jesús Martín-Gil and Manuela Ramos Silva 15.1 Introduction 580 15.2 General Comments on g-C3N4 and its Basic Properties 581 15.3 Synthesis of Bulk g-C3N4 586 15.4 Functionalization of g-C3N4 588 15.5 Photocatalytic Hydrogen Production Using g-C3N4 598 15.6 Conclusions 614 References 615

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe definite guide to the theory, knowledge, technical expertise, and ethical considerations that define the M&S profession From traffic control to disaster management, supply chain analysis to military logistics, healthcare management to new drug discovery, modeling and simulation (M&S) has become an essential tool for solving countless real-world problems. M&S professionals are now indispensable to how things get done across virtually every aspect of modern life. This makes it all the more surprising that, until now, no effort has been made to systematically codify the core theory, knowledge, and technical expertise needed to succeed as an M&S professional. This book brings together contributions from experts at the leading edge of the modeling and simulation profession, worldwide, who share their priceless insights into issues which are fundamental to professional success and career development in this critically important field. Running as a common thread thTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xv List of Contributors xix Notes on Contributors xxiii Part I Foundation 1 1 An Introduction to the Facets of the Profession of Modeling and Simulation 3Andreas Tolk 2 An Index to the Body of Knowledge of Simulation Systems Engineering 11Umut Durak, Tuncer Ören, and Andreas Tolk 3 Code of Ethics 35Andreas Tolk Part II Education 53 4 M&S as a Profession and an Academic Discipline: A Contemporary View 55John A. Sokolowski and Roland R. Mielke 5 Academic Education Supporting the Professional Landscape 87Margaret L. Loper and Charles D. Turnitsa 6 The Certified Modeling and Simulation Professional Certification and Examination 109Mikel D. Petty, Gregory S. Reed, and William V. Tucker Part III Society 129 7 Modeling and Simulation Societies Shaping the Profession 131Robert K. Armstrong and Simon J.E. Taylor 8 The Uniformed Military Modeling and Simulation Professional 151Rudolph P. Darken and Curtis L. Blais 9 M&S as a Profession and Discipline in China 167Lin Zhang, Yingnian Wu, and Gengjiao Yang 10 Modeling and Simulation for the Enterprise: Integrating Application Domains for the M&S Professional 183Steve Swenson, Robert M. Gravitz, and Gary M. Lightner Part IV Application 209 11 A Complexity and Creative Innovation Dynamics Perspective to Sustaining the Growth and Vitality of the M&S Profession 211Levent Yilmaz 12 Theory and Practice of M&S in Cyber Environments 223Saurabh Mittal and Bernard P. Zeigler Part V Economics 265 13 Funding an Academic Simulation Project: The Economics of M&S 267Saikou Y. Diallo, Christopher J. Lynch, and Navonil Mustafee 14 Why Spend One More Dollar for M&S? Observations on the Return of Investment 287Steven Gordon, Ivar Oswalt, and Tim Cooley 15 Does M&S Help? Operationalizing Cost Avoidance and Proficiency Evaluations 325Steven Gordon, Tim Cooley, and Ivar Oswalt Part VI Policy 351 16 Building a National Modeling and Simulation (M&S) Coalition 353Randall B. Garrett, James A. Robb, Richard J. Severinghaus, and Richard Fujimoto Index 373

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical guide for engineers and students that covers a wide range of optical design and optical metrology topics Optical Engineering Science offers a comprehensive and authoritative review of the science of optical engineering. The book bridges the gap between the basic theoretical principles of classical optics and the practical application of optics in the commercial world. Written by a noted expert in the field, the book examines a range of practical topics that are related to optical design, optical metrology and manufacturing. The book fills a void in the literature by coving all three topics in a single volume. Optical engineering science is at the foundation of the design of commercial optical systems, such as mobile phone cameras and digital cameras as well as highly sophisticated instruments for commercial and research applications.It spans the design, manufacture and testing of space or aerospace instrumentation to the optical sensor technology for environmental monitoTable of ContentsPreface xxi Glossary xxv About the Companion Website xxix 1 Geometrical Optics 1 1.1 Geometrical Optics – Ray and Wave Optics 1 1.2 Fermat’s Principle and the Eikonal Equation 2 1.3 Sequential Geometrical Optics – A Generalised Description 3 1.4 Behaviour of Simple Optical Components and Surfaces 10 1.5 Paraxial Approximation and Gaussian Optics 15 1.6 Matrix Ray Tracing 16 Further Reading 21 2 Apertures Stops and Simple Instruments 23 2.1 Function of Apertures and Stops 23 2.2 Aperture Stops, Chief, and Marginal Rays 23 2.3 Entrance Pupil and Exit Pupil 25 2.4 Telecentricity 27 2.5 Vignetting 27 2.6 Field Stops and Other Stops 28 2.7 Tangential and Sagittal Ray Fans 28 2.8 Two Dimensional Ray Fans and Anamorphic Optics 28 2.9 Optical Invariant and Lagrange Invariant 30 2.10 Eccentricity Variable 31 2.11 Image Formation in Simple Optical Systems 31 Further Reading 36 3 Monochromatic Aberrations 37 3.1 Introduction 37 3.2 Breakdown of the Paraxial Approximation and Third Order Aberrations 37 3.3 Aberration and Optical Path Difference 41 3.4 General Third Order Aberration Theory 46 3.5 Gauss-Seidel Aberrations 47 3.6 Summary of Third Order Aberrations 55 Further Reading 58 4 Aberration Theory and Chromatic Aberration 59 4.1 General Points 59 4.2 Aberration Due to a Single Refractive Surface 60 4.3 Reflection from a Spherical Mirror 64 4.4 Refraction Due to Optical Components 67 4.5 The Effect of Pupil Position on Element Aberration 78 4.6 Abbe Sine Condition 81 4.7 Chromatic Aberration 83 4.8 Hierarchy of Aberrations 92 Further Reading 94 5 Aspheric Surfaces and Zernike Polynomials 95 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Aspheric Surfaces 95 5.3 Zernike Polynomials 100 Further Reading 109 6 Diffraction, Physical Optics, and Image Quality 111 6.1 Introduction 111 6.2 The Eikonal Equation 112 6.3 Huygens Wavelets and the Diffraction Formulae 112 6.4 Diffraction in the Fraunhofer Approximation 115 6.5 Diffraction in an Optical System – the Airy Disc 116 6.6 The Impact of Aberration on System Resolution 120 6.7 Laser Beam Propagation 123 6.8 Fresnel Diffraction 130 6.9 Diffraction and Image Quality 132 Further Reading 138 7 Radiometry and Photometry 139 7.1 Introduction 139 7.2 Radiometry 139 7.3 Scattering of Light from Rough Surfaces 146 7.4 Scattering of Light from Smooth Surfaces 147 7.5 Radiometry and Object Field Illumination 151 7.6 Radiometric Measurements 155 7.7 Photometry 158 Further Reading 166 8 Polarisation and Birefringence 169 8.1 Introduction 169 8.2 Polarisation 170 8.3 Birefringence 178 8.4 Polarisation Devices 187 8.5 Analysis of Polarisation Components 191 8.6 Stress-induced Birefringence 196 Further Reading 197 9 Optical Materials 199 9.1 Introduction 199 9.2 Refractive Properties of Optical Materials 200 9.3 Transmission Characteristics of Materials 212 9.4 Thermomechanical Properties 215 9.5 Material Quality 219 9.6 Exposure to Environmental Attack 221 9.7 Material Processing 221 Further Reading 222 10 Coatings and Filters 223 10.1 Introduction 223 10.2 Properties of Thin Films 223 10.3 Filters 232 10.4 Design of Thin Film Filters 244 10.5 Thin Film Materials 246 10.6 Thin Film Deposition Processes 247 Further Reading 250 11 Prisms and Dispersion Devices 251 11.1 Introduction 251 11.2 Prisms 251 11.3 Analysis of Diffraction Gratings 257 11.4 Diffractive Optics 273 11.5 Grating Fabrication 274 Further Reading 276 12 Lasers and Laser Applications 277 12.1 Introduction 277 12.2 Stimulated Emission Schemes 279 12.3 Laser Cavities 284 12.4 Taxonomy of Lasers 293 12.5 List of Laser Types 298 12.6 Laser Applications 301 Further Reading 308 13 Optical Fibres and Waveguides 309 13.1 Introduction 309 13.2 Geometrical Description of Fibre Propagation 310 13.3 Waveguides and Modes 317 13.4 Single Mode Optical Fibres 324 13.5 Optical Fibre Materials 329 13.6 Coupling of Light into Fibres 330 13.7 Fibre Splicing and Connection 334 13.8 Fibre Splitters, Combiners, and Couplers 335 13.9 Polarisation and Polarisation Maintaining Fibres 335 13.10 Focal Ratio Degradation 336 13.11 Periodic Structures in Fibres 336 13.12 Fibre Manufacture 338 13.13 Fibre Applications 339 Further Reading 339 14 Detectors 341 14.1 Introduction 341 14.2 Detector Types 341 14.3 Noise in Detectors 354 14.4 Radiometry and Detectors 364 14.5 Array Detectors in Instrumentation 365 Further Reading 368 15 Optical Instrumentation – Imaging Devices 369 15.1 Introduction 369 15.2 The Design of Eyepieces 370 15.3 Microscope Objectives 378 15.4 Telescopes 381 15.5 Camera Systems 392 Further Reading 405 16 Interferometers and Related Instruments 407 16.1 Introduction 407 16.2 Background 407 16.3 Classical Interferometers 409 16.4 Calibration 418 16.5 Interferometry and Null Tests 420 16.6 Interferometry and Phase Shifting 425 16.7 Miscellaneous Characterisation Techniques 426 Further Reading 433 17 Spectrometers and Related Instruments 435 17.1 Introduction 435 17.2 Basic Spectrometer Designs 436 17.3 Time Domain Spectrometry 454 Further Reading 457 18 Optical Design 459 18.1 Introduction 459 18.2 Design Philosophy 461 18.3 Optical Design Tools 467 18.4 Non-Sequential Modelling 487 18.5 Afterword 495 Further Reading 495 19 Mechanical and Thermo-Mechanical Modelling 497 19.1 Introduction 497 19.2 Basic Elastic Theory 498 19.3 Basic Analysis of Mechanical Distortion 501 19.4 Basic Analysis of Thermo-Mechanical Distortion 517 19.5 Finite Element Analysis 525 Further Reading 529 20 Optical Component Manufacture 531 20.1 Introduction 531 20.2 Conventional Figuring of Optical Surfaces 532 20.3 Specialist Shaping and Polishing Techniques 539 20.4 Diamond Machining 541 20.5 Edging and Bonding 547 20.6 Form Error and Surface Roughness 550 20.7 Standards and Drawings 551 Further Reading 557 21 System Integration and Alignment 559 21.1 Introduction 559 21.2 Component Mounting 561 21.3 Optical Bonding 573 21.4 Alignment 577 21.5 Cleanroom Assembly 583 Further Reading 586 22 Optical Test and Verification 587 22.1 Introduction 587 22.2 Facilities 589 22.3 Environmental Testing 591 22.4 Geometrical Testing 595 22.5 Image Quality Testing 603 22.6 Radiometric Tests 604 22.7 Material and Component Testing 609 Further Reading 612 Index 613

Read more less

Book SynopsisA complete and comprehensive reference on modulation and signal processing for visible light communication This informative new book on state-of-the-art visible light communication (VLC) provides, for the first time, a systematical and advanced treatment of modulation and signal processing for VLC. Visible Light Communications: Modulation and Signal Processing offers a practical guide to designing VLC, linking academic research with commercial applications. In recent years, VLC has attracted attention from academia and industry since it has many advantages over the traditional radio frequency, including wide unregulated bandwidth, high security, and low cost. It is a promising complementary technique in 5G and beyond wireless communications, especially in indoor applications. However, lighting constraints have not been fully considered in the open literature when considering VLC system design, and its importance has been underestimated. That's why this boTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Introduction to Visible Light Communications 1 1.1 History 1 1.2 Advantages and applications 4 1.3 Overview of modulation and signal processing 6 1.4 Standards 10 2 Visible Light Communications: Channel and Capacity 17 2.1 LED characteristics 17 2.1.1 Operation principles 19 2.1.2 LED nonlinearity 21 2.2 LED lighting constraints 23 2.2.1 Dimming control 23 2.2.2 Chromaticity control 25 2.2.3 Flicker-free communication 26 2.3 Photodiode characteristics 27 2.4 Propagation links 29 2.4.1 LOS link 31 2.4.2 NLOS link 32 2.5 Noise in VLC systems 33 2.6 Channel capacity 35 2.6.1 Channel models 36 2.6.2 Capacity bounds for free-space optical intensity channel 38 2.6.3 Capacity bounds for discrete-time Poisson channel 47 2.6.4 Capacity bounds for improved free-space intensity channel 50 2.7 Conclusion 53 3 Single Carrier/Carrierless Modulation and Coding 57 3.1 Pulse amplitude modulation 57 3.2 Pulse position modulation 62 3.3 Carrierless amplitude phase modulation 68 3.3.1 Principles of CAP 69 3.3.2 Multidimensional CAP 73 3.4 Modulation and coding schemes for dimmable VLC 77 3.4.1 Modulation schemes for dimmable VLC 78 3.4.2 Coding schemes for dimmable VLC 80 3.5 Conclusion 82 4 Multicarrier Modulation 89 4.1 Optical OFDM for visible light communications 90 4.1.1 DC-biased optical OFDM 90 4.1.2 ACO-OFDM and PAM-DMT 93 4.1.3 Unipolar OFDM 97 4.1.4 Performance comparison 98 4.2 Performance enhancement for optical OFDM 99 4.2.1 DC bias and scaling optimization 100 4.2.2 LED nonlinearity mitigation 103 4.2.3 PAPR reduction 107 4.3 Spectrum- and power-efficient optical OFDM 111 4.3.1 Hybrid optical OFDM 111 4.3.2 Enhanced U-OFDM 118 4.3.3 Layered ACO-OFDM 121 4.4 Optical OFDM under lighting constraints 131 4.4.1 Pulse width modulation 133 4.4.2 Reverse polarity optical OFDM 136 4.4.3 Asymmetrical hybrid optical OFDM 137 4.5 Conclusion 142 5 Multicolor Modulation 147 5.1 Color shift keying 147 5.1.1 Constellation 148 5.1.2 Color calibration 151 5.1.3 Constellation optimization 152 5.1.4 CSK with Quad-LED 155 5.2 CSK with coded modulation 156 5.3 Wavelength division multiplexing with predistorion 159 5.3.1 System model 160 5.3.2 Receiver-side predistortion 161 5.3.3 Performance evaluation 164 5.4 Conclusion 166 6 Optical MIMO 169 6.1 Non-imaging optical MIMO techniques 170 6.1.1 Channel response 170 6.1.2 Optical MIMO techniques 171 6.1.3 Performance comparison 175 6.2 Imaging optical MIMO techniques 178 6.3 Multiuser precoding techniques 180 6.4 Optical MIMO-OFDM 190 6.4.1 DCO-OFDM-based MU-MIMO VLC 193 6.4.2 ACO-OFDM-based MU-MIMO VLC 194 6.4.3 Performance evaluation 195 6.5 Conclusion 197 7 Signal Processing and Optimization 201 7.1 Sum-rate maximization for the multi-chip-based VLC system 201 7.1.1 System model 202 7.1.2 Constraints on illumination and communication 203 7.1.3 Sum-rate maximization 205 7.1.4 Performance evaluation 208 7.2 Heterogeneous VLC-WiFi optimization 212 7.2.1 System model 213 7.2.2 Efficient VHO scheme 214 7.2.3 Performance evaluation 219 7.3 Signal estimation and modulation design for VLC with SDGN 223 7.3.1 Signal estimation for VLC with SDGN 223 7.3.2 Suboptimal estimation for VLC with SDGN 228 7.3.3 Efficient signal design for VLC with SDGN 230 7.4 Conclusion 236 8 Optical Camera Communication: Fundamentals 239 8.1 Why OCC 239 8.1.1 Wide spectrum 240 8.1.2 Image-sensor-based receiver 240 8.1.3 Advantages of image sensor receiver 241 8.1.4 Challenges for OCC implementation 244 8.2 OCC applications: beyond imaging 246 8.2.1 Indoor localization 246 8.2.2 Intelligent transportation 249 8.2.3 Screen–camera communication 250 8.2.4 Privacy protection 251 8.3 Fundamentals of OCC 252 8.3.1 Optical imaging system 252 8.3.2 Image sensor architecture 253 8.3.3 Noise characteristics in the image-sensor-based receiver 261 8.3.4 Channel model for OCC 270 8.4 Capacity bounds for OCC 275 8.4.1 SISO-OCC channel capacity with M-SDGN 275 8.4.2 Capacity-achieving probability measurement with M-SDGN 276 8.4.3 Capacity of imaging optical MIMO systems with bounded inputs 280 8.5 Outage capacity for OCC with misalignment 284 8.6 Conclusion 285 9 Optical Camera Communication: Modulation and System Design 291 9.1 Coding and decoding 292 9.1.1 Multilevel coding and multi-stage decoding 293 9.1.2 Single-level coding and joint decoding 295 9.2 Modulation schemes 297 9.2.1 Undersampling-based modulation 298 9.2.2 Rolling shutter effect-based modulation 301 9.2.3 Spatial OFDM 304 9.2.4 Spatial WPDM 307 9.3 System impairment factors 309 9.3.1 Impairment factors in spatial OFDM 309 9.3.2 Impairment mitigation techniques 322 9.4 Synchronization in OCC 329 9.4.1 Synchronization challenges 329 9.4.2 Per-line tracking and inter-frame coding 331 9.4.3 Rateless coding 333 9.5 OCC system experimental platform 336 9.5.1 Design and implementation of a real-time OCC system 336 9.6 Conclusion 347 10 Index 353

Read more less

Book SynopsisA reliable and focused treatment of the emergent technology of fifth generation (5G) networks This book provides an understanding of the most recent developments in 5G, from both theoretical and industrial perspectives. It identifies and discusses technical challenges and recent results related to improving capacity and spectral efficiency on the radio interface side, and operations management on the core network side. It covers both existing network technologies and those currently in development in three major areas of 5G: spectrum extension, spatial spectrum utilization, and core network and network topology management. It explores new spectrum opportunities; the capability of radio access technology; and the operation of network infrastructure and heterogeneous QoE provisioning. 5G Networks: Fundamental Requirements, Enabling Technologies, and Operations Management is split into five sections: Physical Layer for 5G Radio Interface Technologies; Radio Table of ContentsForeword xxi Preface xxv Author Bios xxvii List of Contributors xxxi List of Abbreviations xxxvii Introduction 1 Part I Physical Layer for 5G Radio Interface Technologies 13 1 Emerging Technologies in Software, Hardware, and Management Aspects Toward the 5G Era: Trends and Challenges 15 Ioannis-Prodromos Belikaidis, Andreas Georgakopoulos, Evangelos Kosmatos, Stavroula Vassaki, Orestis-Andreas Liakopoulos, Vassilis Foteinos, Panagiotis Vlacheas, and Panagiotis Demestichas 1.1 Introduction 15 1.2 5G Requirements and Technology Trends 17 1.3 Status and Challenges in Hardware and Software Development 20 1.4 5G Network Management Aspects Enhanced with Machine Learning 38 1.5 Conclusion 45 References 45 2 Waveform Design for 5G and Beyond 51Ali Fatih Demir, Mohamed Elkourdi,Mostafa Ibrahim, and Huseyin Arslan 2.1 Introduction 51 2.2 Fundamentals of the 5G Waveform Design 52 2.3 Major Waveform Candidates for 5G and Beyond 58 2.4 Summary 70 2.5 Conclusions 73 References 73 3 Full-Duplex System Design for 5G Access 77Shu-ping Yeh, Jingwen Bai, PingWang, Feng Xue, Yang-seok Choi, Shilpa Talwar, Sung-en Chiu, and Vinod Kristem 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Self-Interference Cancellation 79 3.3 FD System Design: Opportunities and Challenges 82 3.4 Designing the FD System 84 3.5 System-Level Performance Analysis 108 3.6 Conclusions and Future Directions 125 References 130 4 Nonorthogonal Multiple Access for 5G 135Linglong Dai, Bichai Wang, Ruicheng Jiao, Zhiguo Ding, Shuangfeng Han, and Chih-Lin I 4.1 Introduction 135 4.2 Basic Principles and Advantages of NOMA 137 4.3 Power-Domain NOMA 142 4.4 Code-Domain NOMA 155 4.5 Other NOMA Schemes 170 4.6 Comparison and Trade-Off Analysis of NOMA Solutions 178 4.7 Performance Evaluations and Transmission Experiments of NOMA 181 4.8 Opportunities and Future Research Trends 185 4.9 Conclusions 189 References 189 5 Code Design for Multiuser MIMO 205Guanghui Song, Yuhao Chi, Kui Cai, Ying Li, and Jun Cheng 5.1 Introduction 206 5.2 Multiuser Repetition-Aided IRA Coding Scheme 207 5.3 Iterative Decoding and EXIT Analysis 209 5.4 Code Optimization Procedure 217 5.5 Numerical Results and Comparisons 218 5.6 Conclusion 230 References 231 6 Physical Layer Techniques for 5G Wireless Security 237Batu K. Chalise, Himal A. Suraweera, Gan Zheng, and Risto Wichman 6.1 Introduction 237 6.2 5G Physical Layer Architecture 241 6.3 Secure Full-Duplex Receiver Jamming 247 6.4 Secure Full-Duplex Bidirectional Communications 255 6.5 Secure Full-Duplex Relay Communications 259 6.6 Future Directions and Open Issues 266 6.7 Conclusion 268 References 269 7 Codebook-Based Beamforming Protocols for 5G Millimeter Wave Communications 275Anggrit Dewangkara Yudha Pinangkis, Kishor Chandra, and R. Venkatesha Prasad 7.1 Introduction 275 7.2 Beamforming Architecture 278 7.3 Beam Searching Algorithm 280 7.4 Codebook Design 286 7.5 Beamforming Evaluation 290 7.6 Conclusion 291 References 293 Part II Radio Access Technology for 5G Networks 299 8 Universal Access in 5G Networks: Potential Challenges and Opportunities for Urban and Rural Environments 301Syed Ali Hassan, Muhammad Shahmeer Omar,Muhammad Ali Imran, Junaid Qadir, and Dushantha Nalin K. Jayakody 8.1 Introduction 301 8.2 Access for Urban Environments 302 8.3 Providing Access to Rural Areas 312 8.4 Conclusions 320 References 321 9 Network Slicing for 5G Networks 327Xavier Costa-Pérez, Andrés Garcia-Saavedra, Fabio Giust, Vincenzo Sciancalepore, Xi Li, Zarrar Yousaf, and Marco Liebsch 9.1 Introduction 327 9.2 End-to-End Network Slicing 328 9.3 Network Slicing MANO 334 9.4 Network Slicing at the Mobile Edge 343 9.5 Network Slicing at the Mobile Transport 349 9.6 Network Slicing at the Mobile Cloud 358 9.7 Acknowledgment 364 References 365 10 The Evolution Toward Ethernet-Based Converged 5G RAN 371Jouni Korhonen 10.1 Introduction to RAN Transport Network 372 10.2 Evolving RAN Toward 5G Requirements 384 10.3 Ethernet-Based 5G RAN 399 10.4 Summary 418 References 418 11 Energy-Efficient 5G Networks Using Joint Energy Harvesting and Scheduling 427Ahmad Alsharoa, Abdulkadir Celik, and Ahmed E. Kamal 11.1 Introduction 427 11.2 System Model 432 11.3 Problem Formulation and Solution 436 11.4 Low-Complexity Algorithm 439 11.5 Simulation Results 441 11.6 Chapter Summary 445 References 446 Part III 5G Network Interworking and Core Network Advancements 453 12 Characterizing and Learning the Mobile Data Traffic in Cellular Network 455Rongpeng Li, Zhifeng Zhao, Chen Qi, and Honggang Zhang 12.1 Understanding the Traffic Nature: A Revisiting to 𝛼-Stable Models 455 12.2 The Traffic Predictability in Cellular Networks 470 12.3 The Prediction of Application-Level Traffic 476 12.4 Related Works 490 12.5 Conclusion 493 References 493 13 Network Softwarization View of 5G Networks 499Takashi Shimizu, Akihiro Nakao, and Kohei Satoh 13.1 Introduction 499 13.2 Key Concept of 5G 500 13.3 Network Softwarization View of 5G Networks 501 13.4 Brief History of Network Softwarization and Slicing 503 13.5 Issues for Slicing Towards 5G 504 13.6 Information-Centric Network (ICN) Enabled by Network Softwarization 509 13.7 Studies in ITU-T SG13 Focus Group on IMT-2020 515 13.8 Conclusion 515 References 515 14 Machine-Type Communication in the 5G Era: Massive and Ultrareliable Connectivity Forces of Evolution, Revolution, and Complementarity 519Renaud Di Francesco and Peter Karlsson 14.1 Overview 519 14.2 Introduction 520 14.3 Demand Analysis 522 14.4 Reviewing the Standardization Path So Far 532 14.5 Conclusion on Machine-Type 5G 537 References 538 Part IV Vertical 5G Applications 543 15 Social-Aware Content Delivery in Device-to-Device Underlay Networks 545Chen Xu, Caixia Gao, Zhenyu Zhou, ShahidMumtaz, and Jonathan Rodriguez 15.1 Introduction 545 15.2 Related Works 548 15.3 System Model 552 15.4 Problem Formulation 557 15.5 Social Network-Based Content Delivery Matching Algorithm for D2D Underlay Networks 558 15.6 Numerical Results 565 15.7 Conclusions 569 References 570 16 Service-Oriented Architecture for IoT Home Area Networking in 5G 577Mohd Rozaini Abd Rahim, Rozeha A. Rashid, AhmadM. Rateb, Mohd Adib Sarijari, Ahmad Shahidan Abdullah, Abdul Hadi Fikri Abdul Hamid, Hamdan Sayuti, and Norsheila Fisal 16.1 Introduction 577 16.2 Service-Oriented Architecture 579 16.3 Related Work 581 16.4 Service-Oriented Architecture for Home Area Network (SoHAN) 584 16.5 Performance Evaluation 591 16.6 Conclusion 596 References 597 17 Provisioning Unlicensed LAA Interface for Smart Grid Applications 603Saba Al-Rubaye and John Cosmas 17.1 Introduction 603 17.2 Smart Grid Architecture-Based 5G Communications 605 17.3 Bandwidth UtilizationMethod 608 17.4 System Implementation and Simulation Platform 615 17.5 Summary and Conclusions 620 References 621 Part V R&D and 5G Standardization 625 18 5G Communication System: A Network Operator Perspective 627Bruno Jacobfeuerborn and Frank H. P. Fitzek 18.1 Introduction 627 18.2 Softwarization for the 5G Communication System 634 18.3 5G Holistic Testbed 642 18.4 5G as Game Changer in the Value Chain 647 18.5 Conclusion 647 18.6 Acknowledgments 648 References 649 19 Toward All-IT 5G End-to-End Infrastructure 653Alex Jinsung Choi, Jinhyo Park, Sungho Jo, and Sangsoo Jeong 19.1 Introduction 653 19.2 Development Status and Lesson Learned 655 19.3 Infrastructure Evolution of SK Telecom for 5G: ATSCALE 664 19.4 Detailed Architecture and Key Enabling Technology 668 19.5 Value Proposition 683 19.6 Summary and Conclusion 687 References 687 20 Standardization: The Road to 5G 691M. P. Galante and G. Romano 20.1 The Role of Standardization 691 20.2 The Main Standardization Bodies 693 20.3 5G Standardization Process 694 20.4 ITU-R 697 20.5 3GPP 699 References 705 Index 709

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book approaches the topic area of the Internet of Things (IoT) from the perspective of the five types of human communication. Through this perspective on the human communication types, the book aims to specifically address how IoT technologies can support humans and their endeavors. The book explores the fields of sensors, wireless, physiology, biology, wearables, and the Internet. This book is organized with five sections, each covering a central theme; Section 1: The basics of human bond communication Section 2: Relevance IoT, BAN and PAN Section 3: Applications of HBC Section 4: Security, Privacy and Regulatory Challenges Section 5: The Big Picture (Where do we go from here?)Table of ContentsList of Contributors ix About the Editors xi Preface xv Abbreviations xvii 1 Introduction to Human Bond Communication 1Sudhir Dixit and Ramjee Prasad 2 General Concepts Behind Human Bond Communication 11Liljana Gavrilovska, Valentin Rakovic, and Sudhir Dixit 3 Advanced Reconfigurable 5G Architectures for Human Bond Communication 41Enrico Del Re, Simone Morosi, Luca Simone Ronga, Lorenzo Mucchi, Sara Jayousi, and Federica Paganelli 4 Data Mining of the Human Being 59Mauro De Sanctis and Pierpaolo Loreti 5 Human]Centric IoT Networks 71Albena Mihovska, Ramjee Prasad, and Milica Pejanovic 6 Body as a Network Node: Key is the Oral Cavity 87Marina Ruggieri and Gianpaolo Sannino 7 Human Bond Communication Using Cognitive Radio Approach for Efficient Spectrum Utilization 97Sachin Sharma and Seshadri Mohan 8 Technology Advancement and Integration in the Context of Wildlife Conservation 115Pradeep K. Mathur, Bilal Habib, and Prateek Mathur 9 An Investigation of Security and Privacy for Human Bond Communications 131Geir M. Køien 10 The Internet of Everything and Beyond: The Interplay between Things and Humans 173Helga E. Melcherts 11 Human Bond Communications in Health: Ethical and Legal Issues 187Ernestina Cianca and Maurizia De Bellis 12 Human Bond Communication: A New and Unexplored Frontier for Intellectual Property and Information and Communication Technology Law 197Edoardo Di Maggio and Domenico Siciliano 13 Predicting the Future of ICT: A Historical Perspective 209Silvano Pupolin 14 Human Bond Communication Beyond 2050 227Flemming Hynkemejer and Sudhir Dixit Index 243

Read more less

Book Synopsis

Read more less

Book SynopsisIntroduces a revolutionary, quadratic-programming based approach tosolving long-standing problems in motion planning and control of redundant manipulators This book describes a novel quadratic programming approach to solving redundancy resolutions problems with redundant manipulators. Known as ``QP-unified motion planning and control of redundant manipulators'' theory, it systematically solves difficult optimization problems of inequality-constrained motion planning and control of redundant manipulators that have plagued robotics engineers and systems designers for more than a quarter century. An example of redundancy resolution could involve a robotic limb with six joints, or degrees of freedom (DOFs), with which to position an object.As only five numbers are required to specify the position and orientation of the object, the robot can move with one remaining DOF through practically infinite poses while performing a specified task.In this case redundancy resolution refers to the proTable of ContentsList of Figures xiii List of Tables xxv Preface xxvii Acknowledgments xxxiii Acronyms xxxv Part I Pseudoinverse-Based ZD Approach 1 1 Redundancy Resolution via Pseudoinverse and ZD Models 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Problem Formulation and ZD Models 5 1.2.1 Problem Formulation 5 1.2.2 Continuous-Time ZD Model 6 1.2.3 Discrete-Time ZD Models 7 1.2.3.1 Euler-Type DTZD Model with J̇ (t) Known 7 1.2.3.2 Euler-Type DTZD Model with J̇ (t) Unknown 7 1.2.3.3 Taylor-Type DTZD Models 8 1.3 ZD Applications to Different-Type Robot Manipulators 9 1.3.1 Application to a Five-Link Planar Robot Manipulator 9 1.3.2 Application to a Three-Link Planar Robot Manipulator 12 1.4 Chapter Summary 14 Part II Inverse-Free Simple Approach 15 2 G1 Type Scheme to JVL Inverse Kinematics 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Preliminaries and RelatedWork 18 2.3 Scheme Formulation 18 2.4 Computer Simulations 19 2.4.1 Square-Path Tracking Task 19 2.4.2 “Z”-Shaped Path Tracking Task 22 2.5 Physical Experiments 25 2.6 Chapter Summary 26 3 D1G1 Type Scheme to JAL Inverse Kinematics 27 3.1 Introduction 27 3.2 Preliminaries and RelatedWork 28 3.3 Scheme Formulation 28 3.4 Computer Simulations 29 3.4.1 Rhombus-Path Tracking Task 29 3.4.1.1 Verifications 29 3.4.1.2 Comparisons 30 3.4.2 Triangle-Path Tracking Task 32 3.5 Chapter Summary 36 4 Z1G1 Type Scheme to JAL Inverse Kinematics 37 4.1 Introduction 37 4.2 Problem Formulation and Z1G1 Type Scheme 37 4.3 Computer Simulations 38 4.3.1 Desired Initial Position 38 4.3.1.1 Isosceles-Trapezoid Path Tracking 40 4.3.1.2 Isosceles-Triangle Path Tracking 41 4.3.1.3 Square Path Tracking 42 4.3.2 Nondesired Initial Position 44 4.4 Physical Experiments 45 4.5 Chapter Summary 45 Part III QP Approach and Unification 47 5 Redundancy Resolution via QP Approach and Unification 49 5.1 Introduction 49 5.2 Robotic Formulation 50 5.3 Handling Joint Physical Limits 52 5.3.1 Joint-Velocity Level 52 5.3.2 Joint-Acceleration Level 52 5.4 Avoiding Obstacles 53 5.5 Various Performance Indices 54 5.5.1 Resolved at Joint-Velocity Level 55 5.5.1.1 MVN scheme 55 5.5.1.2 RMP scheme 55 5.5.1.3 MKE scheme 55 5.5.2 Resolved at Joint-Acceleration Level 55 5.5.2.1 MAN scheme 55 5.5.2.2 MTN scheme 56 5.5.2.3 IIWT scheme 56 5.6 Unified QP Formulation 56 5.7 Online QP Solutions 57 5.7.1 Traditional QP Routines 57 5.7.2 Compact QP Method 57 5.7.3 Dual Neural Network 57 5.7.4 LVI-Aided Primal-Dual Neural Network 57 5.7.5 Numerical Algorithms E47 and 94LVI 59 5.7.5.1 Numerical Algorithm E47 59 5.7.5.2 Numerical Algorithm 94LVI 59 5.8 Computer Simulations 61 5.9 Chapter Summary 66 Part IV Illustrative JVL QP Schemes and Performances 67 6 Varying Joint-Velocity Limits Handled by QP 69 6.1 Introduction 69 6.2 Preliminaries and Problem Formulation 70 6.2.1 Six-DOF Planar Robot System 70 6.2.2 Varying Joint-Velocity Limits 73 6.3 9 4LVI Assisted QP Solution 76 6.4 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 77 6.4.1 Line-Segment Path-Tracking Task 77 6.4.2 Elliptical-Path Tracking Task 85 6.4.3 Simulations with Faster Tasks 87 6.4.3.1 Line-Segment-Path-Tracking Task 87 6.4.3.2 Elliptical-Path-Tracking Task 89 6.5 Chapter Summary 92 7 Feedback-AidedMinimum Joint Motion 95 7.1 Introduction 95 7.2 Preliminaries and Problem Formulation 97 7.2.1 Minimum Joint Motion Performance Index 97 7.2.2 Varying Joint-Velocity Limits 100 7.3 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 101 7.3.1 “M”-Shaped Path-Tracking Task 101 7.3.1.1 Simulation Comparisons with Different ;;p 101 7.3.1.2 Simulation Comparisons with Different ;; 103 7.3.1.3 Simulative and Experimental Verifications of FAMJM Scheme 105 7.3.2 “P”-Shaped Path Tracking Task 107 7.3.3 Comparisons with Pseudoinverse-Based Approach 108 7.3.3.1 Comparison with Tracking Task of Larger “M”-Shaped Path 110 7.3.3.2 Comparison with Tracking Task of Larger “P”-Shaped Path 112 7.4 Chapter Summary 119 8 QP Based Manipulator State Adjustment 121 8.1 Introduction 121 8.2 Preliminaries and Scheme Formulation 122 8.3 QP Solution and Control of Robot Manipulator 124 8.4 Computer Simulations and Comparisons 125 8.4.1 State Adjustment without ZIV Constraint 125 8.4.2 State Adjustment with ZIV Constraint 128 8.5 Physical Experiments 132 8.6 Chapter Summary 136 Part V Self-Motion Planning 137 9 QP-Based Self-Motion Planning 139 9.1 Introduction 139 9.2 Preliminaries and QP Formulation 140 9.2.1 Self-Motion Criterion 140 9.2.2 QP Formulation 141 9.3 LVIAPDNN Assisted QP Solution 141 9.4 PUMA560 Based Computer Simulations 142 9.4.1 From Initial Configuration A to Desired Configuration B 144 9.4.2 From Initial Configuration A to Desired Configuration C 146 9.4.3 From Initial Configuration E to Desired Configuration F 147 9.5 PA10 Based Computer Simulations 152 9.6 Chapter Summary 158 10 PseudoinverseMethod and Singularities Discussed 161 10.1 Introduction 161 10.2 Preliminaries and Scheme Formulation 162 10.2.1 Modified Performance Index for SMP 163 10.2.2 QP-Based SMP Scheme Formulation 163 10.3 LVIAPDNN Assisted QP Solution with Discussion 164 10.4 Computer Simulations 167 10.4.1 Three-Link Redundant PlanarManipulator 168 10.4.1.1 Verifications 168 10.4.1.2 Comparisons 171 10.4.2 PUMA560 Robot Manipulator 172 10.4.3 PA10 Robot Manipulator 176 10.5 Chapter Summary 180 Appendix 181 Equivalence Analysis in Limit Situation 181 11 Self-Motion Planning with ZIV Constraint 183 11.1 Introduction 183 11.2 Preliminaries and Scheme Formulation 184 11.2.1 Handling Joint Physical Limits 184 11.2.2 QP Reformulation 187 11.2.3 Design of ZIV Constraint 187 11.3 E47 Assisted QP Solution 188 11.4 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 189 11.5 Chapter Summary 197 Part VI Manipulability Maximization 199 12 Manipulability-Maximizing SMP Scheme 201 12.1 Introduction 201 12.2 Scheme Formulation 202 12.2.1 Derivation of Manipulability Index 202 12.2.2 Handling Physical Limits 203 12.2.3 QP Formulation 203 12.3 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 204 12.3.1 Computer Simulations 204 12.3.2 Physical Experiments 205 12.4 Chapter Summary 209 13 Time-Varying Coefficient AidedMMScheme 211 13.1 Introduction 211 13.2 Manipulability-Maximization with Time-Varying Coefficient 212 13.2.1 Nonzero Initial/Final Joint-Velocity Problem 212 13.2.2 Scheme Formulation 213 13.2.3 94LVI Assisted QP Solution 215 13.3 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 216 13.3.1 Computer Simulations 216 13.3.2 Physical Experiments 224 13.4 Chapter Summary 226 Part VII Encoder Feedback and Joystick Control 227 14 QP Based Encoder Feedback Control 229 14.1 Introduction 229 14.2 Preliminaries and Scheme Formulation 231 14.2.1 Joint Description 231 14.2.2 OMPFC Scheme 231 14.3 Computer Simulations 234 14.3.1 Petal-Shaped Path-Tracking Task 234 14.3.2 Comparative Simulations 238 14.3.2.1 Petal-Shaped Path Tracking Using Another Group of Joint-Angle Limits 238 14.3.2.2 Petal-Shaped Path Tracking via the Method 4 (M4) Algorithm 238 14.3.3 Hexagonal-Path-Tracking Task 239 14.4 Physical Experiments 240 14.5 Chapter Summary 248 15 QP Based Joystick Control 251 15.1 Introduction 251 15.2 Preliminaries and Hardware System 251 15.2.1 Velocity-Specified Inverse Kinematics Problem 252 15.2.2 Joystick-Controlled Manipulator Hardware System 252 15.3 Scheme Formulation 253 15.3.1 Cosine-Aided Position-to-VelocityMapping 253 15.3.2 Real-Time Joystick-Controlled Motion Planning 254 15.4 Computer Simulations and Physical Experiments 254 15.4.1 Movement Toward Four Directions 255 15.4.2 “MVN” LetterWriting 259 15.5 Chapter Summary 259 References 261 Index 277

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a concise and thorough reference for designing electrical and electronic systems that employ adjustable speed drives Electrical and electronic systems that employ adjustable speed drives are being increasingly used in present-day automation applications. They are considered by many application engineers as one of the most interfering components, especially in a contemporarily faced industrial environment. This book fills the gap between the high-level academic knowledge in the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) field and the recommended practical rules for assuring electromagnetic compatibility margin. It focuses on finding and formulating the issues that often occur with the generation and propagation of conducted emission in AC motor drives fed by frequency converters, rather than proposing specific solutions for dealing with them. It also features explanations of selected academic backgrounds of EMC and presents practical case studies. The book starTable of Contents1 Introduction to Conducted Emission in Adjustable Speed Drives 1 2 Conducted Emission Origins in Switch-Mode Power Converters 21 3 Conducted Emission Generation by Frequency Converter in ASD 45 4 Propagation of Motor-Side-Originated Conducted Emission Toward the Power Grid 81 5 Modeling of Conducted Emission in ASD 101 6 Broadband Behavior of Fundamental Components of ASD 137 7 Impact of Motor Feeding Cable on CMCurrents Generated in ASD 203

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book presents highly technical approaches to the probabilistic physics of failure analysis and applications to accelerated life and degradation testing to reliability prediction and assessment. Beside reviewing a select set of important failure mechanisms, the book covers basic and advanced methods of performing accelerated life test and accelerated degradation tests and analyzing the test data. The book includes a large number of very useful examples to help readers understand complicated methods described. Finally, MATLAB, R and OpenBUGS computer scripts are provided and discussed to support complex computational probabilistic analyses introduced.Table of Contents Preface xi 1 Overview of Probabilistic Physics-of-Failure Approach to Reliability 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Overview of Physics-of-Failure Modeling 2 1.3 Important Forms of PoF Models 4 1.4 PPoF Approach to Life Assessment 6 1.5 Accelerated Testing in PPoF Model Development 8 1.6 Organization of the Book 10 References 11 2 Summary of Mechanisms of Failure and Associated PoF Models 13 2.1 Introduction 13 2.2 Fatigue 15 2.3 Wear 60 2.4 Creep 81 2.5 Corrosion 90 References 97 3 Types of Accelerated Testing and Modeling Concepts 101 3.1 Introduction 101 3.2 Types of Accelerated Testing – Qualitative and Quantitative 101 3.3 Qualitative Accelerated Tests 102 3.4 Quantitative Accelerated Tests 107 References 115 4 Analysis of Accelerated Life Testing Data and Physics-Based Reliability Model Development 117 4.1 Introduction 117 4.2 Accelerated Life Data Analysis Methods 117 4.3 Basics of ALT Data Analysis 117 4.4 Types of Collected Accelerated Life Test Data 118 4.5 Life-stress Models 119 4.6 Probability Plotting Method for ALT Model Estimation 124 4.7 Maximum Likelihood Estimation Approach to ALT Data Analysis 131 4.8 Confidence Intervals for MLE 134 4.9 MLE Approach to Estimating Parameters of Common Distributions 136 4.10 MLE-Based Parameter Estimation for Different Life-stress Models 139 4.11 Proportional Hazards (PH) Model 168 4.12 Bayesian Estimation Approach to ALT Model Parameter Estimation 171 4.13 Determining stress dependencies 175 4.14 Summary of the ALT Steps and Common Problems in Practice 178 4.15 Time Varying Stress Tests 179 4.16 Step-Stress Analysis And Model Development 182 References 201 5 Analysis of Accelerated Degradation Data and Reliability Model Development 203 5.1 Introduction 203 5.2 Degradation Models 205 References 231 6 Accelerated Test Planning 233 6.1 Introduction 233 6.2 Issues to Consider Prior to Accelerated Testing 233 6.3 Planning for Accelerated Life Tests 237 6.4 Planning for Accelerated Degradation Tests 246 References 250 7 Accounting for Uncertainties and Model Validation 251 7.1 Introduction 251 7.2 Uncertainties in Evidence 251 7.3 PPoF Model Uncertainties, Errors, and Validation 259 7.4 Applications of Model Validation in ADT 263 References 268 Index 269

Read more less

Book SynopsisA review of the aerodynamics, design and analysis, and optimization of wind turbines, combined with the author's unique software Aerodynamics of Wind Turbines is a comprehensive introduction to the aerodynamics, scaled design and analysis, and optimization of horizontal-axis wind turbines. The author a noted expert on the topic reviews the fundamentals and basic physics of wind turbines operating in the atmospheric boundary layer. He then explores more complex models that help in the aerodynamic analysis and design of turbine models. The text contains unique chapters on blade element momentum theory, airfoil aerodynamics, rotational augmentation, vortex-wake methods, actuator-line modeling, and designing aerodynamically scaled turbines for model-scale experiments. The author clearly demonstrates how effective analysis and design principles can be used in a wide variety of applications and operating conditions. The book integrates the easy-to-use, hands-on XTurb design and analysis software that is available on a companion website for facilitating individual analyses and future studies. This component enhances the learning experience and helps with a deeper and more complete understanding of the subject matter. This important book: Covers aerodynamics, design and analysis and optimization of wind turbinesOffers the author's XTurb design and analysis software that is available on a companion website for individual analyses and future studiesIncludes unique chapters on blade element momentum theory, airfoil aerodynamics, rotational augmentation, vortex-wake methods, actuator-line modeling, and designing aerodynamically scaled turbines for model-scale experimentsDemonstrates how design principles can be applied to a variety of applications and operating conditions Written for senior undergraduate and graduate students in wind energy as well as practicing engineers and scientists, Aerodynamics of Wind Turbines is an authoritative text that offers a guide to the fundamental principles, design and analysis of wind turbines.Table of ContentsAbout the Author xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Abbreviations xix List of Symbols xxi About the Companion Website xxix 1 Introduction: Wind Turbines and the Wind Resource 1 1.1 A Brief History of Wind Turbine Development 1 1.1.1 Why “Wind Energy”? 1 1.1.2 Wind Turbines Then and Now 2 1.1.2.1 The Windmill – Hero of Alexandria (First Century CE) 2 1.1.2.2 1200s–1300s – Post Mills and Tower Mills 3 1.1.2.3 1700s – John Smeaton 3 1.1.2.4 1800s –Windmills in the American West 5 1.1.2.5 Late 1800s –Wind in Transition (Mechanical – Electricity, Drag – Aerodynamic Principles) 5 1.1.2.6 1900s–1950s –Wind Turbines across Scales (kW– MW) 6 1.1.2.7 1970s–2000s – Modern Utility-Scale Wind Turbines (>1MW) 7 1.1.3 Influence of Aerodynamics on Wind Turbine Development 8 1.1.4 Design Evolution of Modern Horizontal-Axis Wind Turbines 10 1.2 Wind Resource Characterization 11 1.2.1 Wind Resource – Available Power in the Wind 13 1.2.2 Basic Characteristics of the Atmospheric Boundary Layer 16 1.2.2.1 Steady Wind Speed Variation with Height 17 1.2.2.2 Turbulence and Stability State 19 1.2.2.3 Atmospheric Properties (Troposphere) 23 1.2.3 Statistical Description of Wind Data 24 1.2.3.1 Rayleigh Distribution 25 1.2.3.2 Weibull Distribution 26 1.2.4 Wind Energy Production Estimates 27 References 28 Further Reading 29 2 Momentum Theory 31 2.1 Actuator Disk Model 31 2.1.1 Basic Streamtube Analysis 31 2.1.2 Axial Induction Factor, a 34 2.1.3 Rotor Thrust and Power 35 2.1.4 Optimum Rotor Performance – The Betz Limit 35 2.1.5 Wake Expansion and Wake Shear 37 2.1.6 Validity of the Actuator Disk Model 38 2.1.7 Summary – Actuator Disk Model 39 2.2 Rotor Disk Model 40 2.2.1 Extended Streamtube Analysis 40 2.2.2 Angular Induction Factor, a′ 42 2.2.3 Rotor Torque and Power 43 2.2.4 Optimum Rotor Performance Including Wake Rotation 44 2.2.5 Validity of the Rotor Disk Model 48 2.2.6 Summary – Rotor Disk Model 49 References 49 Further Reading 50 3 Blade Element Momentum Theory (BEMT) 51 3.1 The Blade Element – Incremental Torque and Thrust 51 3.1.1 Airfoil Nomenclature 52 3.1.2 Blade Element Velocity and Force/Torque Triangles 53 3.2 Combining Momentum Theory and Blade Element Theory through a, a′, and Φ 55 3.2.1 Sectional Thrust and Torque in Momentum and Blade Element Theory 56 3.2.2 Rotor Thrust and Power in Blade Element Theory 56 3.3 Aerodynamic Design and Performance of an Ideal Rotor 57 3.3.1 The Ideal Rotor Without Wake Rotation 58 3.3.2 The Ideal Rotor with Wake Rotation 59 3.4 Tip and Root Loss Factors 62 3.4.1 Prandtl Blade Number Correction versus Glauert Tip Correction – Historical Perspective 62 3.4.2 A Total Tip-/Root Loss Correction 64 3.4.3 Limitations of Classical Tip-/Root Corrections 66 3.4.4 Modern Approaches to Tip Modeling 66 3.4.4.1 Correction of Normal-/Tangential Force Coefficients (Shen et al.) 67 3.4.4.2 Helical Model for Tip Loss (Branlard et al.) 67 3.4.4.3 Decambering Effect at Blade Tip (Sørensen et al.) 68 3.4.4.4 Extended Glauert Tip Correction Using a g Function (Schmitz and Maniaci 2016) 69 3.5 BEM Solution Method 71 3.5.1 A System of Two Equations for Two Unknowns, a and a′ 71 3.5.2 Iterative BEM Solution Methodologies – Analyzing a Given Blade Design 72 3.5.2.1 Simultaneous Solution of a and a′ 73 3.5.2.2 Root-Finding Method of Single Equation for Φ 74 3.5.3 Thrust Coefficient in the Turbulent Wake State, a > 0.4 75 3.5.3.1 Glauert Empirical Relation 76 3.5.3.2 1st-Order Approximation (Wilson, Burton) 77 3.5.3.3 2nd-Order Approximation (Buhl) 77 3.6 Simplified BEMT (Wilson and Lissaman 1974) 78 3.7 Effect of Design Parameters on Power Coefficient 80 3.7.1 Effect of Blade Number and Solidity 81 3.7.2 Effect of Profile Drag 82 3.7.3 Combined Effects of Blade Number, Solidity, and Profile Drag 82 3.7.4 Effects of Rotor Speed and Blade Pitch 84 3.7.5 Aerodynamic Considerations – Two Blades versus Three Blades 87 3.7.6 Analysis of a MW-Scale Pitch-/Speed-Controlled Wind Turbine 89 3.8 Validity of BEMT 97 3.8.1 Summary – BEMT 98 References 99 Further Reading 101 4 Wind Turbine Airfoils 103 4.1 Fundamentals of Airfoil Theory 103 4.1.1 Inviscid Flow: Thin-Airfoil Theory 105 4.1.1.1 Kutta–Joukowski Lift Theorem 106 4.1.1.2 Symmetric-/Cambered Thin Airfoil 106 4.1.1.3 Effect of Airfoil Thickness on Lift 110 4.1.1.4 d’Alembert’s Paradox 111 4.1.2 Viscous Flow: Boundary-Layer Theory 111 4.1.2.1 Boundary-Layer Displacement Effect 113 4.1.2.2 Viscous Lift Theorem 115 4.1.2.3 Viscous Decambering Effect 117 4.1.2.4 Flow Separation and Stall 117 4.1.2.5 Understanding Profile Drag: Pressure and Skin Friction 119 4.1.2.6 Laminar-Turbulent Transition 120 4.2 Design Characteristics of Wind Turbine Airfoils 122 4.2.1 Radial Variation of the Reynolds Number 122 4.2.2 Force/Torque and Velocity Triangle Along the Blade Radius 123 4.2.3 Airfoil Design Criteria for Wind Turbine Blades 124 4.3 Development of Wind Turbine Airfoils 126 4.3.1 A Brief Historical Review of Wind Turbine Airfoils 126 4.3.2 Catalog of Wind Turbine Airfoils 129 References 133 Further Reading 136 5 Unsteady Aerodynamics and 3-D Correction Models for Airfoil Characteristics 137 5.1 Unsteady Aerodynamics on Wind Turbine Blades 137 5.1.1 Fundamentals of Unsteady Aerodynamics – Theodorsen’s Theory 138 5.1.1.1 Flow Model – Unsteady Thin-Airfoil Theory 139 5.1.1.2 Special Case: Freestream Angle-of-Attack Oscillation 140 5.1.2 Dynamic Stall Models 141 5.1.3 Relevance of Atmospheric Boundary Layer on Unsteady Aerodynamics 143 5.1.3.1 Effect of Yawed Inflow, Mean Shear, and Tower Interaction 144 5.1.3.2 Effect of Atmospheric Turbulence 146 5.2 Rotational Augmentation and Stall Delay 148 5.2.1 Himmelskamp Effect 148 5.2.2 Coriolis Effect and Centrifugal Pumping 149 5.2.2.1 Coriolis Effect 149 5.2.2.2 Centrifugal Pumping 151 5.2.3 Stall Delay Models 152 5.2.3.1 Snel et al. 153 5.2.3.2 Corrigan and Schillings 153 5.2.3.3 Du and Selig 153 5.2.3.4 Chaviaropoulos and Hansen 154 5.2.3.5 Dumitrescu et al. 154 5.2.3.6 Eggers et al. 155 5.2.3.7 Lindenburg 155 5.2.3.8 Dowler and Schmitz 155 5.2.4 Scaling Rotational Augmentation from Small-Scale to Utility-Scale Turbines 158 5.2.5 Extraction of Rotational Augmentation Data from Computed Flow Fields 161 5.3 Airfoil Characteristics at High Angles of Attack 162 5.3.1 Flat-Plate Correction 163 5.3.2 Viterna–Corrigan Correction 163 5.3.3 Comments on High Angle-of-Attack Corrections 164 References 164 Further Reading 169 6 Vortex Wake Methods 171 6.1 Fundamentals of Prandtl Lifting-Line Theory 171 6.1.1 Vortex Sheet and Horseshoe Vortices 171 6.1.2 Inviscid Flow: Lifting-Line Theory 174 6.1.2.1 Elliptic Loading (Inviscid Airfoil Polar) 176 6.1.2.2 Parked NREL Phase VI Rotor (Viscous Airfoil Polar) 178 6.1.2.3 Parked NREL 5-MW Turbine – Optimum Blade Pitch in Low-/High Winds 182 6.2 Prescribed-Wake Methods 182 6.2.1 Helicoidal Vortex Filaments 183 6.2.2 Vortex-Sheet Geometry 184 6.2.3 Biot–Savart Law 186 6.2.4 Induced Velocities and Influence Coefficients 187 6.2.5 Relationship Between Vortex Theory and Blade-Element Theory 188 6.2.5.1 Sectional Thrust and Torque in Vortex Theory 189 6.2.5.2 Rotor Thrust and Power in Vortex Theory 190 6.2.6 Iterative Prescribed-Wake Solution Methodology 190 6.2.6.1 Krogstad Turbine – Prescribed-Wake versus BEM Solution Method 193 6.2.7 Limitations of Prescribed-Wake Methods 194 6.3 Free-Wake Methods 195 6.3.1 Trailing Vortices versus Shed Vortices 196 6.3.2 Lagrangian Markers and Blade Model 196 6.3.3 Iterative Free-Wake Solution Methodology 199 6.3.4 Handling Singularities – Viscous Core Models 200 6.3.4.1 Vortex Stretching 200 6.3.4.2 Rankine Vortex 201 6.3.4.3 Lamb–Oseen Vortex 201 6.3.4.4 Difficulties of Viscous Core Models 202 6.3.5 Singularity-Free-Wake – Distributed Vorticity Elements (DVEs) 202 6.3.5.1 The Multi-Lifting-Line Method of Horstmann 203 6.3.5.2 The Singularity-Free-Wake Method of Bramesfeld and Maughmer 203 6.3.6 Prediction of Blade Tip Loads – Free-Wake versus Prescribed-Wake/BEM Methods 204 6.3.7 Limitations of Free-Wake Methods 205 References 205 Further Reading 208 7 Advanced Computational Methods 209 7.1 High-Fidelity Blade-Resolved CFD Solutions 209 7.1.1 Unsteady Reynolds-Averaged Navier–Stokes Equations 210 7.1.2 Turbulence Modeling 211 7.1.2.1 k-𝜀 Turbulence Model 211 7.1.2.2 k-𝜔 Turbulence Model 212 7.1.2.3 Shear-Stress Transport (SST) k-𝜔-Based Turbulence Model 212 7.1.3 Effect of Laminar-/Turbulent Transition on CFD Predictions 213 7.1.4 Coupling of Navier–Stokes Solver with Helicoidal Vortex Model 214 7.2 Numerical Modeling of Wind Turbine Wakes 217 7.2.1 Engineering-Type Wake Models 217 7.2.2 Actuator Wake Models 218 7.2.2.1 ALM – Actuator-Line Model (Sørensen and Shen) 220 7.2.2.2 ALM* – Variable-𝜀 Actuator-Line Model 220 7.2.2.3 ACE – Actuator Curve Embedding (Jha and Schmitz) 222 7.2.3 Limitations of Actuator Methods 225 7.3 Wake Modeling – Effect of Atmospheric Stability State 226 7.3.1 Atmospheric Boundary Layer LES Solver in OpenFOAM 227 7.3.2 Example of Turbine–Turbine Interaction for Neutral/Unstable Stability 229 7.3.3 Effect of ALM Approach on Wind Turbine Array Performance Prediction 230 7.3.4 Bridging the Gap – Meso-Microscale Coupling 231 References 233 Further Reading 239 8 Design Principles, Scaled Design, and Optimization 241 8.1 Design Principles for Horizontal-Axis Wind Turbines 241 8.1.1 Wind Turbine Design Standards 242 8.1.1.1 IEC Standards for Wind Turbines 243 8.1.1.2 Wind Turbine Design Loads 243 8.1.2 Rotor Design Procedure 245 8.1.2.1 General Rotor Design Process 245 8.1.2.2 COE versus Levelized Cost of Energy (LCOE) 248 8.1.2.3 Computational Tools for Rotor Analysis and Design 249 8.2 Scaled Design of Wind Turbine Blades 250 8.2.1 Limitations of Scaled Blade Aerodynamics and Dynamics 251 8.2.2 Example of Scaled Aerodynamics from Utility-Scale to MS Turbine 252 8.2.2.1 Scaled Design with Given cl (Lift Coefficient) Distribution (Scaled NREL 5-MW) 256 8.2.2.2 Scaled Design with Given c (Chord) Distribution (PScaled NREL 5-MW) 257 8.2.2.3 Scaled Design with Given 𝛽 (Pitch/Twist) Distribution (TScaled NREL 5-MW) 258 8.2.2.4 Differences in Scaled Designs w.r.t. Airfoil Aerodynamics and Blade Loads 259 8.2.3 Model-Scale Wind Turbine Aerodynamics Experiments 261 8.2.3.1 NREL Phase VI Rotor 262 8.2.3.2 MEXICO Rotor 264 8.2.3.3 Krogstad Turbine 265 8.3 Aerodynamic Optimization of Wind Turbine Blades 267 8.3.1 Principles of Blade Element Momentum (BEM) Aerodynamic Design 268 8.3.1.1 Betz Optimum Rotor (Ideal Rotor Without Wake Rotation) 268 8.3.1.2 Effect of Rotation on BEM Optimum Blade Design 269 8.3.1.3 Effect of Profile Drag on BEM Optimum Blade Design 270 8.3.1.4 Effect of Root-/Tip Loss on BEM Optimum Blade Design 271 8.3.1.5 Limitations of BEM Aerodynamic Optimization 272 8.3.2 Principles of VWM Aerodynamic Design 273 8.3.2.1 Optimum Circulation Distribution Under Thrust Constraint 274 8.3.2.2 Betz Minimum Energy Condition 276 8.3.2.3 Effect of Profile Drag on VWM Optimum Blade Design (DTU 10-MW RWT) 279 8.3.2.4 Design of Large-Scale Offshore “Low Induction Rotor” (LIR) 284 8.3.2.5 Limitations of VWM Aerodynamic Optimization 289 8.4 Summary – Scaled Design and Optimization 290 References 291 Further Reading 294 Index 295

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsChapter 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Why this Book? 1 1.2 How to Use this Book 2 1.3 Scope 2 1.4 Roadmap 4 1.5 Other Notes 5 Acknowledgments 7 References 8 Chapter 2 Shannon Theorem and Information Theory 9 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Reliable Transmission with Noisy Channel 10 2.3 Entropy and Uncertainty 10 2.4 Entropy and Bit Length 14 2.5 Information Measured as Reduction of Uncertainty 18 2.6 Shannon Theorem 21 2.7 Additive White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) Channel 25 2.8 Frequency-Selective Channel and Water Filling 32 2.9 Summary 34 2.10 Appendix: Derivation of Entropy as a Measure of Uncertainty 34 2.11 Appendix: Compression Coding 38 References 43 Homework 43 Chapter 3 Single Carrier Modulation and Nyquist Sampling Theory 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Symbol Mapping 47 3.3 Nyquist–Shannon Sampling Theory 58 3.4 Pulse Shaping and Nyquist Criterion 69 3.5 Implementation of Pulse Shaping Filter: Up-Sampling 74 3.6 Baseband and Passband 76 3.7 Summary 85 3.8 Appendix: Fourier Transform 87 3.9 Appendix: Function Localization in Frequency and Time Domains 91 3.10 Appendix: Proof of the Nyquist Criterion 96 References 98 Homework 99 Chapter 4 Statistical Detection and Error Probability 101 4.1 Introduction 101 4.2 Wide-Sense Stationary (WSS) Process 102 4.3 AWGN Channel 108 4.4 Detection Problem and Maximum Likelihood Detection 115 4.5 Map and ML Detection with AWGN Channel 119 4.6 Matched Filter (MF) 122 4.7 Error Probability of Uncoded Modulations Under AWGN Model 137 4.8 Summary 146 4.9 Appendix: PSD of Modulated Signals 148 4.10 Appendix: Baseband Noise 151 4.11 Appendix: Representing Signals and Noises with Vectors 154 References 159 Homework 160 Chapter 5 Channel Coding 163 5.1 Introduction 163 5.2 Channel Coding or Forward Error Correction (FEC) 164 5.3 Block Code 169 5.4 Convolutional Code 182 5.5 Coding for Bandwidth-Limited Channels and Trellis-Coded Modulation (TCM) 203 5.6 Combined Codes 211 5.7 Turbo Code 213 5.8 Low-Density Parity-Check (LDPC) Code 225 5.9 Summary 231 5.10 Appendix: Upper Bound of Shaping Gain 233 5.11 Appendix: Probability Update at Parity Node 234 References 235 Homework 238 Chapter 6 Channel Characteristics 241 6.1 Introduction 241 6.2 Channel Gain and Channel Classification 243 6.3 Constant Flat Channels 246 6.4 Flat Fading Channel 252 6.5 Time Dispersion and Frequency-Selective Fading 262 6.6 Channel Formulation in Frequency and Time Domains 265 6.7 Channel Modeling Methods 270 6.8 Link Budget Computation 273 6.9 Summary 282 6.10 Appendix: Channel Gain in Passband and Baseband 284 References 286 Homework 288 Chapter 7 Synchronization 291 7.1 Introduction 291 7.2 Synchronization Overview 293 7.3 Timing Control and Correction 299 7.4 Timing Error Estimate 311 7.5 Initial Acquisition 325 7.6 Summary 328 References 329 Homework 330 Chapter 8 Adaptive Filter 333 8.1 Introduction 333 8.2 Adaptive Filter Overview 335 8.3 Optimal Solution 337 8.4 Iterative Solution: Speediest Descent (SD) 339 8.5 Sample-by-Sample Adaptation: Least Mean Squares (LMS) Algorithm 343 8.6 Block-Based Adaptation: Least Squares (LS) Algorithm 347 8.7 Block-Based Iteration: Recursive Least Squares (RLS) Algorithm 350 8.8 Case Study: Full-Duplex Radio and Self-Interference Cancellation 355 8.9 Summary 359 References 360 Homework 360 Chapter 9 Channel Equalization 363 9.1 Introduction 363 9.2 Channel Dispersion Formulation 365 9.3 Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimation (MLSE) 370 9.4 Linear Equalizer (LE) 371 9.5 Decision Feedback Equalizer (DFE) 387 9.6 Tomlinson–Harashima Precoding (THP) 411 9.7 Fractionally Spaced Equalizers 419 9.8 Summary 420 9.9 Appendix: Z-Transform and Related Results 422 9.10 Appendix: Optimization of Functions with Complex Variables 431 9.11 Appendix: Optimal Solution of Zero Forcing Linear Equalizer 434 9.12 Appendix: Gain of an MMSE Equalizer 439 9.13 Appendix: Detailed Derivation of Finite-Length DFE 440 References 449 Homework 451 Chapter 10 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 453 10.1 Introduction 453 10.2 OFDM Formulation 455 10.3 Time Domain Equalization 475 10.4 OFDM Advantages and Enhancements 477 10.5 Receiver Training and Adaptation 480 10.6 Implementation Issues 491 10.7 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) 495 10.8 Filter Bank Multicarrier (FBMC) Modulation 497 10.9 Summary 499 References 500 Homework 504 Chapter 11 Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) Technology 505 11.1 Introduction 505 11.2 MIMO Overview 506 11.3 A Simple Case of Mimo: Multibeam Transmission 507 11.4 Spatial Multiplexing: Bell Laboratories Layered Space-Time (BLAST) 518 11.5 Spatial Diversity: Space-Time Coding 525 11.6 Theoretical Treatments of MIMO Techniques 530 11.7 Other Forms of MIMO 543 11.8 Areas of Further Exploration 545 11.9 MIMO Applications 549 11.10 Summary 555 11.11 Appendix: Successive Cancellation (SC) Formulation 556 11.12 Appendix: Derivation of MIMO Channel Capacity for Fixed Channel 564 References 567 Homework 571 Chapter 12 5G Cellular System Radio Interface Technology 573 12.1 Introduction 573 12.2 Cellular Systems 573 12.3 The 5G System 578 12.4 Highlights of 3GPP Proposal 579 12.5 5G Physical Layer Technologies 583 12.6 Summary 606 References 607 Homework 614 Chapter 13 Closing Remarks and Further Exploration 615 13.1 Introduction 615 13.2 Analog Circuitry 615 13.3 Software-Defined Radio (SDR) 616 13.4 Cognitive Radio (CR) and Dynamic Spectrum Access (DSA) 617 13.5 Ultrawide Band (UWB) 620 13.6 Relaying and Cooperative Communications 620 13.7 Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 621 13.8 Interference Management 622 13.9 Other Modulation Schemes 623 13.10 Optical Communications 623 13.11 Green Communications 624 13.12 Applications of Artificial Intelligence (AI) 625 13.13 Application of Game Theory 625 13.14 Security 625 13.15 Network Coding 626 13.16 Summary 628 References 628 Index 637

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive study in efficient multi-rate teletraffic loss models used for designing, performance analysis, and optimization of systems and networks Efficient Multirate Teletraffic Loss Models Beyond Erlangis an easy-to-read book filled with numerous efficient teletraffic loss models. Presented in three sectionsTeletraffic Models of Random Input, Teletraffic Models of Quasi-Random Input, and Teletraffic Models of Batched Poisson Inputit covers everything that a professional experienced with optimization and dimensioning of telecom networks could ever need to know. This unique book provides a detailed explanation on how efficient multirate teletraffic loss models are extracted and applied, and guides readers through almost all network technologies and services. Starting from the basics, it steadily increases in difficulty to keep the book self-contained and to provide a better understanding to those who might be new to the subject. It includes detailedTable of ContentsList of Figures xvii List of Tables xxv Preface xxix Acronyms xxxiii Symbols xxxvii About the Companion Website xxxix Introduction xli I.1 Traffic-load Definition xlii I.2 Traffic Congestion and GoS/QoS xliii I.3 System Capacity xliv I.4 Teletraffic Models xlv I.5 Traffic-load Properties xlviii I.6 Call Arrival Process l I.6.1 Superposition and Decomposition of Poisson Processes lv I.6.2 Poisson Arrivals See Time Averages lvi I.7 Call Service Time lvii I.7.1 Markov Property lvii I.8 Service Systems lix I.9 Little’s Law lxi I.10 Other Performance Metrics of Loss Systems lxii I.11 General Examples lxiii I.12 Service-classes – Bandwidth Sharing Policies lxiv I.13 Classification of Teletraffic Loss Models lxx I.14 Teletraffic Models and the Internet lxxi References lxxiv Part I Teletraffic Models of Random Input 1 1 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model 3 1.1 The Erlang Loss Model 3 1.1.1 The Service System 3 1.1.2 Global and Local Balance 5 1.1.3 Call Blocking Probability 8 1.1.4 Other Performance Metrics 11 1.2 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model 13 1.2.1 The Service System 13 1.2.2 The Analytical Model 15 1.3 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the BR policy 28 1.3.1 The Service System 28 1.3.2 The Analytical Model 30 1.4 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the Threshold Policy 38 1.4.1 The Service System 38 1.4.2 The Analytical Model 40 1.5 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model in a Fixed Routing Network 44 1.5.1 The Service System 44 1.5.2 The Analytical Model 45 1.5.3 CBP Calculation by the RLA Method 49 1.6 Applications 54 1.6.1 The Erlang-B Formula 54 1.6.2 The Erlang-C Formula 55 1.6.3 The Kaufman–Roberts Recursion 56 1.7 Further Reading 58 References 60 2 Multirate Retry Threshold Loss Models 65 2.1 The Single-Retry Model 65 2.1.1 The Service System 65 2.1.2 The Analytical Model 69 2.2 The Single-Retry Model under the BR Policy 72 2.2.1 The Service System 72 2.2.2 The Analytical Model 75 2.3 The Multi-Retry Model 77 2.3.1 The Service System 77 2.3.2 The Analytical Model 83 2.4 The Multi-Retry Model under the BR Policy 86 2.4.1 The Service System 86 2.4.2 The Analytical Model 87 2.5 The Single-Threshold Model 92 2.5.1 The Service System 92 2.5.2 The Analytical Model 96 2.6 The Single-Threshold Model under the BR Policy 99 2.6.1 The Service System 99 2.6.2 The Analytical Model 101 2.7 The Multi-Threshold Model 107 2.7.1 The Service System 107 2.7.2 The Analytical Model 107 2.8 The Multi-Threshold Model under the BR Policy 109 2.8.1 The Service System 109 2.8.2 The Analytical Model 109 2.9 The Connection Dependent Threshold Model 112 2.9.1 The Service System 112 2.9.2 The Analytical Model 114 2.10 The Connection Dependent Threshold Model under the BR Policy 119 2.10.1 The Service System 119 2.10.2 The Analytical Model 119 2.11 Applications 121 2.12 Further Reading 129 References 130 3 Multirate Elastic Adaptive Loss Models 133 3.1 The Elastic Erlang Multirate Loss Model 133 3.1.1 The Service System 133 3.1.2 The Analytical Model 139 3.2 The Elastic Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 146 3.2.1 The Service System 146 3.2.2 The Analytical Model 149 3.3 The Elastic Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the Threshold Policy 152 3.3.1 The Service System 152 3.3.2 The Analytical Model 156 3.4 The Elastic Adaptive Erlang Multirate Loss Model 163 3.4.1 The Service System 163 3.4.2 The Analytical Model 171 3.5 The Elastic Adaptive Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 175 3.5.1 The Service System 175 3.5.2 The Analytical Model 177 3.6 The Elastic Adaptive Erlang Multirate Loss Model under the Threshold Policy 179 3.6.1 The Service System 179 3.6.2 The Analytical Model 182 3.7 Applications 185 3.8 Further Reading 190 References 191 4 Multirate Elastic Adaptive Retry Loss Models 195 4.1 The Elastic Single-Retry Model 195 4.1.1 The Service System 195 4.1.2 The Analytical Model 201 4.2 The Elastic Single-Retry Model under the BR Policy 206 4.2.1 The Service System 206 4.2.2 The Analytical Model 210 4.3 The Elastic Multi-Retry Model 212 4.3.1 The Service System 212 4.3.2 The Analytical Model 218 4.4 The Elastic Multi-Retry Model under the BR Policy 220 4.4.1 The Service System 220 4.4.2 The Analytical Model 223 4.5 The Elastic Adaptive Single-Retry Model 226 4.5.1 The Service System 226 4.5.2 The Analytical Model 233 4.6 The Elastic Adaptive Single-Retry Model under the BR Policy 237 4.6.1 The Service System 237 4.6.2 The Analytical Model 241 4.7 The Elastic Adaptive Multi-Retry Model 243 4.7.1 The Service System 243 4.7.2 The Analytical Model 248 4.8 The Elastic Adaptive Multi-Retry Model under the BR Policy 250 4.8.1 The Service System 250 4.8.2 The Analytical Model 254 4.9 Applications 258 4.10 Further Reading 258 References 260 5 ON–OFF Multirate Loss Models 263 5.1 The ON–OFF Multirate Loss Model 263 5.1.1 The Service System 263 5.1.2 The Analytical Model 265 5.2 The ON–OFF Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 275 5.2.1 The Service System 275 5.2.2 The Analytical Model 276 5.3 The ON–OFF Multirate Loss Model in a Fixed Routing Network 280 5.3.1 The Service System 280 5.3.2 The Analytical Model 280 5.4 Applications 285 5.5 Further Reading 288 References 289 Part II Teletraffic Models of Quasi-Random Input 291 6 The Engset Multirate Loss Model 293 6.1 The Engset Loss Model 293 6.1.1 The Service System 293 6.1.2 The Analytical Model 293 6.2 The Engset Multirate Loss Model 298 6.2.1 The Service System 298 6.2.2 The Analytical Model 300 6.3 The Engset Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 308 6.3.1 The Service System 308 6.3.2 The Analytical Model 310 6.4 The Engset Multirate Loss Model under the TH Policy 312 6.4.1 The Service System 312 6.4.2 The Analytical Model 312 6.5 Applications 318 6.6 Further Reading 324 References 327 7 Finite Multirate Retry Threshold Loss Models 331 7.1 The Finite Single-Retry Model 331 7.1.1 The Service System 331 7.1.2 The Analytical Model 333 7.2 The Finite Single-Retry Model under the BR Policy 338 7.2.1 The Service System 338 7.2.2 The Analytical Model 340 7.3 The Finite Multi-Retry Model 342 7.3.1 The Service System 342 7.3.2 The Analytical Model 344 7.4 The Finite Multi-Retry Model under the BR Policy 348 7.4.1 The Service System 348 7.4.2 The Analytical Model 349 7.5 The Finite Single-Threshold Model 353 7.5.1 The Service System 353 7.5.2 The Analytical Model 355 7.6 The Finite Single-Threshold Model under the BR Policy 360 7.6.1 The Service System 360 7.6.2 The Analytical Model 362 7.7 The Finite Multi-Threshold Model 363 7.7.1 The Service System 363 7.7.2 The Analytical Model 364 7.8 The Finite Multi-Threshold Model under the BR Policy 366 7.8.1 The Service System 366 7.8.2 The Analytical Model 366 7.9 The Finite Connection Dependent Threshold Model 367 7.9.1 The Service System 367 7.9.2 The Analytical Model 368 7.10 The Finite Connection Dependent Threshold Model under the BR Policy 373 7.10.1 The Service System 373 7.10.2 The Analytical Model 373 7.11 Applications 374 7.12 Further Reading 374 References 375 8 Finite Multirate Elastic Adaptive Loss Models 377 8.1 The Elastic Engset Multirate Loss Model 377 8.1.1 The Service System 377 8.1.2 The Analytical Model 380 8.2 The Elastic Engset Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 383 8.2.1 The Service System 383 8.2.2 The Analytical Model 385 8.3 The Elastic Adaptive Engset Multirate Loss Model 387 8.3.1 The Service System 387 8.3.2 The Analytical Model 389 8.4 The Elastic Adaptive Engset Multirate Loss Model under the BR Policy 392 8.4.1 The Service System 392 8.4.2 The Analytical Model 394 8.5 Applications 402 8.6 Further Reading 405 References 405 9 Finite ON–OFF Multirate Loss Models 407 9.1 The Finite ON–OFF Multirate Loss Model 407 9.1.1 The Service System 407 9.1.2 The AnalyticalModel 408 9.2 Generalization of the f-ON–OFF Model to include Service-classes with a Mixture of a Finite and an Infinite Number of Sources 415 9.3 Applications 416 9.4 Further Reading 422 References 423 Part III Teletraffic Models of Batched Poisson Input 425 10 The Erlang Multirate Loss ModelWith Batched Poisson Arrivals 427 10.1 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals 427 10.1.1 The Service System 427 10.1.2 The AnalyticalModel 428 10.2 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals under the BR Policy 435 10.2.1 The Service System 435 10.2.2 The AnalyticalModel 435 10.3 The Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals under the Threshold Policy 441 10.3.1 The Service System 441 10.3.2 The Analytical Model 441 10.4 Applications 445 10.5 Further Reading 451 References 451 11 Batched Poisson Multirate Elastic Adaptive Loss Models 455 11.1 The Elastic Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals 455 11.1.1 The Service System 455 11.1.2 The Analytical Model 456 11.2 The Elastic Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals under the BR Policy 461 11.2.1 The Service System 461 11.2.2 The Analytical Model 463 11.3 The Elastic Adaptive Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals 466 11.3.1 The Service System 466 11.3.2 The Analytical Model 467 11.4 The Elastic Adaptive Erlang Multirate Loss Model with Batched Poisson Arrivals under the BR Policy 475 11.4.1 The Service System 475 11.4.2 The Analytical Model 477 11.5 Applications 482 11.6 Further Reading 483 References 485 Appendix A Interdependency of the Teletraffic Models 487 Index 491

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe updated third edition of the classic book that provides an introduction to electric machines and their emerging applications The thoroughly revised and updated third edition of Electromechanical Motion Devices contains an introduction to modern electromechanical devices and offers an understanding of the uses of electric machines in emerging applications such as in hybrid and electric vehicles. The authorsnoted experts on the topicput the focus on modern electric drive applications. The book includes basic theory, illustrative examples, and contains helpful practice problems designed to enhance comprehension. The text offers information on Tesla''s rotating magnetic field, which is the foundation of reference frame theory and explores in detail the reference frame theory. The authors also review permanent-magnet ac, synchronous, and induction machines. In each chapter, the material is arranged so that if steady-state operation is the main concern, theTable of ContentsPreface ix Chapter 1 Magnetic and Magnetically Coupled Circuits 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Phasor Analysis 2 1.3 Magnetic Circuits 8 1.4 Properties of Magnetic Materials 14 1.5 Stationary Magnetically Coupled Circuits 18 1.6 Open- and Short-Circuit Characteristics of Stationary Magnetically Coupled Circuits 25 1.7 Magnetic Systems with Mechanical Motion 28 1.8 Recapping 35 Chapter 2 Electromechanical Energy Conversion 39 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 Energy Balance Relationships 40 2.3 Energy in Coupling Field 45 2.4 Graphical Interpretation of Energy Conversion 52 2.5 Electromagnetic and Electrostatic Forces 55 2.6 Operating Characteristics of an Elementary Electromagnet 60 2.7 Single-Phase Reluctance Machine 65 2.8 Windings in Relative Motion 70 2.9 Recapping 72 Chapter 3 Direct-Current Machines and the Dc Drive 77 3.1 Introduction 77 3.2 Elementary Direct-Current Machine 78 3.3 Voltage and Torque Equations 85 3.4 Permanent-Magnet DC Machine 88 3.5 Time-Domain Block Diagram and State Equations for the Permanent-Magnet DC Machine 92 3.6 Dynamic Characteristics of Permanent-Magnet DC Motors 94 3.7 DC Drive 97 3.8 Recapping 103 Chapter 4 Winding Distribution and Tesla’s Rotating Magnetic Field 105 4.1 Introduction 105 4.2 Winding Distribution 106 4.3 Air-Gap MMF 109 4.4 Tesla’s Rotating Magnetic Field – Symmetrical Stator Circuits 113 4.5 Tesla’s Rotating Fields and Torque with Unsymmetrical and Symmetrical Rotor Circuits 121 4.6 P-Pole Machines 126 4.7 Recapping 131 Chapter 5 Introduction to Reference Frame Theory 137 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Background 138 5.3 Change of Variables for Symmetrical Stator Circuits 138 5.4 Transformation of Two-Phase Stator Variables to the Arbitrary Reference Frame 143 5.5 Balanced Steady-State Stator Variables Viewed from any Reference Frame 148 5.6 Stator Variables Observed from Different Reference Frames 152 5.7 Instantaneous Phasor 156 5.8 Transformation of Three-Phase Stator Variables to the Arbitrary Reference Frame 159 5.9 Substitute Variables for Symmetrical Rotating Circuits 162 5.10 Recapping 164 Chapter 6 Permanent-Magnet AC Machine and Field Orientation of a Brushless DC Drive 167 6.1 Introduction 167 6.2 Two-Phase Permanent-Magnet AC Machine 168 6.3 Voltage Equations and Winding Inductances 170 6.4 Torque 172 6.5 Machine Equations in the Rotor Reference Frame 173 6.6 Instantaneous and Steady-State Phasors 177 6.7 Three-Phase Permanent-Magnet AC Machine 181 6.8 Unequal Direct- and Quadrature-Axis Inductances 186 6.9 Field Orientation of a Brushless DC Drive 189 6.10 Inverter-Supplied Brushless DC Drive 208 6.11 Recapping 221 Chapter 7 Synchronous Machines 223 7.1 Introduction 223 7.2 Windings of the Synchronous Machine 224 7.3 Two-Phase Round-Rotor Synchronous Machine 228 7.4 Analysis of Steady-State Operation 234 7.5 Analysis of Steady-State Operation in Power Systems 238 7.6 Two-Phase Reluctance Machine 247 7.7 Dynamic and Steady-State Performance 254 7.8 Three-Phase Round-Rotor Synchronous Machine 260 7.9 Recapping 266 Chapter 8 Symmetrical Induction Machines and Field Orientation 269 8.1 Introduction 269 8.2 Two-Phase Induction Machine 270 8.3 Voltage Equations and Winding Inductances 274 8.4 Torque 280 8.5 Voltage Equations in the Arbitrary Reference Frame 281 8.6 Magnetically Linear Flux-Linkage Equations and Equivalent Circuits 284 8.7 Torque Equations in Arbitrary Reference Frame Variables 286 8.8 Phasors and Steady-State Operating Modes 286 8.9 Dynamic and Steady-State Performance – Machine Variables 299 8.10 Free Acceleration Viewed from Stationary, Rotor, and Synchronously Rotating Reference Frames 307 8.11 Three-Phase Induction Machine 312 8.12 Principles of Field Orientation 319 8.13 Recapping 331 Chapter 9 Stepper Motors 335 9.1 Introduction 335 9.2 Basic Configurations of Multistack Variable-Reluctance Stepper Motors 335 9.3 Equations for Multistack Variable-Reluctance Stepper Motors 342 9.4 Operating Characteristics of Multistack Variable-Reluctance Stepper Motors 345 9.5 Single-Stack Variable-Reluctance Stepper Motors 348 9.6 Basic Configuration of Permanent-Magnet Stepper Motors 352 9.7 Equations for Permanent-Magnet Stepper Motors 356 9.8 Equations of Permanent-Magnet Stepper Motors in Rotor Reference Frame – Reluctance Torques Neglected 359 9.9 Recapping 363 Chapter 10 Power Electronics 365 10.1 Introduction 365 10.2 Switching-Circuit Fundamentals 365 10.3 DC–DC Conversion 376 10.4 AC–DC Conversion 389 10.5 DC–AC Conversion 403 10.6 Recapping 407 Appendix A 411 Appendix B 415 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisTHE ONE-STOP RESOURCE FOR ANY INDIVIDUAL OR ORGANIZATION CONSIDERING FOG COMPUTING Fog and Fogonomics is a comprehensive and technology-centric resource that highlights the system model, architectures, building blocks, and IEEE standards for fog computing platforms and solutions. The fog is defined as the multiple interconnected layers of computing along the continuum from cloud to endpoints such as user devices and things including racks or microcells in server closets, residential gateways, factory control systems, and more. The authors?noted experts on the topic?review business models and metrics that allow for the economic assessment of fog-based information communication technology (ICT) resources, especially mobile resources. The book contains a wide range of templates and formulas for calculating quality-of-service values. Comprehensive in scope, it covers topics including fog computing technologies and reference architecture, fog-related standards Table of ContentsList of Contributors xvii Preface xxi 1 Fog Computing and Fogonomics 1Yang Yang, Jianwei Huang, Tao Zhang, and Joe Weinman 2 Collaborative Mechanism for Hybrid Fog-Cloud Scenarios 7Xavi Masip, Eva Marín, Jordi Garcia, and Sergi Sànchez 2.1 The Collaborative Scenario 7 2.1.1 The F2C Model 11 2.1.1.1 The Layering Architecture 13 2.1.1.2 The Fog Node 14 2.1.1.3 F2C as a Service 16 2.1.2 The F2C Control Architecture 19 2.1.2.1 Hierarchical Architecture 20 2.1.2.2 Main Functional Blocks 24 2.1.2.3 Managing Control Data 25 2.1.2.4 Sharing Resources 26 2.2 Benefits and Applicability 28 2.3 The Challenges 29 2.3.1 Research Challenges 30 2.3.1.1 What a Resource is 30 2.3.1.2 Categorization 30 2.3.1.3 Identification 31 2.3.1.4 Clustering 33 2.3.1.5 Resources Discovery 33 2.3.1.6 Resource Allocation 34 2.3.1.7 Reliability 35 2.3.1.8 QoS 36 2.3.1.9 Security 36 2.3.2 Industry Challenges 37 2.3.2.1 What an F2C Provider Should Be? 38 2.3.2.2 Shall Cloud/Fog Providers Communicate with Each Other 38 2.3.2.3 How Multifog/Cloud Access is Managed 39 2.3.3 Business Challenges 40 2.4 Ongoing Efforts 41 2.4.1 ECC 41 2.4.2 mF2C 42 2.4.3 MEC 42 2.4.4 OEC 44 2.4.5 OFC 44 2.5 Handling Data in Coordinated Scenarios 45 2.5.1 The New Data 46 2.5.2 The Life Cycle of Data 48 2.5.3 F2C Data Management 49 2.5.3.1 Data Collection 49 2.5.3.2 Data Storage 51 2.5.3.3 Data Processing 52 2.6 The Coming Future 52 Acknowledgments 54 References 54 3 Computation Offloading Game for Fog-Cloud Scenario 61Hamed Shah-Mansouri and Vincent W.S. Wong 3.1 Internet of Things 61 3.2 Fog Computing 63 3.2.1 Overview of Fog Computing 63 3.2.2 Computation Offloading 64 3.2.2.1 Evaluation Criteria 65 3.2.2.2 Literature Review 66 3.3 A Computation Task Offloading Game for Hybrid Fog-Cloud Computing 67 3.3.1 System Model 67 3.3.1.1 Hybrid Fog-Cloud Computing 68 3.3.1.2 Computation Task Models 68 3.3.1.3 Quality of Experience 71 3.3.2 Computation Offloading Game 71 3.3.2.1 Game Formulation 71 3.3.2.2 Algorithm Development 74 3.3.2.3 Price of Anarchy 74 3.3.2.4 Performance Evaluation 75 3.4 Conclusion 80 References 80 4 Pricing Tradeoffs for Data Analytics in Fog–Cloud Scenarios 83Yichen Ruan, Liang Zheng, Maria Gorlatova, Mung Chiang, and Carlee Joe-Wong 4.1 Introduction: Economics and Fog Computing 83 4.1.1 Fog Application Pricing 85 4.1.2 Incentivizing Fog Resources 86 4.1.3 A Fogonomics Research Agenda 86 4.2 Fog Pricing Today 87 4.2.1 Pricing Network Resources 87 4.2.2 Pricing Computing Resources 89 4.2.3 Pricing and Architecture Trade-offs 89 4.3 Typical Fog Architectures 90 4.3.1 Fog Applications 90 4.3.2 The Cloud-to-Things Continuum 90 4.4 A Case Study: Distributed Data Processing 92 4.4.1 A Temperature Sensor Testbed 92 4.4.2 Latency, Cost, and Risk 95 4.4.3 System Trade-off: Fog or Cloud 98 4.5 Future Research Directions 101 4.6 Conclusion 102 Acknowledgments 102 References 103 5 Quantitative and Qualitative Economic Benefits of Fog 107Joe Weinman 5.1 Characteristics of Fog Computing Solutions 108 5.2 Strategic Value 109 5.2.1 Information Excellence 110 5.2.2 Solution Leadership 110 5.2.3 Collective Intimacy 110 5.2.4 Accelerated Innovation 111 5.3 Bandwidth, Latency, and Response Time 111 5.3.1 Network Latency 113 5.3.2 Server Latency 114 5.3.3 Balancing Consolidation and Dispersion to Minimize Total Latency 114 5.3.4 Data Traffic Volume 115 5.3.5 Nodes and Interconnections 116 5.4 Capacity, Utilization, Cost, and Resource Allocation 117 5.4.1 Capacity Requirements 117 5.4.2 Capacity Utilization 118 5.4.3 Unit Cost of Delivered Resources 119 5.4.4 Resource Allocation, Sharing, and Scheduling 120 5.5 Information Value and Service Quality 120 5.5.1 Precision and Accuracy 120 5.5.2 Survivability, Availability, and Reliability 122 5.6 Sovereignty, Privacy, Security, Interoperability, and Management 123 5.6.1 Data Sovereignty 123 5.6.2 Privacy and Security 123 5.6.3 Heterogeneity and Interoperability 124 5.6.4 Monitoring, Orchestration, and Management 124 5.7 Trade-Offs 125 5.8 Conclusion 126 References 126 6 Incentive Schemes for User-Provided Fog Infrastructure 129George Iosifidis, Lin Gao, Jianwei Huang, and Leandros Tassiulas 6.1 Introduction 129 6.2 Technology and Economic Issues in UPIs 132 6.2.1 Overview of UPI models for Network Connectivity 132 6.2.2 Technical Challenges of Resource Allocation 134 6.2.3 Incentive Issues 135 6.3 Incentive Mechanisms for Autonomous Mobile UPIs 137 6.4 Incentive Mechanisms for Provider-assisted Mobile UPIs 140 6.5 Incentive Mechanisms for Large-Scale Systems 143 6.6 Open Challenges in Mobile UPI Incentive Mechanisms 145 6.6.1 Autonomous Mobile UPIs 145 6.6.1.1 Consensus of the Service Provider 145 6.6.1.2 Dynamic Setting 146 6.6.2 Provider-assisted Mobile UPIs 146 6.6.2.1 Modeling the Users 146 6.6.2.2 Incomplete Market Information 147 6.7 Conclusions 147 References 148 7 Fog-Based Service Enablement Architecture 151Nanxi Chen, Siobhán Clarke, and Shu Chen 7.1 Introduction 151 7.1.1 Objectives and Challenges 152 7.2 Ongoing Effort on FogSEA 153 7.2.1 FogSEA Service Description 156 7.2.2 Semantic Data Dependency Overlay Network 158 7.2.2.1 Creation and Maintenance 159 7.2.2.2 Semantic-Based Service Matchmarking 161 7.3 Early Results 164 7.3.1 Service Composition 165 7.3.1.1 SeDDON Creation in FogSEA 167 7.3.2 Related Work 168 7.3.2.1 Semantic-Based Service Overlays 169 7.3.2.2 Goal-Driven Planning 170 7.3.2.3 Service Discovery 171 7.3.3 Open Issue and Future Work 172 References 174 8 Software-Defined Fog Orchestration for IoT Services 179Renyu Yang, Zhenyu Wen, David McKee, Tao Lin, Jie Xu, and Peter Garraghan 8.1 Introduction 179 8.2 Scenario and Application 182 8.2.1 Concept Definition 182 8.2.2 Fog-enabled IoT Application 184 8.2.3 Characteristics and Open Challenges 185 8.2.4 Orchestration Requirements 187 8.3 Architecture: A Software-Defined Perspective 188 8.3.1 Solution Overview 188 8.3.2 Software-Defined Architecture 189 8.4 Orchestration 191 8.4.1 Resource Filtering and Assignment 192 8.4.2 Component Selection and Placement 194 8.4.3 Dynamic Orchestration with Runtime QoS 195 8.4.4 Systematic Data-Driven Optimization 196 8.4.5 Machine-Learning for Orchestration 197 8.5 Fog Simulation 198 8.5.1 Overview 198 8.5.2 Simulation for IoT Application in Fog 199 8.5.3 Simulation for Fog Orchestration 201 8.6 Early Experience 202 8.6.1 Simulation-Based Orchestration 202 8.6.2 Orchestration in Container-Based Systems 206 8.7 Discussion 207 8.8 Conclusion 208 Acknowledgment 208 References 208 9 A Decentralized Adaptation System for QoS Optimization 213Nanxi Chen, Fan Li, Gary White, Siobhán Clarke, and Yang Yang 9.1 Introduction 213 9.2 State of the Art 217 9.2.1 QoS-aware Service Composition 217 9.2.2 SLA (Re-)negotiation 219 9.2.3 Service Monitoring 221 9.3 Fog Service Delivery Model and AdaptFog 224 9.3.1 AdaptFog Architecture 224 9.3.2 Service Performance Validation 227 9.3.3 Runtime QoS Monitoring 232 9.3.4 Fog-to-Fog Service Level Renegotiation 235 9.4 Conclusion and Open Issues 240 References 240 10 Efficient Task Scheduling for Performance Optimization 249Yang Yang, Shuang Zhao, Kunlun Wang, and Zening Liu 10.1 Introduction 249 10.2 Individual Delay-minimization Task Scheduling 251 10.2.1 System Model 251 10.2.2 Problem Formulation 251 10.2.3 POMT Algorithm 253 10.3 Energy-efficient Task Scheduling 255 10.3.1 Fog Computing Network 255 10.3.2 Medium Access Protocol 257 10.3.3 Energy Efficiency 257 10.3.4 Problem Properties 258 10.3.5 Optimal Task Scheduling Strategy 259 10.4 Delay Energy Balanced Task Scheduling 260 10.4.1 Overview of Homogeneous Fog Network Model 260 10.4.2 Problem Formulation and Analytical Framework 261 10.4.3 Delay Energy Balanced Task Offloading 262 10.4.4 Performance Analysis 262 10.5 Open Challenges in Task Scheduling 265 10.5.1 Heterogeneity of Mobile Nodes 265 10.5.2 Mobility of Mobile Nodes 265 10.5.3 Joint Task and Traffic Scheduling 265 10.6 Conclusion 266 References 266 11 Noncooperative and Cooperative Computation Offloading 269Xu Chen and Zhi Zhou 11.1 Introduction 269 11.2 Related Works 271 11.3 Noncooperative Computation Offloading 272 11.3.1 System Model 272 11.3.1.1 Communication Model 272 11.3.1.2 Computation Model 273 11.3.2 Decentralized Computation Offloading Game 275 11.3.2.1 Game Formulation 275 11.3.2.2 Game Property 276 11.3.3 Decentralized Computation Offloading Mechanism 280 11.3.3.1 Mechanism Design 280 11.3.3.2 Performance Analysis 282 11.4 Cooperative Computation Offloading 283 11.4.1 HyFog Framework Model 283 11.4.1.1 Resource Model 283 11.4.1.2 Task Execution Model 284 11.4.2 Inadequacy of Bipartite Matching–Based Task Offloading 285 11.4.3 Three-Layer Graph Matching Based Task Offloading 287 11.5 Discussions 289 11.5.1 Incentive Mechanisms for Collaboration 290 11.5.2 Coping with System Dynamics 290 11.5.3 Hybrid Centralized–Decentralized Implementation 291 11.6 Conclusion 291 References 292 12 A Highly Available Storage System for Elastic Fog 295Jaeyoon Chung, Carlee Joe-Wong, and Sangtae Ha 12.1 Introduction 295 12.1.1 Fog Versus Cloud Services 296 12.1.2 A Fog Storage Service 297 12.2 Design 299 12.2.1 Design Considerations 299 12.2.2 Architecture 300 12.2.3 File Operations 301 12.3 Fault Tolerant Data Access and Share Placement 303 12.3.1 Data Encoding and Placement Scheme 303 12.3.2 Robust and Exact Share Requests 304 12.3.3 Clustering Storage Nodes 305 12.3.4 Storage Selection 306 12.3.4.1 File Download Times 307 12.3.4.2 Optimizing Share Locations 307 12.4 Implementation 309 12.4.1 Metadata 310 12.4.2 Access Counting 311 12.4.3 NAT Traversal 312 12.5 Evaluation 312 12.6 Discussion and Open Questions 318 12.7 Related Work 319 12.8 Conclusion 320 Acknowledgments 320 References 320 13 Development of Wearable Services with Edge Devices 325Yuan-Yao Shih, Ai-Chun Pang, and Yuan-Yao Lou 13.1 Introduction 325 13.2 Related Works 328 13.2.1 Without Developer’s Effort 329 13.2.2 Require Developer’s Effort 330 13.3 Problem Description 331 13.4 System Architecture 332 13.4.1 End Device 332 13.4.2 Fog Node 333 13.4.3 Controller 333 13.5 Methodology 333 13.5.1 End Device 334 13.5.1.1 Localization 334 13.5.1.2 Speech Recognition 335 13.5.1.3 Retrieving Google Calendar Information 336 13.5.2 Fog Node 337 13.5.3 Controller 338 13.6 Performance Evaluation 339 13.6.1 Experiment Setup 339 13.6.2 Different Computation Loads 340 13.6.3 Different Types of Applications 342 13.6.4 Remote Wearable Services Provision 344 13.6.5 Estimation of Power Consumption 346 13.7 Discussion 348 13.8 Conclusion 349 References 350 14 Security and Privacy Issues and Solutions for Fog 353Mithun Mukherjee, Mohamed Amine Ferrag, Leandros Maglaras, Abdelouahid Derhab, and Mohammad Aazam 14.1 Introduction 353 14.1.1 Major Limitations in Traditional Cloud Computing 353 14.1.2 Fog Computing: An Edge Computing Paradigm 354 14.1.3 A Three-Tier Fog Computing Architecture 357 14.2 Security and Privacy Challenges Posed by Fog Computing 360 14.3 Existing Research on Security and Privacy Issues in Fog Computing 361 14.3.1 Privacy-preserving 361 14.3.2 Authentication 363 14.3.3 Access Control 363 14.3.4 Malicious attacks 364 14.4 Open Questions and Research Challenges 366 14.4.1 Trust 367 14.4.2 Privacy preservation 367 14.4.3 Authentication 367 14.4.4 Malicious Attacks and Intrusion Detection 368 14.4.5 Cross-border Issues and Fog Forensic 369 14.5 Summary 369 Exercises 370 References 370 Index 375

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Basic Concepts 1 1.1 System of Units 1 1.2 Basic Quantities 2 1.3 Circuit Elements 8 Summary 18 2 Resistive Circuits 19 2.1 Ohm’s Law 19 2.2 Kirchhoff’s Laws 24 2.3 Single-Loop Circuits 33 2.4 Single-Node-Pair Circuits 40 2.5 Series and Parallel Resistor Combinations 45 2.6 Circuits with Series-Parallel Combinations of Resistors 51 2.7 Wye Delta Transformations 57 2.8 Circuits with Dependent Sources 61 2.9 Resistor Technologies for Electronic Manufacturing 67 2.10 Application Examples 70 2.11 Design Examples 72 Summary 78 3 Nodal and Loop Analysis Techniques 79 3.1 Nodal Analysis 79 3.2 Loop Analysis 100 3.3 Application Example 117 3.4 Design Example 118 Summary 119 4 Operational Amplifiers 120 4.1 Introduction 120 4.2 Op-Amp Models 121 4.3 Fundamental Op-Amp Circuits 127 4.4 Comparators 135 4.5 Application Examples 136 4.6 Design Examples 140 Summary 144 5 Additional Analysis Techniques 145 5.1 Introduction 145 5.2 Superposition 148 5.3 Thévenin’s and Norton’s Theorems 153 5.4 Maximum Power Transfer 171 5.5 Application Example 175 5.6 Design Examples 176 Summary 181 6 Capacitance and Inductance 182 6.1 Capacitors 182 6.2 Inductors 189 6.3 Capacitor and Inductor Combinations 198 6.4 RC Operational Amplifier Circuits 206 6.5 Application Examples 208 6.6 Design Examples 213 Summary 214 7 First- and Second-Order Transient Circuits 215 7.1 Introduction 215 7.2 First-Order Circuits 217 7.3 Second-Order Circuits 237 7.4 Application Examples 250 7.5 Design Examples 259 Summary 266 8 AC Steady-State Analysis 268 8.1 Sinusoids 268 8.2 Sinusoidal and Complex Forcing Functions 271 8.3 Phasors 275 8.4 Phasor Relationships for Circuit Elements 277 8.5 Impedance and Admittance 281 8.6 Phasor Diagrams 287 8.7 Basic Analysis Using Kirchhoff’s Laws 290 8.8 Analysis Techniques 293 8.9 Application Examples 305 8.10 Design Examples 307 Summary 310 9 Steady-State Power Analysis 311 9.1 Instantaneous Power 311 9.2 Average Power 312 9.3 Maximum Average Power Transfer 318 9.4 Effective or RMS Values 322 9.5 The Power Factor 325 9.6 Complex Power 327 9.7 Power Factor Correction 333 9.8 Single-Phase Three-Wire Circuits 337 9.9 Safety Considerations 340 9.10 Application Examples 348 9.11 Design Examples 352 Summary 355 10 Magnetically Coupled Networks 356 10.1 Mutual Inductance 356 10.2 Energy Analysis 367 10.3 The Ideal Transformer 370 10.4 Safety Considerations 379 10.5 Application Examples 380 10.6 Design Examples 385 Summary 388 11 Polyphase Circuits 389 11.1 Three-Phase Circuits 389 11.2 Three-Phase Connections 394 11.3 Source/Load Connections 396 11.4 Power Relationships 404 11.5 Power Factor Correction 408 11.6 Application Examples 410 11.7 Design Examples 413 Summary 417 12 Variable-Frequency Network Performance 418 12.1 Variable Frequency-Response Analysis 418 12.2 Sinusoidal Frequency Analysis 426 12.3 Resonant Circuits 438 12.4 Scaling 458 12.5 Filter Networks 460 12.6 Application Examples 484 12.7 Design Examples 488 Summary 494 13 The Laplace Transform 496 13.1 Definition 496 13.2 Two Important Singularity Functions 497 13.3 Transform Pairs 499 13.4 Properties of the Transform 501 13.5 Performing the Inverse Transform 503 13.6 Convolution Integral 509 13.7 Initial-Value and Final-Value Theorems 512 13.8 Solving Differential Equations with Laplace Transforms 514 Summary 516 14 Application of the Laplace Transform to Circuit Analysis 517 14.1 Laplace Circuit Solutions 517 14.2 Circuit Element Models 519 14.3 Analysis Techniques 521 14.4 Transfer Function 532 14.5 Pole-Zero Plot/Bode Plot Connection 552 14.6 Steady-State Response 554 Summary 558 15 Fourier Analysis Techniques 559 15.1 Fourier Series 559 15.2 Fourier Transform 583 15.3 Application Example 594 15.4 Design Examples 595 Summary 601 16 Two-Port Networks 602 16.1 Admittance Parameters 602 16.2 Impedance Parameters 605 16.3 Hybrid Parameters 607 16.4 Transmission Parameters 609 16.5 Parameter Conversions 611 16.6 Interconnection of Two-Ports 611 Summary 617 Appendix Complex Numbers 618 Problems 626 Index I-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn up-to-date guide to an overview of authentication in the Internet of Things (IoT) The Internet of things (IoT) is the network of the countless physical devices that have the possibility to connect and exchange data. Among the various security requirements, authentication to the IoT is the first step to prevent the impact of attackers. IoT Security offers an important guide into the development of the many authentication mechanisms that provide IoT authentication at various levels such as user level, device level and network level. The book covers a wide range of topics including an overview of IoT and addresses in detail the security challenges at every layer by considering both the technologies and the architecture used. The authorsnoted experts on the topicprovide solutions for remediation of compromised security, as well as methods for risk mitigation, and offer suggestions for prevention and improvement. In addition, IoT Security offers a variety of illustrative use cases. This Table of ContentsAbout the Editors xiii List of Contributors xvii Preface xxiii Acknowledgments xxix Part I IoT Overview 1 1 Introduction to IoT 3Anshuman Kalla, Pawani Prombage, and Madhusanka Liyanage 1.1 Introduction 4 1.1.1 Evolution of IoT 4 1.2 IoT Architecture and Taxonomy 5 1.3 Standardization Efforts 7 1.4 IoT Applications 10 1.4.1 Smart Home 11 1.4.2 Smart City 13 1.4.3 Smart Energy 14 1.4.4 Healthcare 15 1.4.5 IoT Automotive 16 1.4.6 Gaming, AR and VR 16 1.4.7 Retail 17 1.4.8 Wearable 18 1.4.9 Smart Agriculture 18 1.4.10 Industrial Internet 19 1.4.11 Tactile Internet 19 1.4.12 Conclusion 20 Acknowledgement 20 References 20 2 Introduction to IoT Security 27Anca D. Jurcut, Pasika Ranaweera, and Lina Xu 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Attacks and Countermeasures 29 2.2.1 Perception Layer 30 2.2.2 Network Layer 33 2.2.3 Application Layer 34 2.3 Authentication and Authorization 41 2.3.1 Authentication 42 2.3.2 Authorization 42 2.3.3 Authentication at IoT Layers 43 2.4 Other Security Features and Related Issues 48 2.4.1 The Simplified Layer Structure 48 2.4.2 The Idea of Middleware 49 2.4.3 Cross-Layer Security Problem 50 2.4.4 Privacy 50 2.4.5 Risk Mitigation 51 2.5 Discussion 52 2.6 Future Research Directions 54 2.6.1 Blockchain 54 2.6.2 5G 55 2.6.3 Fog and Edge Computing 56 2.6.4 Quantum Security, AI, and Predictive Data Analytics 57 2.6.5 Network Slicing 57 2.7 Conclusions 58 References 59 Part II IoT Network and Communication Authentication 65 3 Symmetric Key-Based Authentication with an Application to Wireless Sensor Networks 67An Braeken 3.1 Introduction 67 3.2 Related Work 69 3.3 System Model and Assumptions 70 3.3.1 Design Goals 70 3.3.2 Setting 70 3.3.3 Notations 71 3.3.4 Attack Model 71 3.4 Scheme in Normal Mode 72 3.4.1 Installation Phase 72 3.4.2 Group Node Key 73 3.4.3 Individual Cluster Key 73 3.4.4 Pairwise Key Derivation 74 3.4.5 Multicast Key 76 3.4.6 Group Cluster Key 76 3.5 Authentication 77 3.5.1 Authentication by CN 77 3.5.2 Authenticated Broadcast by the CH 77 3.5.3 Authenticated Broadcast by the BS 78 3.6 Scheme in Change Mode 78 3.6.1 Capture of CN 78 3.6.2 Capture of CH 79 3.6.3 Changes for Honest Nodes 79 3.7 Security Analysis 80 3.7.1 Resistance Against Impersonation Attack 80 3.7.2 Resistance Against Node Capture 81 3.7.3 Resistance Against Replay Attacks 81 3.8 Efficiency 81 3.8.1 Number of Communication Phases 81 3.8.2 Storage Requirements 82 3.8.3 Packet Fragmentation 82 3.9 Conclusions 83 Acknowledgement 83 References 83 4 Public Key Based Protocols – EC Crypto 85Pawani Porambage, An Braeken, and Corinna Schmitt 4.1 Introduction to ECC 85 4.1.1 Notations 86 4.1.2 ECC for Authentication and Key Management 87 4.2 ECC Based Implicit Certificates 88 4.2.1 Authentication and Key Management Using ECC Implicit Certificates 88 4.3 ECC-Based Signcryption 91 4.3.1 Security Features 93 4.3.2 Scheme 93 4.4 ECC-Based Group Communication 95 4.4.1 Background and Assumptions 95 4.4.2 Scheme 96 4.5 Implementation Aspects 97 4.6 Discussion 98 References 98 5 Lattice-Based Cryptography and Internet of Things 101Veronika Kuchta and Gaurav Sharma 5.1 Introduction 101 5.1.1 Organization 102 5.2 Lattice-Based Cryptography 102 5.2.1 Notations 102 5.2.2 Preliminaries 103 5.2.3 Computational Problems 104 5.2.4 State-of-the-Art 105 5.3 Lattice-Based Primitives 106 5.3.1 One-Way and Collision-Resistant Hash Functions 106 5.3.2 Passively Secure Encryption 106 5.3.3 Actively Secure Encryption 107 5.3.4 Trapdoor Functions 107 5.3.5 Gadget Trapdoor 108 5.3.6 Digital Signatures without Trapdoors 108 5.3.7 Pseudorandom Functions (PRF) 109 5.3.8 Homomorphic Encryption 110 5.3.9 Identity-Based Encryption (IBE) 111 5.3.10 Attribute-Based Encryption 112 5.4 Lattice-Based Cryptography for IoT 113 5.5 Conclusion 115 References 115 Part III IoT User Level Authentication 119 6 Efficient and Anonymous Mutual Authentication Protocol in Multi-Access Edge Computing (MEC) Environments 121Pardeep Kumar and Madhusanka Liyanage 6.1 Introduction 121 6.2 Related Work 123 6.3 Network Model and Adversary Model 124 6.3.1 Network Model 124 6.3.2 Adversary Model 125 6.4 Proposed Scheme 125 6.4.1 System Setup for the Edge Nodes Registration at the Registration Center 125 6.4.2 User Registration Phase 126 6.4.3 Login and User Authentication Phase 126 6.4.4 Password Update Phase 127 6.5 Security and Performance Evaluation 127 6.5.1 Informal Security Analysis 127 6.5.2 Performance Analysis 129 6.6 Conclusion 130 References 130 7 Biometric-Based Robust Access Control Model for Industrial Internet of Things Applications 133Pardeep Kumar and Gurjot Singh Gaba 7.1 Introduction 133 7.2 Related Work 134 7.3 Network Model, Threat Model and Security Requirements 136 7.3.1 Network Model 136 7.3.2 Threat Model 136 7.3.3 Security Goals 136 7.4 Proposed Access Control Model in IIoT 136 7.4.1 System Setup 137 7.4.2 Authentication and Key Establishment 138 7.5 Security and Performance Evaluations 139 7.5.1 Informal Security Analysis 139 7.5.2 Performance Analysis 140 7.6 Conclusions 141 References 142 8 Gadget Free Authentication 143Madhusanka Liyanage, An Braeken, and Mika Ylianttila 8.1 Introduction to Gadget-Free World 143 8.2 Introduction to Biometrics 146 8.3 Gadget-Free Authentication 148 8.4 Preliminary Aspects 149 8.4.1 Security Requirements 149 8.4.2 Setting 149 8.4.3 Notations 150 8.5 The System 150 8.5.1 Registration Phase 151 8.5.2 Installation Phase 151 8.5.3 Request Phase 151 8.5.4 Answer Phase 152 8.5.5 Update Phase 153 8.6 Security Analysis 153 8.6.1 Accountability 153 8.6.2 Replay Attacks 153 8.6.3 Insider Attacks 153 8.6.4 HW/SW Attacks 154 8.6.5 Identity Privacy 154 8.7 Performance Analysis 154 8.7.1 Timing for Cryptographic/Computational Operation 155 8.7.2 Communication Cost 155 8.8 Conclusions 156 Acknowledgement 156 References 156 9 WebMaDa 2.1 – A Web-Based Framework for Handling User Requests Automatically and Addressing Data Control in Parallel 159Corinna Schmitt, Dominik Bünzli, and Burkhard Stiller 9.1 Introduction 159 9.2 IoT-Related Concerns 160 9.3 Design Decisions 162 9.4 WebMaDa’s History 163 9.5 WebMaDa 2.1 166 9.5.1 Email Notifications 166 9.5.2 Data Control Support 171 9.6 Implementation 173 9.6.1 Mailing Functionality 173 9.6.2 Logging Functionality 175 9.6.3 Filtering Functionality 176 9.7 Proof of Operability 176 9.7.1 Automated Request Handling 177 9.7.2 Filtering Functionality Using Logging Solution 182 9.8 Summary and Conclusions 182 References 183 Part IV IoT Device Level Authentication 185 10 PUF-Based Authentication and Key Exchange for Internet of Things 187An Braeken 10.1 Introduction 187 10.2 Related Work 189 10.2.1 Key Agreement from IoT Device to Server 189 10.2.2 Key Agreement between Two IoT Devices 190 10.3 Preliminaries 191 10.3.1 System Architecture 191 10.3.2 Assumptions 192 10.3.3 Attack Model 192 10.3.4 Cryptographic Operations 193 10.4 Proposed System 194 10.4.1 Registration Phase 195 10.4.2 Security Association Phase 195 10.4.3 Authentication and Key Agreement Phase 195 10.5 Security Evaluation 197 10.6 Performance 199 10.6.1 Computational Cost 199 10.6.2 Communication Cost 200 10.7 Conclusions 201 References 202 11 Hardware-Based Encryption via Generalized Synchronization of Complex Networks 205Lars Keuninckx and Guy Van der Sande 11.1 Introduction 205 11.2 System Scheme: Synchronization without Correlation 208 11.2.1 The Delay-Filter-Permute Block 211 11.2.2 Steady-State Dynamics of the DFP 214 11.2.3 DFP-Bitstream Generation 214 11.2.4 Sensitivity to Changes in the Permutation Table 215 11.3 The Chaotic Followers 217 11.3.1 The Permute-Filter Block 217 11.3.2 Brute Force Attack 219 11.3.3 PF-Bitstream Generation 219 11.4 The Complete System 220 11.4.1 Image Encryption Example 220 11.4.2 Usage for Authentication 221 11.5 Conclusions and Outlook 222 Acknowledgements 223 Author Contributions Statement 223 Additional Information 223 References 223 Part V IoT Use Cases and Implementations 225 12 IoT Use Cases and Implementations: Healthcare 227Mehrnoosh Monshizadeh, Vikramajeet Khatri, Oskari Koskimies, and Mauri Honkanen 12.1 Introduction 227 12.2 Remote Patient Monitoring Architecture 228 12.3 Security Related to eHealth 229 12.3.1 IoT Authentication 231 12.4 Remote Patient Monitoring Security 234 12.4.1 Mobile Application Security 234 12.4.2 Communication Security 235 12.4.3 Data Integrity 235 12.4.4 Cloud Security 235 12.4.5 Audit Logs 236 12.4.6 Intrusion Detection Module 236 12.4.7 Authentication Architecture 240 12.4.8 Attacks on Remote Patient Monitoring Platform 242 12.5 Conclusion 242 References 244 13 Secure and Efficient Privacy-preserving Scheme in Connected Smart Grid Networks 247An Braeken and Pardeep Kumar 13.1 Introduction 247 13.1.1 Related Work 249 13.1.2 Our Contributions 250 13.1.3 Structure of Chapter 251 13.2 Preliminaries 251 13.2.1 System Model 251 13.2.2 Security Requirements 251 13.2.3 Cryptographic Operations and Notations 252 13.3 Proposed Scheme 253 13.3.1 Initialisation Phase 253 13.3.2 Smart Meter Registration Phase 253 13.3.3 Secure Communication Between Smart Meter and Aggregator 254 13.4 Security Analysis 255 13.4.1 Formal Proof 255 13.4.2 Informal Discussion 258 13.5 Performance Analysis 260 13.5.1 Computation Costs 260 13.5.2 Communication Costs 261 13.6 Conclusions 262 References 262 14 Blockchain-Based Cyber Physical Trust Systems 265Arnold Beckmann, Alex Milne, Jean-Jose Razafindrakoto, Pardeep Kumar, Michael Breach, and Norbert Preining 14.1 Introduction 265 14.2 Related Work 268 14.3 Overview of Use-Cases and Security Goals 269 14.3.1 Use-Cases 269 14.3.2 Security Goals 270 14.4 Proposed Approach 270 14.5 Evaluation Results 272 14.5.1 Security Features 272 14.5.2 Testbed Results 273 14.6 Conclusion 276 References 276 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a strong foundation in electrochemical principles and best practices Written for undergraduate majors in chemistry and chemical engineering, this book teaches the basic principles of electroanalytical chemistry and illustrates best practices through the use of case studies of organic reactions and catalysis using voltammetric methods and of the measurement of clinical and environmental analytes by potentiometric techniques. It provides insight beyond the field of analysis as students address problems arising in many areas of science and technology. The book also emphasizes electrochemical phenomena and conceptual models to help readers understand the influence of experimental conditions and the interpretation of results for common potentiometric and voltammetric methods. Electroanalytical Chemistry: Principles, Best Practices, and Case Studies begins by introducing some basic concepts in electrical phenomena. It then moves on to a chapter that exTable of ContentsPreface ix 1. Basic Electrical Principles 1 1.1 Overview 2 1.2 Basic Concepts 4 1.2.1 Volt Defined 7 1.2.2 Current Defined 7 1.2.3 Oxidation and Reduction 8 1.2.4 Current and Faraday’s Law 8 1.2.5 Potential, Work, and Gibbs’ Free Energy Change 9 1.2.6 Methods Based on Voltage Measurement Versus Current Measurement 10 1.3 Electrochemical Cells 10 1.3.1 Electrodes 10 1.3.2 Cell Resistance 12 1.3.3 Supporting Electrolyte 13 1.4 The Electrified Interface or Electrical Double Layer 14 1.4.1 Structure of the Double Layer 14 1.4.2 The Relationship Between Double Layer Charge and the Potential at the Electrode Interface 20 1.5 Conductance 22 1.6 Mass Transport by Convection and Diffusion 24 1.7 Liquid Junction Potentials 26 Problems 29 References 29 2. Potentiometry of Oxidation–Reduction Processes 31 2.1 Overview 31 2.2 Measuring “Open Circuit” Potentials 33 2.3 Solution Redox Potential 34 2.3.1 The Development of a Charge Separation 35 2.3.2 The Nernst Equation 36 2.3.3 Formal Potential 38 2.3.4 Active Metal Indicator Electrodes 41 2.3.5 Redox Titrations 52 2.3.6 Oxidation–Reduction Potential (ORP) or EH 55 2.3.7 Environmental Applications of Redox Measurements 57 Problems 64 References 66 3. Potentiometry of Ion Selective Electrodes 69 3.1 Overview 69 3.2 Liquid Membrane Devices 73 3.2.1 Selective Accumulation of Ions Inside an Organic Liquid 73 3.2.2 Theory of Membrane Potentials 77 3.2.3 Liquid Membrane Ionophores 80 3.3 Glass Membrane Sensors 82 3.3.1 History of the Development of a Glass Sensor of pH 82 3.3.2 Glass Structure and Sensor Properties 83 3.3.3 Selective Ion Exchange Model 87 3.3.4 The Combination pH Electrode 88 3.3.5 Gas-Sensing Electrodes 89 3.4 Crystalline Membrane Electrodes 93 3.5 Calibration Curves and Detection Limits 96 3.6 A Revolutionary Improvement in Detection Limits 100 3.7 More Recent Ion Selective Electrode Innovations 102 3.7.1 The Function of the Inner Reference Electrode 103 3.7.2 All Solid-State Reference Electrodes 104 3.7.3 Eliminating the Inner Reference Electrode 105 3.7.4 Super-Hydrophobic Membranes 107 3.8 Ion Selective Field Effect Transistors (ISFETs) 108 3.9 Practical Considerations 111 3.9.1 Ionic Strength Buffers 111 3.9.2 Potential Drift 112 Problems 112 References 114 4. Applications of Ion Selective Electrodes 117 4.1 Overview 117 4.2 Case I. An Industrial Application 118 4.2.1 Will the Sample Concentrations Be Measurable? 118 4.2.2 Ionic Strength Adjustment Buffer 118 4.2.3 Sample Pretreatment 119 4.2.4 Salt Bridges 120 4.2.5 Calibration 122 4.2.6 Temperature Control 123 4.2.7 Signal Drift 124 4.2.8 Validating the Method 124 4.2.9 Standard Additions for Potentiometric Analysis 127 4.3 Case II. A Clinical Application 130 4.4 Case III. Environmental Applications 135 4.4.1 US EPA Method for Nitrate Determination by ISE 136 4.4.2 Field Measurements 139 4.5 Good Lab Practice for pH Electrode Use 142 4.5.1 Electrode Maintenance 142 4.5.2 Standard Buffers 143 4.5.3 Influence of Temperature on Cell Potentials 143 4.5.4 Calibration and Direct Sample Measurement 145 4.5.5 Evaluating the Response of a pH Electrode 145 4.5.6 Calibrating a Combination Electrode and pH Meter 147 4.5.7 Low Ionic Strength Samples 148 4.5.8 Samples Containing Soil, Food, Protein or Tris Buffer 148 4.5.9 pH Titrations 149 4.5.10 Gran Plots 149 Problems 151 References 153 5. Controlled Potential Methods 157 5.1 Overview 157 5.2 Similarities between Spectroscopy and Voltammetry 161 5.3 Current is a Measure of the Rate of the Overall Electrode Process 163 5.3.1 Rate of Electron Transfer 163 5.3.2 The Shape of the Current/Voltage Curve 167 5.3.3 Rate of Mass Transport 168 5.3.4 Electrochemical Reversibility 173 5.3.5 Voltammetry at Stationary Electrodes in Quiet Solutions 175 5.4 Methods for Avoiding Background Current 186 5.5 Working Electrodes 190 5.5.1 Mercury Electrodes 190 5.5.2 Solid Working Electrodes 191 5.5.3 Ultramicroelectrodes 199 5.5.4 Fast Scan CV 204 5.6 Pulse Amperometric Detection 207 5.7 Stripping Voltammetry 209 5.8 Special Applications of Amperometry 212 5.8.1 Flow-Through Detectors 212 5.8.2 Dissolved Oxygen Sensors 213 5.8.3 Enzyme Electrodes 215 5.8.4 Karl Fisher Method for Moisture Determination 218 5.9 Ion Transfer Voltammetry 222 Problems 230 References 235 6. Case Studies in Controlled Potential Methods 237 6.1 Overview 237 6.2 Case I. Evaluating the Formal Potential and Related Parameters 238 6.3 Case II. Evaluating Catalysts – Thermodynamic Considerations 242 6.4 Case III. Studying the Oxidation of Organic Molecules 246 6.5 Case IV. Evaluating Catalysts – Kinetic Studies 260 References 268 7. Instrumentation 269 7.1 Overview 269 7.2 A Brief Review of Passive Circuits 270 7.3 Operational Amplifiers 273 7.3.1 Properties of an Ideal Operational Amplifier 275 7.3.2 The Voltage Follower 275 7.3.3 Current Follower or Current-to-Voltage Converter 276 7.3.4 Inverter or Simple Gain Amplifier 277 7.3.5 A Potentiostat for a Three-Electrode Experiment 279 7.4 Noise and Shielding 280 7.5 Making Electrodes and Reference Bridges 283 7.5.1 Voltammetric Working Electrodes 283 7.5.2 Reference Electrodes 284 Problems 286 References 288 Appendix A Ionic Strength, Activity, and Activity Coefficients 289 Appendix B The Nicolsky–Eisenman Equation 293 Appendix C The Henderson Equation for Liquid Junction Potentials 297 Appendix D Standard Electrode Potentials for Some Selected Reduction Reactions 303 Appendix E The Nernst Equation from the Concept of Electrochemical Potential 307 Solutions to Problems 311 Index 333

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xi Preface to the Fourth Edition xiii Preface to the Third Edition xv Preface to the Second Edition xvii Preface to the First Edition xix Part I Fundamentals 1 1 Solar Radiation 3 1.1 The Sun 3 1.2 The Solar Constant 5 1.3 Spectral Distribution of Extraterrestrial Radiation 6 1.4 Variation of Extraterrestrial Radiation 8 1.5 Definitions 9 1.6 Direction of Beam Radiation 12 1.7 Angles for Tracking Surfaces 20 1.8 Ratio of Beam Radiation on Tilted Surface to That on Horizontal Surface 24 1.9 Shading 30 1.10 Extraterrestrial Radiation on a Horizontal Surface 37 1.11 Summary 41 References 43 2 Available Solar Radiation 45 2.1 Definitions 45 2.2 Pyrheliometers and Pyrheliometric Scales 46 2.3 Pyranometers 50 2.4 Measurement of Duration of Sunshine 55 2.5 Solar Radiation Data 56 2.6 Atmospheric Attenuation of Solar Radiation 61 2.7 Estimation of Average Solar Radiation 66 2.8 Estimation of Clear-Sky Radiation 70 2.9 Distribution of Clear and Cloudy Days and Hours 73 2.10 Beam and Diffuse Components of Hourly Radiation 76 2.11 Beam and Diffuse Components of Daily Radiation 79 2.12 Beam and Diffuse Components of Monthly Radiation 81 2.13 Estimation of Hourly Radiation from Daily Data 83 2.14 Radiation on Sloped Surfaces 86 2.15 Radiation on Sloped Surfaces: Isotropic Sky 91 2.16 Radiation on Sloped Surfaces: Anisotropic Sky 92 2.17 Radiation Augmentation 98 2.18 Beam Radiation on Moving Surfaces 103 2.19 Average Radiation on Sloped Surfaces: Isotropic Sky 104 2.20 Average Radiation on Sloped Surfaces: KT Method 108 2.21 Effects of Receiving Surface Orientation on HT 114 2.22 Utilizability 116 2.23 Generalized Utilizability 120 2.24 Daily Utilizability 128 2.25 Summary 134 References 136 3 Selected Heat Transfer Topics 141 3.1 The Electromagnetic Spectrum 141 3.2 Photon Radiation 142 3.3 The Blackbody: Perfect Absorber and Emitter 142 3.4 Planck’s Law and Wien’s Displacement Law 143 3.5 Stefan-Boltzmann Equation 144 3.6 Radiation Tables 145 3.7 Radiation Intensity and Flux 147 3.8 Infrared Radiation Exchange Between Gray Surfaces 149 3.9 Sky Radiation 150 3.10 Radiation Heat Transfer Coefficient 151 3.11 Natural Convection Between Flat Parallel Plates and Between Concentric Cylinders 152 3.12 Convection Suppression 157 3.13 Vee-Corrugated Enclosures 161 3.14 Heat Transfer Relations for Internal Flow 162 3.15 Wind Convection Coefficients 166 3.16 Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop in Packed Beds and Perforated Plates 168 3.17 Effectiveness-NTU Calculations for Heat Exchangers 171 3.18 Summary 173 References 174 4 Radiation Characteristics of Opaque Materials 177 4.1 Absorptance and Emittance 178 4.2 Kirchhoff’s Law 180 4.3 Reflectance of Surfaces 181 4.4 Relationships Among Absorptance, Emittance, and Reflectance 185 4.5 Broadband Emittance and Absorptance 186 4.6 Calculation of Emittance and Absorptance 187 4.7 Measurement of Surface Radiation Properties 190 4.8 Selective Surfaces 192 4.9 Mechanisms of Selectivity 196 4.10 Optimum Properties 199 4.11 Angular Dependence of Solar Absorptance 200 4.12 Absorptance of Cavity Receivers 201 4.13 Specularly Reflecting Surfaces 202 4.14 Advanced Radiation Heat Transfer Analysis 203 4.15 Summary 205 References 206 5 Radiation Transmission through Glazing: Absorbed Radiation 209 5.1 Reflection of Radiation 209 5.2 Absorption by Glazing 213 5.3 Optical Properties of Cover Systems 213 5.4 Transmittance for Diffuse Radiation 218 5.5 Transmittance-Absorptance Product 220 5.6 Angular Dependence of (𝜏𝛼) 221 5.7 Spectral Dependence of Transmittance 222 5.8 Effects of Surface Layers on Transmittance 225 5.9 Absorbed Solar Radiation 226 5.10 Monthly Average Absorbed Radiation 230 5.11 Absorptance of Rooms 236 5.12 Absorptance of Photovoltaic Cells 238 5.13 Summary 241 References 243 6 Flat-Plate Collectors 244 6.1 Description of Flat-Plate Collectors 244 6.2 Basic Flat-Plate Energy Balance Equation 245 6.3 Temperature Distributions in Flat-Plate Collectors 246 6.4 Collector Overall Heat Loss Coefficient 248 6.5 Temperature Distribution Between Tubes and the Collector Efficiency Factor 262 6.6 Temperature Distribution in Flow Direction 269 6.7 Collector Heat Removal Factor and Flow Factor 270 6.8 Critical Radiation Level 274 6.9 Mean Fluid and Plate Temperatures 275 6.10 Effective Transmittance-Absorptance Product 276 6.11 Effects of Dust and Shading 279 6.12 Heat Capacity Effects in Flat-Plate Collectors 280 6.13 Liquid Heater Plate Geometries 283 6.14 Air Heaters 288 6.15 Measurements of Collector Performance 295 6.16 Collector Characterizations 296 6.17 Collector Tests: Efficiency, Incidence Angle Modifier, and Time Constant 297 6.18 Test Data 307 6.19 Thermal Test Data Conversion 310 6.20 Flow Rate Corrections to FR (𝜏𝛼)n and FRUL 313 6.21 Flow Distribution in Collectors 316 6.22 In Situ Collector Performance 317 6.23 Practical Considerations for Flat-Plate Collectors 318 6.24 Putting It All Together 321 6.25 Summary 326 References 327 7 Concentrating Collectors 331 7.1 Collector Configurations 332 7.2 Concentration Ratio 334 7.3 Thermal Performance of Concentrating Collectors 336 7.4 Optical Performance of Concentrating Collectors 343 7.5 Cylindrical Absorber Arrays 344 7.6 Optical Characteristics of Nonimaging Concentrators 346 7.7 Orientation and Absorbed Energy for CPC Collectors 354 7.8 Performance of CPC Collectors 358 7.9 Linear Imaging Concentrators: Geometry 360 7.10 Images Formed by Perfect Linear Concentrators 363 7.11 Images from Imperfect Linear Concentrators 368 7.12 Ray-Trace Methods for Evaluating Concentrators 370 7.13 Incidence Angle Modifiers and Energy Balances 370 7.14 Paraboloidal Concentrators 376 7.15 Central-Receiver Collectors 377 7.16 Practical Considerations 378 7.17 Summary 379 References 380 8 Energy Storage 382 8.1 Process Loads and Solar Collector Outputs 382 8.2 Energy Storage in Solar Thermal Systems 384 8.3 Water Storage 385 8.4 Stratification in Storage Tanks 388 8.5 Packed-Bed Storage 393 8.6 Storage Walls 401 8.7 Seasonal Storage 403 8.8 Phase Change Energy Storage 405 8.9 Chemical Energy Storage 410 8.10 Battery Storage 411 8.11 Hydroelectric and Compressed Air Storage 415 8.12 Summary 418 References 419 9 Solar Process Loads 422 9.1 Examples of Time-Dependent Loads 423 9.2 Hot-Water Loads 424 9.3 Space Heating Loads, Degree-Days, and Balance Temperature 425 9.4 Building Loss Coefficients 428 9.5 Building Energy Storage Capacity 430 9.6 Cooling Loads 430 9.7 Swimming Pool Heating Loads 431 9.8 Summary 433 References 434 10 System Thermal Calculations 436 10.1 Component Models 437 10.2 Collector Heat Exchanger Factor 438 10.3 Duct and Pipe Loss Factors 440 10.4 Controls 443 10.5 Collector Arrays: Series Connections 445 10.6 Performance of Partially Shaded Collectors 447 10.7 Series Arrays with Sections Having Different Orientations 449 10.8 Use of Modified Collector Equations 451 10.9 System Models 455 10.10 Solar Fraction and Solar Savings Fraction 458 10.11 Summary 459 References 461 11 Solar Process Economics 462 11.1 Costs of Solar Process Systems 462 11.2 Design Variables 465 11.3 Economic Figures of Merit 467 11.4 Discounting and Inflation 469 11.5 Present-Worth Factor 471 11.6 Life-Cycle Savings Method 474 11.7 Evaluation of Other Economic Indicators 479 11.8 The P1, P2 Method 482 11.9 Uncertainties in Economic Analyses 487 11.10 Economic Analysis Using Solar Savings Fraction 490 11.11 Summary 491 References 491 Part II Applications 493 12 Solar Water Heating: Active and Passive 495 12.1 Water Heating Systems 495 12.2 Freezing, Boiling, and Scaling 499 12.3 Auxiliary Energy 502 12.4 Forced-Circulation Systems 504 12.5 Low-Flow Pumped Systems 505 12.6 Natural-Circulation Systems 507 12.7 Integral Collector Storage Systems 510 12.8 Retrofit Water Heaters 512 12.9 Water Heating in Space Heating and Cooling Systems 512 12.10 Testing and Rating of Solar Water Heaters 513 12.11 Economics of Solar Water Heating 514 12.12 Swimming Pool Heating 517 12.13 Summary 518 References 519 13 Building Heating: Active 521 13.1 Historical Notes 522 13.2 Solar Heating Systems 523 13.3 CSU House III Flat-Plate Liquid System 528 13.4 CSU House II Air System 531 13.5 Heating System Parametric Study 533 13.6 Solar Energy–Heat Pump Systems 537 13.7 Phase Change Storage Systems 542 13.8 Seasonal Energy Storage Systems 545 13.9 Solar and Off-Peak Electric Systems 549 13.10 Solar System Overheating 550 13.11 Solar Heating Economics 551 13.12 Architectural Considerations 554 References 556 14 Building Heating: Passive and Hybrid Methods 559 14.1 Concepts of Passive Heating 560 14.2 Comfort Criteria and Heating Loads 561 14.3 Movable Insulation and Controls 561 14.4 Shading: Overhangs and Wingwalls 562 14.5 Direct-Gain Systems 566 14.6 Collector-Storage Walls and Roofs 571 14.7 Sunspaces 575 14.8 Active Collection–Passive Storage Hybrid Systems 577 14.9 Other Hybrid Systems 578 14.10 Passive Applications 579 14.11 Heat Distribution in Passive Buildings 584 14.12 Costs and Economics of Passive Heating 585 14.13 Summary 587 References 588 15 Solar Cooling 590 15.1 Solar Absorption Cooling 591 15.2 Theory of Absorption Cooling 593 15.3 Combined Solar Heating and Cooling 599 15.4 Simulation Study of Solar Air Conditioning 600 15.5 Operating Experience with Solar Cooling 603 15.6 Applications of Solar Absorption Air Conditioning 606 15.7 Solar Desiccant Cooling 606 15.8 Ventilation and Recirculation Desiccant Cycles 609 15.9 Solar-Mechanical Cooling 611 15.10 Solar-Related Air Conditioning 614 15.11 Passive Cooling 615 References 616 16 Solar Industrial Process Heat 619 16.1 Integration with Industrial Processes 619 16.2 Mechanical Design Considerations 620 16.3 Economics of Industrial Process Heat 621 16.4 Open-Circuit Air Heating Applications 622 16.5 Recirculating Air System Applications 626 16.6 Once-Through Industrial Water Heating 628 16.7 Recirculating Industrial Water Heating 630 16.8 Shallow-Pond Water Heaters 632 16.9 Summary 634 References 634 17 Solar Thermal Power Systems 636 17.1 Thermal Conversion Systems 636 17.2 Gila Bend Pumping System 637 17.3 Luz Systems 639 17.4 Central-Receiver Systems 643 17.5 Solar One and Solar Two Power Plants 645 17.6 Summary 648 References 648 18 Solar Ponds: Evaporative Processes 650 18.1 Salt-Gradient Solar Ponds 650 18.2 Pond Theory 652 18.3 Applications of Ponds 654 18.4 Solar Distillation 655 18.5 Evaporation 661 18.6 Direct Solar Drying 662 18.7 Summary 662 References 663 Part III Design Methods 665 19 Simulations in Solar Process Design 667 19.1 Simulation Programs 668 19.2 Utility of Simulations 668 19.3 Information from Simulations 669 19.4 TRNSYS: Thermal Process Simulation Program 671 19.5 Simulations and Experiments 677 19.6 Meteorological Data 678 19.7 Limitations of Simulations 681 References 681 20 Design of Active Systems: f-Chart 683 20.1 Review of Design Methods 683 20.2 The f-Chart Method 684 20.3 The f-Chart for Liquid Systems 688 20.4 The f-Chart for Air Systems 694 20.5 Service Water Heating Systems 698 20.6 The f-Chart Results 700 20.7 Parallel Solar Energy-Heat Pump Systems 701 20.8 Summary 705 References 705 21 Design of Active Systems by Utilizability Methods 707 21.1 Hourly Utilizability 708 21.2 Daily Utilizability 711 21.3 The 𝜙, f-Chart Method 714 21.4 Summary 724 References 725 22 Design of Passive and Hybrid Heating Systems 726 22.1 Approaches to Passive Design 726 22.2 Solar-Load Ratio Method 727 22.3 Unutilizability Design Method: Direct Gain 736 22.4 Unutilizability Design Method: Collector-Storage Walls 742 22.5 Hybrid Systems: Active Collection with Passive Storage 750 22.6 Other Hybrid Systems 757 22.7 Summary 758 References 758 23 Design of Photovoltaic Systems 760 23.1 Photovoltaic Converters 761 23.2 PV Generator Characteristics and Models 762 23.3 Cell Temperature 773 23.4 Load Characteristics and Direct-Coupled Systems 775 23.5 Controls and Maximum Power Point Trackers 778 23.6 Applications 779 23.7 Design Procedures 780 23.8 High-Flux PV Generators 786 23.9 Summary 786 References 787 24 Wind Energy 789 24.1 Introduction 789 24.2 Wind Resource 793 24.3 One-Dimensional Wind Turbine Model 801 24.4 Estimating Wind Turbine Average Power and Energy Production 806 24.5 Summary 810 References 810 Appendixes 811 A Problems 811 B Nomenclature 870 C International System of Units 875 D Meteorological Data 877 Index 885

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides an extensive, up-to-date treatment of techniques used for machine condition monitoring Clear and concise throughout, this accessible book is the first to be wholly devoted to the field of condition monitoring for rotating machines using vibration signals. It covers various feature extraction, feature selection, and classification methods as well as their applications to machine vibration datasets. It also presents new methods including machine learning and compressive sampling, which help to improve safety, reliability, and performance. Condition Monitoring with Vibration Signals: Compressive Sampling and Learning Algorithms for Rotating Machines starts by introducing readers to Vibration Analysis Techniques and Machine Condition Monitoring (MCM). It then offers readers sections covering: Rotating Machine Condition Monitoring using Learning Algorithms; Classification Algorithms; and New Fault Diagnosis Frameworks designed for MCM. Readers will leTable of ContentsPreface xvii About the Authors xxi List of Abbreviations xxiii Part I Introduction 1 1 Introduction to Machine Condition Monitoring 3 1.1 Background 3 1.2 Maintenance Approaches for Rotating Machines Failures 4 1.2.1 Corrective Maintenance 4 1.2.2 Preventive Maintenance 5 1.2.2.1 Time-Based Maintenance (TBM) 5 1.2.2.2 Condition-Based Maintenance (CBM) 5 1.3 Applications of MCM 5 1.3.1 Wind Turbines 5 1.3.2 Oil and Gas 6 1.3.3 Aerospace and Defence Industry 6 1.3.4 Automotive 7 1.3.5 Marine Engines 7 1.3.6 Locomotives 7 1.4 Condition Monitoring Techniques 7 1.4.1 Vibration Monitoring 7 1.4.2 Acoustic Emission 8 1.4.3 Fusion of Vibration and Acoustic 8 1.4.4 Motor Current Monitoring 8 1.4.5 Oil Analysis and Lubrication Monitoring 8 1.4.6 Thermography 9 1.4.7 Visual Inspection 9 1.4.8 Performance Monitoring 9 1.4.9 Trend Monitoring 10 1.5 Topic Overview and Scope of the Book 10 1.6 Summary 11 References 11 2 Principles of Rotating Machine Vibration Signals 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Machine Vibration Principles 17 2.3 Sources of Rotating Machines Vibration Signals 20 2.3.1 Rotor Mass Unbalance 21 2.3.2 Misalignment 21 2.3.3 Cracked Shafts 21 2.3.4 Rolling Element Bearings 23 2.3.5 Gears 25 2.4 Types of Vibration Signals 25 2.4.1 Stationary 26 2.4.2 Nonstationary 26 2.5 Vibration Signal Acquisition 26 2.5.1 Displacement Transducers 26 2.5.2 Velocity Transducers 26 2.5.3 Accelerometers 27 2.6 Advantages and Limitations of Vibration Signal Monitoring 27 2.7 Summary 28 References 28 Part II Vibration Signal Analysis Techniques 31 3 Time Domain Analysis 33 3.1 Introduction 33 3.1.1 Visual Inspection 33 3.1.2 Features-Based Inspection 35 3.2 Statistical Functions 35 3.2.1 Peak Amplitude 36 3.2.2 Mean Amplitude 36 3.2.3 Root Mean Square Amplitude 36 3.2.4 Peak-to-Peak Amplitude 36 3.2.5 Crest Factor (CF) 36 3.2.6 Variance and Standard Deviation 37 3.2.7 Standard Error 37 3.2.8 Zero Crossing 38 3.2.9 Wavelength 39 3.2.10 Willison Amplitude 39 3.2.11 Slope Sign Change 39 3.2.12 Impulse Factor 39 3.2.13 Margin Factor 40 3.2.14 Shape Factor 40 3.2.15 Clearance Factor 40 3.2.16 Skewness 40 3.2.17 Kurtosis 40 3.2.18 Higher-Order Cumulants (HOCs) 41 3.2.19 Histograms 42 3.2.20 Normal/Weibull Negative Log-Likelihood Value 42 3.2.21 Entropy 42 3.3 Time Synchronous Averaging 44 3.3.1 TSA Signals 44 3.3.2 Residual Signal (RES) 44 3.3.2.1 NA4 44 3.3.2.2 NA4* 45 3.3.3 Difference Signal (DIFS) 45 3.3.3.1 FM4 46 3.3.3.2 M6A 46 3.3.3.3 M8A 46 3.4 Time Series Regressive Models 46 3.4.1 AR Model 47 3.4.2 MA Model 48 3.4.3 ARMA Model 48 3.4.4 ARIMA Model 48 3.5 Filter-Based Methods 49 3.5.1 Demodulation 49 3.5.2 Prony Model 52 3.5.3 Adaptive Noise Cancellation (ANC) 53 3.6 Stochastic Parameter Techniques 54 3.7 Blind Source Separation (BSS) 54 3.8 Summary 55 References 56 4 Frequency Domain Analysis 63 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 Fourier Analysis 64 4.2.1 Fourier Series 64 4.2.2 Discrete Fourier Transform 66 4.2.3 Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 67 4.3 Envelope Analysis 71 4.4 Frequency Spectrum Statistical Features 73 4.4.1 Arithmetic Mean 73 4.4.2 Geometric Mean 73 4.4.3 Matched Filter RMS 73 4.4.4 The RMS of Spectral Difference 74 4.4.5 The Sum of Squares Spectral Difference 74 4.4.6 High-Order Spectra Techniques 74 4.5 Summary 75 References 76 5 Time-Frequency Domain Analysis 79 5.1 Introduction 79 5.2 Short-Time Fourier Transform (STFT) 79 5.3 Wavelet Analysis 82 5.3.1 Wavelet Transform (WT) 82 5.3.1.1 Continuous Wavelet Transform (CWT) 83 5.3.1.2 Discrete Wavelet Transform (DWT) 85 5.3.2 Wavelet Packet Transform (WPT) 89 5.4 Empirical Mode Decomposition (EMD) 91 5.5 Hilbert-Huang Transform (HHT) 94 5.6 Wigner-Ville Distribution 96 5.7 Local Mean Decomposition (LMD) 98 5.8 Kurtosis and Kurtograms 100 5.9 Summary 105 References 106 Part III Rotating Machine Condition Monitoring Using Machine Learning 115 6 Vibration-Based Condition Monitoring Using Machine Learning 117 6.1 Introduction 117 6.2 Overview of the Vibration-Based MCM Process 118 6.2.1 Fault-Detection and -Diagnosis Problem Framework 118 6.3 Learning from Vibration Data 122 6.3.1 Types of Learning 123 6.3.1.1 Batch vs. Online Learning 123 6.3.1.2 Instance-Based vs. Model-Based Learning 123 6.3.1.3 Supervised Learning vs. Unsupervised Learning 123 6.3.1.4 Semi-Supervised Learning 123 6.3.1.5 Reinforcement Learning 124 6.3.1.6 Transfer Learning 124 6.3.2 Main Challenges of Learning from Vibration Data 125 6.3.2.1 The Curse of Dimensionality 125 6.3.2.2 Irrelevant Features 126 6.3.2.3 Environment and Operating Conditions of a Rotating Machine 126 6.3.3 Preparing Vibration Data for Analysis 126 6.3.3.1 Normalisation 126 6.3.3.2 Dimensionality Reduction 127 6.4 Summary 128 References 128 7 Linear Subspace Learning 131 7.1 Introduction 131 7.2 Principal Component Analysis (PCA) 132 7.2.1 PCA Using Eigenvector Decomposition 132 7.2.2 PCA Using SVD 133 7.2.3 Application of PCA in Machine Fault Diagnosis 134 7.3 Independent Component Analysis (ICA) 137 7.3.1 Minimisation of Mutual Information 138 7.3.2 Maximisation of the Likelihood 138 7.3.3 Application of ICA in Machine Fault Diagnosis 139 7.4 Linear Discriminant Analysis (LDA) 141 7.4.1 Application of LDA in Machine Fault Diagnosis 142 7.5 Canonical Correlation Analysis (CCA) 143 7.6 Partial Least Squares (PLS) 145 7.7 Summary 146 References 147 8 Nonlinear Subspace Learning 153 8.1 Introduction 153 8.2 Kernel Principal Component Analysis (KPCA) 153 8.2.1 Application of KPCA in Machine Fault Diagnosis 156 8.3 Isometric Feature Mapping (ISOMAP) 156 8.3.1 Application of ISOMAP in Machine Fault Diagnosis 158 8.4 Diffusion Maps (DMs) and Diffusion Distances 159 8.4.1 Application of DMs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 160 8.5 Laplacian Eigenmap (LE) 161 8.5.1 Application of the LE in Machine Fault Diagnosis 161 8.6 Local Linear Embedding (LLE) 162 8.6.1 Application of LLE in Machine Fault Diagnosis 163 8.7 Hessian-Based LLE 163 8.7.1 Application of HLLE in Machine Fault Diagnosis 164 8.8 Local Tangent Space Alignment Analysis (LTSA) 165 8.8.1 Application of LTSA in Machine Fault Diagnosis 165 8.9 Maximum Variance Unfolding (MVU) 166 8.9.1 Application of MVU in Machine Fault Diagnosis 167 8.10 Stochastic Proximity Embedding (SPE) 168 8.10.1 Application of SPE in Machine Fault Diagnosis 168 8.11 Summary 169 References 170 9 Feature Selection 173 9.1 Introduction 173 9.2 Filter Model-Based Feature Selection 175 9.2.1 Fisher Score (FS) 176 9.2.2 Laplacian Score (LS) 177 9.2.3 Relief and Relief-F Algorithms 178 9.2.3.1 Relief Algorithm 178 9.2.3.2 Relief-F Algorithm 179 9.2.4 Pearson Correlation Coefficient (PCC) 180 9.2.5 Information Gain (IG) and Gain Ratio (GR) 180 9.2.6 Mutual Information (MI) 181 9.2.7 Chi-Squared (Chi-2) 181 9.2.8 Wilcoxon Ranking 181 9.2.9 Application of Feature Ranking in Machine Fault Diagnosis 182 9.3 Wrapper Model–Based Feature Subset Selection 185 9.3.1 Sequential Selection Algorithms 185 9.3.2 Heuristic-Based Selection Algorithms 185 9.3.2.1 Ant Colony Optimisation (ACO) 185 9.3.2.2 Genetic Algorithms (GAs) and Genetic Programming 187 9.3.2.3 Particle Swarm Optimisation (PSO) 188 9.3.3 Application of Wrapper Model–Based Feature Subset Selection in Machine Fault Diagnosis 189 9.4 Embedded Model–Based Feature Selection 192 9.5 Summary 193 References 194 Part IV Classification Algorithms 199 10 Decision Trees and Random Forests 201 10.1 Introduction 201 10.2 Decision Trees 202 10.2.1 Univariate Splitting Criteria 204 10.2.1.1 Gini Index 205 10.2.1.2 Information Gain 206 10.2.1.3 Distance Measure 207 10.2.1.4 Orthogonal Criterion (ORT) 207 10.2.2 Multivariate Splitting Criteria 207 10.2.3 Tree-Pruning Methods 208 10.2.3.1 Error-Complexity Pruning 208 10.2.3.2 Minimum-Error Pruning 209 10.2.3.3 Reduced-Error Pruning 209 10.2.3.4 Critical-Value Pruning 210 10.2.3.5 Pessimistic Pruning 210 10.2.3.6 Minimum Description Length (MDL) Pruning 210 10.2.4 Decision Tree Inducers 211 10.2.4.1 CART 211 10.2.4.2 ID3 211 10.2.4.3 C4.5 211 10.2.4.4 CHAID 212 10.3 Decision Forests 212 10.4 Application of Decision Trees/Forests in Machine Fault Diagnosis 213 10.5 Summary 217 References 217 11 Probabilistic Classification Methods 225 11.1 Introduction 225 11.2 Hidden Markov Model 225 11.2.1 Application of Hidden Markov Models in Machine Fault Diagnosis 228 11.3 Logistic Regression Model 230 11.3.1 Logistic Regression Regularisation 232 11.3.2 Multinomial Logistic Regression Model (MLR) 232 11.3.3 Application of Logistic Regression in Machine Fault Diagnosis 233 11.4 Summary 234 References 235 12 Artificial Neural Networks (ANNs) 239 12.1 Introduction 239 12.2 Neural Network Basic Principles 240 12.2.1 The Multilayer Perceptron 241 12.2.2 The Radial Basis Function Network 243 12.2.3 The Kohonen Network 244 12.3 Application of Artificial Neural Networks in Machine Fault Diagnosis 245 12.4 Summary 253 References 254 13 Support Vector Machines (SVMs) 259 13.1 Introduction 259 13.2 Multiclass SVMs 262 13.3 Selection of Kernel Parameters 263 13.4 Application of SVMs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 263 13.5 Summary 274 References 274 14 Deep Learning 279 14.1 Introduction 279 14.2 Autoencoders 280 14.3 Convolutional Neural Networks (CNNs) 283 14.4 Deep Belief Networks (DBNs) 284 14.5 Recurrent Neural Networks (RNNs) 285 14.6 Overview of Deep Learning in MCM 286 14.6.1 Application of AE-based DNNs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 286 14.6.2 Application of CNNs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 292 14.6.3 Application of DBNs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 296 14.6.4 Application of RNNs in Machine Fault Diagnosis 298 14.7 Summary 299 References 301 15 Classification Algorithm Validation 307 15.1 Introduction 307 15.2 The Hold-Out Technique 308 15.2.1 Three-Way Data Split 309 15.3 Random Subsampling 309 15.4 K-Fold Cross-Validation 310 15.5 Leave-One-Out Cross-Validation 311 15.6 Bootstrapping 311 15.7 Overall Classification Accuracy 312 15.8 Confusion Matrix 313 15.9 Recall and Precision 314 15.10 ROC Graphs 315 15.11 Summary 317 References 318 Part V New Fault Diagnosis Frameworks Designed for MCM 321 16 Compressive Sampling and Subspace Learning (CS-SL) 323 16.1 Introduction 323 16.2 Compressive Sampling for Vibration-Based MCM 325 16.2.1 Compressive Sampling Basics 325 16.2.2 CS for Sparse Frequency Representation 328 16.2.3 CS for Sparse Time-Frequency Representation 329 16.3 Overview of CS in Machine Condition Monitoring 330 16.3.1 Compressed Sensed Data Followed by Complete Data Construction 330 16.3.2 Compressed Sensed Data Followed by Incomplete Data Construction 331 16.3.3 Compressed Sensed Data as the Input of a Classifier 332 16.3.4 Compressed Sensed Data Followed by Feature Learning 333 16.4 Compressive Sampling and Feature Ranking (CS-FR) 333 16.4.1 Implementations 334 16.4.1.1 CS-LS 336 16.4.1.2 CS-FS 336 16.4.1.3 CS-Relief-F 337 16.4.1.4 CS-PCC 338 16.4.1.5 CS-Chi-2 338 16.5 CS and Linear Subspace Learning-Based Framework for Fault Diagnosis 339 16.5.1 Implementations 339 16.5.1.1 CS-PCA 339 16.5.1.2 CS-LDA 340 16.5.1.3 CS-CPDC 341 16.6 CS and Nonlinear Subspace Learning-Based Framework for Fault Diagnosis 343 16.6.1 Implementations 344 16.6.1.1 CS-KPCA 344 16.6.1.2 CS-KLDA 345 16.6.1.3 CS-CMDS 346 16.6.1.4 CS-SPE 346 16.7 Applications 348 16.7.1 Case Study 1 348 16.7.1.1 The Combination of MMV-CS and Several Feature-Ranking Techniques 350 16.7.1.2 The Combination of MMV-CS and Several Linear and Nonlinear Subspace Learning Techniques 352 16.7.2 Case Study 2 354 16.7.2.1 The Combination of MMV-CS and Several Feature-Ranking Techniques 354 16.7.2.2 The Combination of MMV-CS and Several Linear and Nonlinear Subspace Learning Techniques 355 16.8 Discussion 355 References 357 17 Compressive Sampling and Deep Neural Network (CS-DNN) 361 17.1 Introduction 361 17.2 Related Work 361 17.3 CS-SAE-DNN 362 17.3.1 Compressed Measurements Generation 362 17.3.2 CS Model Testing Using the Flip Test 363 17.3.3 DNN-Based Unsupervised Sparse Overcomplete Feature Learning 363 17.3.4 Supervised Fine Tuning 367 17.4 Applications 367 17.4.1 Case Study 1 367 17.4.2 Case Study 2 372 17.5 Discussion 375 References 375 18 Conclusion 379 18.1 Introduction 379 18.2 Summary and Conclusion 380 Appendix Machinery Vibration Data Resources and Analysis Algorithms 389 References 394 Index 395

Read more less